THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


'.■•Wi-Vt«K5' 


mf^^i^m^^m: 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2008  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/clironiclesofGounOOIiope 


r— z 


V 


THE 

CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO 


THE  CHRONICLES  OF 
COUNT  ANTONIO 


BY 

ANTHONY   HOPE 

AUTHOR    OF   THE    PRISONER   OF    ZENDA,    ETC. 
iVITH  PHOTOGRA  VURE  FRONTISPIECE  BY  S.  IV.   VAN  SCHAICK 


NEW     YORK 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY 

1895 


Copyright,  i8gs, 
By  ANTHONY   HOPE. 

Copyright,  1895, 
By  D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY. 


TO    THE 
HONOURABLE  SIR  HENRY  HAWKINS. 

My  dear  Sir  Henry  : 

It  gives  me  very  great  pleasure  to  be  allowed 
to  dedicate  this  book  to  you.  I  hope  you  will 
accept  it  as  a  token  of  thanks  for  ?nuch  kind/iess, 
of  your  former  ATarshaVs  plcasajit  memory  of 
his  service,  and  of  sincere  respect  for  a  clear- 
sighted, firm,  and  coinpassionate  Judge. 
Your  affectionate  cousin, 

A.  H.  H. 
Loudon,  August,  iSg^. 


625468 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I. — How  Count  Antonio  took  to  the  hills     .        .        i 


II. — Count  Antpnio  and  the  traitor  prince 
III. — Count  Antonio  and  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia, 
»^IV. — Count  Antonio  and  the  wizard's  drug 
-nv.-— Count  Antonio  and  the  sacred  bones 
VI.— Count  Antonio  and  the  hermit  of  the  vault 
"VII. — Count  Antonio  and  the  Lady  of  Rilano  . 
VIII. — The  manner  of  Count  Antonio's  return    . 

vii 


39 

71 

116 

158 
202 

245 
290 


THE    CHRONICLES    OF 
COUNT   ANTONIO. 


CHAPTER   I. 

HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS. 

^ .  Countless  are  the  stories  told  of  the  sayings 
^  t^at  Count  Antonio  spoke  and  of  the  deeds'-  that 
he  did  when  he  dwelt  an  outlaw  in  the  hills.  For 
tales  and  legends  gather  round  his  name  thick  as 
the  berries  hang  on  a  bush,  and  with  the  passage 
of  every  succeeding  year  it  grows  harder  to  dis- 
cern where  truth  lies  and  where  the  love  of  won- 
der, working  together  with  the  sway  of  a  great 
man's  memory,  has  wrought  the  embroidery  of 
its  fancy  on  the  plain  robe  of  fact.  Yet,  amid  all 
that  is  of  uncertain  knowledge  and  so  must  rest, 
this  much  at  least  should  be  known  and  remem- 
bered for  the  honour  of  a  noble  family,  how  it 
fell  out  that  Count  Antonio,  a  man  of  high  line- 


2  THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

age,  forsook  the  service  of  his  Prince,  disdained 
the  obligation  of  his  rank,  set  law  at  naught,  and 
did  what  seemed  indeed  in  his  own  eyes  to  be 
good  but  was  held  b}'  many  to  be  nothing  other 
than  the  work  of  a  rebel  and  a  brigand.  Yet, 
although  it  is  by  these  names  that  men  often 
speak  of  him,  they  love  his  memory ;  and  I  also, 
Ambrose  the  Franciscan,  having  gathered  dili- 
gently all  that  I  could  come  by  in  the  archives  of 
the  city  or  from  the  lips  of  aged  folk,  have 
learned  to  love  it  in  some  sort.  Thus  I  am 
minded  to  write,  before  the  time  that  I  must 
carry  what  I  know  with  me  to  the  grave,  the  full 
and  whole  truth  concerning  Antonio's  flight  from 
the  city  and  the  Court,  seeking  in  my  heart,  as  I 
write,  excuse  for  him,  and  finding  in  the  record, 
if  little  else,  yet  a  tale  that  lovers  must  read  in 
pride  and  sorrow,  and,  if  this  be  not  too  high  a 
hope,  that  princes  may  study  for  profit  and  for 
warning. 

Now  it  was  in  the  tenth  year  of  the  reign  of 
Duke  Valentine  over  the  city  of  Firmola,  its  ter- 
ritories and  dependent  towns,  that  Count  Antonio 
of  Monte  Velhito — having  with  him  a   youthful 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE    HILLS.      3 

cousin  of  his,  whom  he  loved  greatly,  and  whom, 
by  reason  of  his  small  stature  and  of  a  boyish 
gaiety  he  had,  men  called  Tommasino — came  from 
his  own  house  on  the  hill  that  fronts  the  great 
gate  of  the  city,  to  the  palace  of  the  Duke,  with 
intent  to  ask  His  Highness's  sanction  for  his  mar- 
riage with  the  Lady  Lucia.  This  lady,  being  then 
seventeen  years  of  age,  loved  Antonio,  and  he 
her,  and  troth  had  been  privily  plighted  between 
them  for  maiiy  months ;  and  such  was  the 
^strength  and  power  of  the  love  they  bore  the  one 
-tOf-the  other,  that  even  to  this  day  the  old  mock 
at  young  lovers  who  show  themselves  overfond, 
crying,  "  'Tis  Lucia  and  Antonio  !  " 

But  since  the  Lady  Lucia  was  an  orphan,  An- 
tonio came  now  to  the  Duke,  who  enjoyed  ward- 
ship over  her,  and  setting  out  his  passion  and 
how  that  his  estate  was  sufficient  and  his  family 
such  as  the  Duke  knew,  prayed  leave  of  His 
Highness  to  wed  her.  But  the  Duke,  a  crafty 
and  subtle  prince,  knowing  Antonio's  temper 
and  the  favour  in  which  he  was  held  by  the  peo- 
ple, counted  not  to  augment  his  state  and  rev- 
enues by  the  gift  of  a  bride  so  richly  dowered. 


4  THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

but  chose  rather  to  give  her  to  a  favourite  of  his, 
a  man  in  whose  devotion  he  could  surely  trust 
and  whose  disposition  was  to  serve  his  master  in 
all  things  fair  and  foul,  open  or  secret.  Such  an 
one  the  Duke  found  in  the  Lord  Robert  de  Beau- 
regard, a  gentleman  of  Provence,  who  had  quitted 
his  own  country,  having  been  drawn  into  some 
tumult  there,  and,  having  taken  service  with  the 
Duke,  had  risen  to  a  great  place  in  his  esteem 
and  confidence.  Therefore,  when  Antonio  pre- 
ferred his  request,  the  Duke,  with  many  a  courte- 
ous regretful  phrase,  made  him  aware  that  the 
lady  stood  promised  to  Robert  by  the  irrevocable 
sanctity  of  his  princely  pledge. 

"  So  forget,  I  pray  you,  my  good  cousin  An- 
tonio," said  he,  "  forget,  as  young  men  lightly  can, 
this  desire  of  yours,  and  it  shall  be  my  charge  to 
find  you  a  bride  full  as  fair  as  the  Lady  Lucia." 

But  Antonio's  face  went  red  from  brow  to 
chin,  as  he  answered  :  "  My  gracious  lord,  I  love 
the  lady,  and  she  me,  and  neither  can  wed  an- 
other. As  for  my  Lord  Robert,  your  Highness 
knows  well  that  she  loves  him  not." 

"A  girl's  love!  "smiled  the  Duke.     "  A  girl's 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE    HILLS.      5 

love  !  It  rains  and  shines,  and  shines  and  rains, 
Antonio." 

"  It  has  shone  on  me  since  she  knew  a  man 
when  she  looked  on  him,"  said  Antonio. 

And  Tommasino,  who  stood  by,  recking  as 
little  of  the  Duke  as  of  the  Duke's  deerhound 
which  he  was  patting  the  while,  broke  in,  saying 
carelessly,  "  And  this  Robert,  my  lord,  is  not  the 
man  for  a  pretty  girl  to  love.  He  is  a  sour  fel- 
low." 

"  I  thank  you  for  your  counsel,  my  lord  Tom- 
.-m<isino,"  smiled  the  Duke.  "Yet  I  love  him." 
Whereat  Tommasino  lifted  his  brows  and  patted 
the  hound  again.  "  It  is  enough,"  added  the 
Duke.  "  I  have  promised,  Antonio.  It  is 
enough." 

"  Yes,  it  is  enough,"  said  Antonio  ;  and  he  and 
Tommasino,  having  bowed  low,  withdrew  from 
the  presence  of  the  Duke.  But  when  he  got  clear 
outside  of  the  Duke's  cabinet,  Antonio  laid  his 
hand  on  Tommasino's  shoulder,  saying,  "  It  is  not 
well  that  Robert  have  her." 

"  It  is  mighty  ill,"  said  Tommasino. 

And  then  they  walked  in  silence  to  the  city 


6  THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

gate,  and,  in  silence  still,  climbed  the  rugged  hill 
where  Antonio's  house  stood. 

But  the  Duke  sent  for  Robert  de  Beauregard 
into  his  cabinet  and  said  to  him  :  "  If  you  be  wise, 
friend  Robert,  little  grass  shall  grow  under  your 
feet  this  side  your  marriage.  This  Antonio  sa)^s 
not  much ;  but  I  have  known  him  outrun  his 
tongue  with  deeds." 

"  If  the  lady  were  as  eager  as  I,  the  matter 
would  not  halt,"  said  Robert  with  a  laugh.  "  But 
she  weeps  and  spits  fire  at  me,  and  cries  for  An- 
tonio." 

"  She  will  be  cured  after  the  wedding,"  said 
the  Duke.  "  But  see  that  she  be  well  guarded, 
Robert ;  let  a  company  of  your  men  watch  her. 
I  have  known  the  bride  to  be  missing  on  a  mar- 
riage day  ere  now." 

"  If  he  can  touch  her,  he  may  wed  her,"  cried 
Robert.  "  The  pikemen  are  close  about  her 
house,  and  she  can  neither  go  in  nor  come  forth 
without  their  knowledge." 

"  It  is  well,"  said  the  Duke.  "  Yet  delay  not. 
They  are  stubborn  men,  these  Counts  of  Monte 
Velluto." 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE    HILLS,      j 

Now  had  the  Lady  Lucia  been  of  a  spirit  as 
haughty  as  her  lover's,  it  may  be  that  she  would 
have  refused  to  wed  Robert  de  Beauregard.  But 
she  was  afraid.  When  Antonio  was  with  her,  she 
had  clung  to  him,  and  he  loved  her  the  more  for 
her  timidity.  With  him  gone  and  forbidden  to 
come  near  her,  she  dared  not  resist  the  Duke's  will 
nor  brave  his  displeasure ;  so  that  a  week  before 
the  day  which  the  Duke  had  appointed  for  the 
wedding,  she  Sfent  to  Antonio,  bidding  him  aban- 
don a  hope  that  was  vain  and  set  himself  to  for- 
^get  a  most  unhappy  lady. 

"  Robert  shall  not  have  her,"  said  Antonio, 
putting  the  letter  in  his  belt. 

"  Then  the  time  is  short,"  said  Tommasino. 

They  were  walking  together  on  the  terrace 
before  Antonio's  house,  whence  they  looked  on 
the  city  across  the  river.  Antonio  cast  his  eye 
on  the  river  and  on  the  wall  of  the  Duke's  garden 
that  ran  along  it;  fair  trees,  shrubs,  and  flowers 
lined  the  top  of  the  wall,  and  the  water  gleamed 
in  the  sunshine. 

"  It  is  strange,"  said  Antonio,  musing,  "  that 
one  maiden  can  darken  for  a  man  all  the  world 


8  THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

that  God  lights  with  his  sun.  Yet  since  so  it  is, 
Tommasino,  a  man  can  be  but  a  man ;  and  being 
a  man,  he  is  a  poor  man,  if  he  stand  by  while  an- 
other takes  his  love." 

"  And  that  other  a  stranger,  and,  as  I  swear,  a 
cut-throat,"  added  Tommasino. 

When  they  had  dined  and  evening  began  to 
come  on,  Antonio  made  his  servants  saddle  the 
best  horses  in  his  stable — though,  indeed,  the 
choice  was  small,  for  Antonio  was  not  rich  as  a 
man  of  his  rank  counts  riches — and  the  two  rode 
down  the  hill  towards  the  city.  But,  as  they 
went,  Antonio  turned  once  and  again  in  his  saddle 
and  gazed  long  at  the  old  gray  house,  the  round 
tower,  and  the  narrow  gate. 

"  Why  look  behind,  and  not  forward  ?  "  asked 
Tommasino. 

"  Because  there  is  a  foreboding  in  me,"  an- 
swered Antonio,  "  that  it  will  be  long  before  that 
gate  again  I  pass  through.  Were  there  a  hope  of 
.persuading  you,  Tommasino,  I  would  bid  you 
turn  back,  and  leave  me  to  go  alone  on  this  er- 
rand." 

"  Keep  your  breath  against  when  you  have  to 


HOW  COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS,      g 

run,"  laughed  Tommasino,  pricking  his  horse  and 
tossing  his  hair,  dark  as  Antonio's  was  fair,  back 
from  his  neck. 

Across  the  bridge  they  rode  and  through  the 
gates,  and  having  traversed  the  great  square, 
came  to  the  door  of  Lucia's  house,  where  it  rose 
fronting  the  Duke's  palace.  Here  Antonio  dis- 
mounted, giving  his  bridle  into  Tommasino's 
hand,  and  bade  the  servants  carry  his  name  to  the 
Lady  Lucia.  A  Mir  arose  among  them  and  much 
whispering,  till  an  old  man,  head  of  the  serving- 
ipeB,  came  forward,  saying:  "Pardon,  my  lord, 
but  we  are  commanded  not  to  admit  you  to  the 
Lady  Lucia ; "  and  he  waved  his  hand  towards 
the  inner  part  of  the  porch,  where  Antonio  saw 
a  dozen  or  more  pikemen  of  the  Duke's  Guard 
drawn  across  the  passage  to  the  house  ;  and  their 
pikes  flashed  in  the  rays  of  the  setting  sun  as  they 
levelled  them  in  front  of  their  rank. 

Some  of  the  townsmen  and  apprentice  lads, 
stout  fellows,  each  with  a  staflF,  had  gathered  now 
around  Antonio,  whom  they  loved  for  his  feats 
of  strength  and  his  liberal  gifts  to  the  poor,  and, 
understanding  what  was  afoot,  one  came  to  him. 


10        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

saying :  "  There  are  some,  my  lord,  who  would 
enter  with  you  if  you  are  set  on  entering,"  and 
the  fellow's  eyes  sparkled ;  for  there  was  a  great 
enmity  in  the  town  against  the  pikemen,  and  a 
lusty  youth  with  a  stick  in  his  hand  is  never  loth 
to  find  a  use  for  it. 

For  a  moment  Count  Antonio  hesitated ; 
for  they  flocked  closer  to  him,  and  Tomma- 
sino  threw  him  a  glance  of  appeal  and  touched 
the  hilt  of  his  sword.  But  he  would  not  that  the 
blood  of  men  who  were  themselves  loved  by 
mothers,  wives,  and  maids,  should  be  shed  in  his 
quarrel,  and  he  raised  his  hand,  bidding  them  be 
still. 

"  I  have  no  quarrel  with  the  pikeman,"  said 
he,  "  and  we  must  not  fight  against  His  High- 
ness's  servants." 

The  faces  of  the  townsmen  grew  long  in  dis- 
appointment. Tommasino  alone  laughed  low, 
recognising  in  Antonio's  gentleness  the  lull  that 
heralds  a  storm.  The  Count  was  never  more 
dangerous  than  when  he  praised  submission. 

"  But,"  continued  Antonio,  "  I  would  fain  see 
the    Lady    Lucia."    And   with   this   he    stepped 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK  TO   THE   HILLS,    n 

inside  the  porch,  signing  to  Tommasino  to 
stay  where  he  was ;  but  the  lad  would  not, 
and,  leaping  down,  ran  to  his  kinsman  and  stood 
shoulder  to  shoulder  with  him. 

Thus  they  stood  facing  the  line  of  pikemen, 
when  suddenly  the  opposing  rank  opened  and 
Robert  de  Beauregard  himself  came  through. 
Starting  slightly  on  sight  of  Antonio,  he  yet 
bowed  courteously,  baring  his  head,  and  An- 
tonio, with  Tommasino,  did  the  like. 

"  What  is  your  desire,  my  lord  ? "  asked 
Robert. 

"  I  have  naught  to  ask  of  you,"  answered 
Antonio,  and  he  took  a  step  forward.  Robert's 
hand  flew  to  his  sword,  and  in  a  moment  they 
would  have  fought.  But  now  another  figure 
came  forward  with  uplifted  hand.  It  was  the 
Duke  himself,  and  he  looked  on  Antonio  with 
his  dark  smile,  and  Antonio  flushed  red. 

"You  seek  me,  Antonio?"  asked  the  Duke. 
"  I  seek  not  your  Highness,  but  my  plighted 
wife,"  said  Antonio. 

Duke  Valentine  smiled  still.  Coming  to  An- 
tonio, he  passed  his  arm  through  his,  and  said  in 


12        THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

most  friendly  fashion :  "  Come  with  me  to  my 
house,  and  we  will  talk  of  this ; "  and  Anto- 
nio, caught  fast  in  the  choice  between  obedience 
and  open  revolt,  went  frowning  across  the  square, 
the  Duke's  arm  through  his,  Robert  on  the 
Duke's  other  side,  and,  behind,  Tommasino  with 
the  horses.  But  as  they  went,  a  sudden  cry  came 
from  the  house  they  left,  and  a  girl's  face  showed 
for  an  instant,  tear-stained  and  pallid,  at  an  open 
window.  A  shiver  ran  through  Antonio ;  but 
the  Duke  pressing  his  arm,  he  went  still  in  si- 
lence. 

At  the  door  of  the  palace,  a  lackey  took 
the  horses  from  Tommasino,  and  the  four  passed 
through  the  great  hall  and  through  the  Duke's 
cabinet  beyond  and  into  the  garden  ;  there  the 
Duke  sat  down  under  the  wall  of  the  garden,  near 
by  the  fish-pond,  and  turning  suddenly  on  Anto- 
nio, spoke  to  him  fiercely  ;  "  Men  have  died  at 
my  hands  for  less,"  said  he. 

'*  Then  for  each  of  such  shall  you  answer  to 
God,"  retorted  Antonio,  not  less  hotly. 

"  You  scout  my  commands  in  the  face  of  all 
the   city,"   said    the    Duke   in   low   stern    tones. 


HOW  COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS. 


13 


"  Now,  by  Heaven,  if  you  seek  to  see  the  girl 
again,  I  will  hang  you  from  the  tower  of  the 
gate.  So  be  warned — now — once  :  there  shall  be 
no  second  warning." 

He  ceased,  and  sat  with  angry  eyes  on  An- 
tonio ;  and  Robert,  who  stood  by  his  master, 
glared  as  fierce.  But  Antonio  was  silent  for 
a  while,  and  rested  his  arm  on  Tommasino's 
shoulder. 

"  My  fathers  have  served  and  fought  for  your 
fathers,"  said  he  at  last.  "  What  has  this  gentle- 
marx  done  for  the  Duchy  ?  " 

Then  Robert  spoke  suddenly  and  scornfully : 
"  This  he  is  ready  to  do,  to  punish  an  insolent 
knave  that  braves  His  Highness's  will." 

Antonio  seemed  not  to  hear  him,  for  he  did 
not  move  but  stood  with  eyes  bent  on  the  Duke's 
face,  looking  whether  his  appeal  should  reach  its 
mark.  But  Tommasino  heard  ;  yet  never  a  word 
spoke  Tommasino  either,  but  he  drew  off  the 
heavy  riding-glove  from  his  left  hand,  and  it 
hung  dangling  in  the  fingers  of  his  right,  and  he 
looked  at  the  glove  and  at  Robert  and  at  the 
glove  again. 


14 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


"  I  would  his  Highness  were  not  here,"  said 
Tommasino  to  Robert  with  a  smile. 

"  Hold  your  peace,  boy,"  said  Robert,  "  or  the 
Duke  will  have  you  whipped." 

Youth  loves  not  to  be  taunted  with  its  blessed 
state.  "  I  have  no  more  to  say,"  cried  Tomma- 
sino ;  and  without  more,  caring  naught  now  for 
the  presence  of  the  Duke,  he  flung  his  heavy 
glove  full  in  Robert's  face,  and,  starting  back  a 
pace,  drew  his  sword.  Then  Antonio  knew  that 
the  die  was  cast,  for  Tommasino  would  gain  no 
mercy,  having  insulted  the  Duke's  favourite  and 
drawn  his  sword  in  the  Duke's  palace ;  and  he 
also  drew  out  his  sword,  and  the  pair  stood  fac- 
ing the  Duke  and  Robert  de  Beauregard.  It  was 
but  for  an  instant  that  they  stood  thus ;  then 
Robert,  who  did  not  lack  courage  to  resent  a 
blow,  unsheathed  and  rushed  at  the  boy.  An- 
tonio left  his  cousin  to  defend  himself,  and,  bow- 
ing low  to  the  Duke,  set  his  sword  at  the  Duke's 
breast,  before  the  Duke  could  so  much  as  rise 
from  his  seat. 

"  I  would  not  touch  your  Highness,"  said  he, 
"  but  these  gentlemen  must  not  be  interrupted." 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.    15 

"  You  take  me  at  a  disadvantage,"  cried  the 
Duke. 

"  If  you  will  swear  not  to  summon  your  guard, 
I  will  sheath  my  sword,  my  lord  ;  or,  if  you  will 
honour  me  by  crossing  yours  on  mine,  you  shall 
draw  yours." 

The  place  where  they  sat  was  hidden  from 
the  palace  windows,  yet  the  Duke  trusted  that 
the  sound  of  the  clashing  steel  would  bring  aid ; 
therefore,  not  desiring  to  light  with  Antonio  (for 
Duke  Valentine  loved  to  scheme  rather  than  to 
strike),  he  sat  still,  answering  nothing.  And  now 
Tommasino  and  Robert  were  engaged,  Robert 
attacking  furiously  and  Tommasino  parrying  him 
as  coolly  as  though  they  fenced  for  pastime  in  the 
school.  It  was  Tommasino's  fault  to  think  of 
naught  but  the  moment  and  he  did  not  remember 
that  every  second  might  bring  the  guard  upon 
them.  And  Antonio  would  not  call  it  to  his  mind, 
but  he  said  to  the  Duke :  "  The  boy  will  kill  him, 
sir.  He  is  a  finer  swordsman  than  I,  and  marvel- 
lously active." 

Then  the  Duke,  having  been  pondering  on  his 
course,  and  knowing  Antonio — sitting  there  with 


1 6        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  Count's  sword  against  his  breast — did  by  cal- 
culation what  many  a  man  braver  in  fight  had  not 
dared  to  do.  There  was  in  truth  a  courage  in 
it,  for  all  that  it  was  born  of  shrewdness.  For, 
thus  with  the  sword  on  his  heart,  fixing  a  calm 
glance  on  Antonio,  he  cried  as  loudly  as  he  could, 
"  Help,  help,  treason  !  " 

Antonio  drew  back  his  arm  for  the  stroke ; 
and  the  Duke  sat  still ;  then,  swift  as  thought, 
Antonio  laughed,  bowed  to  Duke  Valentine  and, 
turning,  rushed  between  the  fighters,  striking  up 
their  swords.  In  amazement  they  stood  for  a 
moment :  Antonio  drove  his  sword  into  its  sheath, 
and,  while  Robert  was  yet  astounded,  he  rushed 
on  him,  caught  him  by  the  waist,  and,  putting 
forth  his  strength,  flung  him  clear  and  far  into 
the  fish-pond.  Then  seizing  Tommasino  by 
the  arm  he  started  with  him  at  a  run  for  the 
great  hall.  The  Duke  rose,  crying  loudly,  "  Trea- 
son, treason !  "  But  Antonio  cried  "  Treason, 
treason,"  yet  louder  than  the  Duke  ;  and  presently 
Tommasino,  who  had  frowned  at  his  pastime  be- 
ing interrupted,  fell  a-laughing,  and  between  the 
laughs  cried  "  Treason,  treason !  "  with  Antonio. 


now   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE    HILLS.    17 

And  at  the  entrance  of  the  hall  they  met  a  dozen 
pikemen  running ;  and  Antonio,  pointing  over  his 
shoulder,  called  in  tones  of  horror,  "  Treason, 
treason  !  "  And  Tommasino  cried,  "  The  Duke  ! 
Help  the  Duke  !  "  So  that  they  passed  untouched 
through  the  pikemen,  who  hesitated  an  instant  in 
bewilderment  but  then  swept  on  ;  for  they  heard 
the  Duke's  own  voice  crying  still  "  Treason,  trea- 
son !  "  And  through  the  hall  and  out  to  the  por- 
tico passed  the  cousins,  echoing  their  cries  of 
<.*'  Treason ! "  And  every  man  they  met  went 
•  wiiither  they  pointed  ;  and  when  they  leapt  on 
their  horses,  the  very  lackey  that  had  held  them 
dropped  the  bridles  with  hasty  speed  and  ran 
into  the  palace,  crying  "  Treason ! "  Then  An- 
tonio, Tommasino  ever  following,  and  both  yet 
crying  "  Treason  !  "  dashed  across  the  square  ; 
and  on  the  way  they  met  the  pikemen  who 
guarded  the  Lady  Lucia,  and  the  townsmen  who 
were  mocking  and  snarling  at  the  pikemen  ;  and 
to  pikemen  and  townsmen  alike  they  cried 
(though  Tommasino  hardly  could  speak  now  for 
laughter  and  lack  of  breath),  "  Treason,  treason  !  " 
And  all  to  whom  they  cried  flocked  to  the  palace, 


1 8        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

crying  in  their  turn,  "  Treason,  treason ! "  so 
that  people  ran  out  of  every  house  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood and  hurried  to  the  palace,  cr3dng 
"  Treason  !  "  and  every  one  asking  his  neighbour 
what  the  treason  was.  And  thus,  by  the  time  in 
which  a  man  might  count  a  hundred,  a  crowd 
was  pushing  and  pressing  and  striving  round  the 
gate  of  the  palace,  and  the  cousins  were  alone  on 
the  other  side  of  the  great  square. 

"  Now  thanks  be  to  God  for  that  idea ! " 
gasped  Tommasino. 

But  Antonio  gave  not  thanks  till  his  meal  was 
ended.  Raising  his  voice  as  he  halted  his  horse 
before  the  Lady  Lucia's  house,  he  called  loudly, 
no  longer  "Treason!"  but  "Lucia!"  And  she, 
knowing  his  voice,  looked  out  again  from  the 
window ;  but  some  hand  plucked  her  away  as 
soon  as  she  had  but  looked.  Then  Antonio  leapt 
from  his  horse  with  an  oath  and  ran  to  the  door, 
and  finding  it  unguarded,  he  rushed  in,  leaving 
Tommasino  seated  on  one  horse  and  holding  the 
other,  with  one  eye  on  Lucia's  house  and  the 
other  on  the  palace,  praying  that,  by  the  favour 
of  Heaven,  Antonio  might  come  out  again  before 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.    19 

the  crowd    round    the  Duke's    gates  discovered 
why  it  was,  to  a  man,  crying  "  Treason  !  " 

But  in  the  palace  of  the  Duke  there  was  great 
confusion.  For  the  pikemen,  finding  Robert  de 
Beauregard  scrambling  out  of  the  fish-pond  with 
a  drawn  sword  in  his  hand,  and  His  Highness 
crying  "  Treason  !  "  with  the  best  of  them,  must 
have  it  that  the  traitor  was  none  other  than  Rob- 
ert himself,  and  in  their  dutiful  zeal  they  came 
nigh  to  making  an  end  of  him  then  and  there,  be- 
,fore  the  Duke  could  gain  silence  enough  to  ren- 
'dtsr^his  account  of  the  affair  audible.  And  when 
the  first  pikemen  were  informed,  there  came 
others ;  and  these  others,  finding  the  first  throng- 
ing round  the  Duke  and  Robert,  cried  out  on 
them  for  the  traitors,  and  were  on  the  point  of 
engaging  them  ;  and  when  they  also  had  been 
with  difficulty  convinced,  and  the  two  parties, 
with  His  Highness  and  Robert,  turned  to  the 
pursuit  of  the  cousins,  they  found  the  whole  of 
the  great  hall  utterly  blocked  by  a  concourse  of 
the  townsmen,  delighted  beyond  measure  at  the 
chance  of  an  affray  with  the  hated  pikemen,  who, 
they  conceived,  must  beyond  doubt  be  the  wicked 


20       THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

traitors  that  had  risen  in  arms  against  the  Duke's 
life  and  throne.  Narrowly  indeed  was  a  great 
battle  in  the  hall  averted  by  the  Duke  himself, 
who  leapt  upon  a  high  seat  and  spoke  long  and 
earnestly  to  the  people,  persuading  them  that  not 
the  pikemen,  but  Antonio  and  Tommasino,  were 
the  traitors ;  which  the  townsmen  found  hard  to 
believe,  in  part  because  they  wished  not  to 
believe  ill  of  Antonio,  and  more  inasmuch  as 
every  man  there  knew — and  the  women  and  chil- 
dren also — that  Antonio  and  Tommasino,  and  none 
else  of  all  the  city  had  raised  the  alarm.  But 
some  hearkened  at  last ;  and  with  these  and  a 
solid  wedge  of  the  pikemen,  the  Duke  and  Rob- 
ert, with  much  ado,  thrust  their  way  through 
the  crowd  and  won  access  to  the  door  of  the 
palace. 

In  what  time  a  thousand  men  ma}^  be  con- 
vinced, you  may  hope  to  turn  one  woman's 
mind,  and  at  the  instant  that  the  Duke  gained 
the  square  with  his  friends  and  his  guards.  Count 
Antonio  had  prevailed  on  the  Lady  Lucia  to 
brave  His  Highness's  wrath.  It  is  true  that  he 
had  met  with  some  resistance  from  the  steward, 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK  TO   THE   HILLS.   21 

who  was  in  Robert's  pay,  and  had  tarried  to 
buffet  the  fellow  into  obedience ;  and  with  more 
from  an  old  governess,  who,  since  she  could  not 
be  buffeted,  had  perforce  to  be  locked  in  a  cup- 
board ;  yet  the  better  part  of  the  time  had  to 
be  spent  in  imploring  Lucia  herself.  At  last, 
with  many  fears  and  some  tears,  she  had  yielded, 
and  it  was  with  glad  eyes  that  Tommasino  saw 
the  Count  come  forth  from  the  door  carrying 
Lucia  on  his 'arm;  and  others  saw  him  also; 
for  a  great  shout  came  from  the  Duke's  party 
.a^oss  the  square,  and  the  pikemen  set  out  at  a 
run  with  Robert  himself  at  their  head.  Yet  so 
soon  as  they  were  started,  Antonio  also,  bearing 
Lucia  in  his  arms,  had  reached  where  Tom- 
masino was  with  the  horses,  and  an  instant  later 
he  was  mounted  and  cried,  "  To  the  gate ! "  and 
he  struck  in  his  spurs,  and  his  horse  bounded 
forward,  Tommasino  following.  No  more  than 
a  hundred  yards  lay  between  them  and  the  gate 
of  the  city,  and  before  the  pikemen  could  bar 
their  path  they  had  reached  the  gate.  The  gate- 
wardens  were  in  the  act  of  shutting  it,  having 
perceived  the  tumult ;  but  Tommasino  struck  at 


22        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

them  with  the  flat  of  his  sword,  and  they  gave 
way  before  the  rushing  horses  ;  and  before  the 
great  gate  was  shut,  Antonio  and  he  were  on 
their  way  through,  and  the  hoofs  of  their  horses 
clattered  over  the  bridge.  Thus  Antonio  was 
clear  of  the  city  with  his  lady  in  his  arms  and 
Tommasino  his  cousin  safe  by  his  side. 

Yet  they  were  not  safe  ;  for  neither  Duke 
Valentine  nor  Robert  de  Beauregard  was  a  man 
who  sat  down  under  defeat.  But  few  moments 
had  passed  before  there  issued  from  the  gate  a 
company  of  ten  mounted  and  armed  men,  and 
Robert,  riding  in  their  front,  saw,  hard  on  a 
mile  away,  the  cousins  heading  across  the  plain 
towards  the  spot  where  the  spurs  of  Mount 
Agnino  run  down ;  for  there  was  the  way  of 
safety.  But  it  was  yet  ten  miles  away.  And 
Robert  and  his  company  galloped  furiously  in 
pursuit,  while  Duke  Valentine  watched  from  the 
wall  of  the  garden  above  the  river. 

Now  Count  Antonio  was  a  big  man  and 
heavy,  so  that  his  horse  was  weighed  down  by 
the  twofold  burden  on  its  back ;  and  looking 
behind  him,  he  perceived  that  Robert's  company 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE    HILLS.   23 

drew  nearer  and  yet  nearer.  And  Tommasino, 
looking  also,  said,  "  I  doubt  they  are  too  many 
for  us,  for  you  have  the  lady  in  your  arms.  We 
shall  not  get  clear  of  the  hills." 

Then  Antonio  drew  in  his  horse  a  little  and, 
letting  the  bridle  fall,  took  the  Lady  Lucia  in 
both  his  arms  and  kissed  her,  and  having  thus 
done,  lifted  her  and  set  her  on  Tommasino's 
horse.  "Thank  God,"  said  he,  "that  you  are  no 
heavier  than  a  feather." 

"  Yet  two  feathers  may  be  too  much,"  said 
,  tx^mmasino. 

"  Ride  on,"  said  Antonio.  "  I  will  check  them 
for  a  time,  so  that  you  shall  come  safe  to  the 
outset  of  the  hill." 

Tommasino  obeyed  him  ;  and  Antonio,  riding 
more  softl}^  now,  placed  himself  between  Tom- 
masino and  the  pursuers.  Tommasino  rode  on 
with  the  swooning  lady  in  his  arms ;  but  his 
face  was  grave  and  troubled,  for,  as  he  said,  two 
feathers  may  be  overmuch,  and  Robert's  com- 
pany rode  well  and  swiftly. 

"  If  Antonio  can  stop  them,  it  is  well,"  said 
he;  "but    if  not,    I    shall   not   reach   the   hills;" 


24 


THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 


and  he  looked  with  no  great  love  on  the  un- 
happy lady,  for  it  seemed  like  enough  that  An- 
tonio would  be  slain  for  her  sake,  and  Tomma- 
sino  prized  him  above  a  thousand  damsels.  Yet 
he  rode  on,  obedient. 

But  Antonio's  scheme  had  not  passed  unde- 
tected by  Robert  de  Beauregard ;  and  Robert, 
being  a  man  of  guile  and  cunning,  swore  aloud 
an  oath  that,  though  he  died  himself,  yet  Tom- 
masino  should  not  carry  off  Lucia.  *  Therefore 
he  charged  his  men  one  and  all  to  ride  after 
Tommasino  and  bring  back  Lucia,  leaving  him 
alone  to  contend  with  Antonio ;  and  they  were 
not  loth  to  obey,  for  it  was  little  to  their  taste 
or  wish  to  surround  Antonio  and  kill  him. 
Thus,  when  the  company  came  within  fifty  yards 
of  Antonio,  the  ranks  suddenly  parted ;  five  di- 
verged to  the  right,  and  four  to  the  left,  passing 
Antonio  in  sweeping  curves,  so  far  off  that  he 
could  not  reach  them,  while  Robert  alone  rode 
straight  at  him.  Antonio,  perceiving  the  strata- 
gem, would  fain  have  ridden  again  after  Tom- 
masino ;  but  Robert  was  hard  upon  him,  and 
he  was  in  peril  of  being  thrust  through  the  back 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS,   25 

as  he  fled.  So  he  turned  and  faced  his  enemy. 
But  although  Robert  had  sworn  so  boldly  be- 
fore his  men,  his  mind  was  not  what  he  had 
declared  to  them,  and  he  desired  to  meet  Anto- 
nio alone,  not  that  he  might  fight  a  fair  fight 
with  him,  but  in  order  treacherously  to  deceive 
him — a  thing  he  was  ashamed  to  do  before  his 
comrades.  Coming  up  then  to  Antonio,  he 
reined  in  his  horse,  crying,  "  My  lord,  I  bring 
peace  from  His  Highness." 

Antonio  wondered  to  hear  him ;  yet,  when 
Hubert,  his  sword  lying  untouched  in  its  sheath, 
sprang  from  his  horse  and  approached  him,  he 
dismounted  also ;  and  Robert  said  to  him :  "  I 
have  charged  them  to  injure  neither  the  Lady 
Lucia  nor  your  cousin  by  so  much  as  a  hair; 
for  the  Duke  bids  me  say  that  he  will  not  con- 
strain the  lady." 

"  Is  she  then  given  to  me  ? "  cried  Antonio, 
his  face  lighting  up  with  a  marvellous  eager- 
ness. 

"Nay,  not   so    fast,"    answered    Robert    with 

subtle  cunning.     "  The  Duke    will   not  give  her 

to  )'ou  now.      But    he  will  exact  from  you  and 
3 


26        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

from  me  alike  an  oath  not  to  molest,  no,  not  to 
see  her,  for  three  months,  and  then  she  shall 
choose  as  she  will  between  us." 

While  he  spoke  this  fair  speech,  he  had  been 
drawing  nearer  to  Antonio ;  and  Antonio,  not 
yet  convinced  of  his  honesty,  drew  back  a  pace. 
Then  Robert  let  go  hold  of  his  horse,  unbuckled 
his  sword,  flung  it  on  the  ground,  and  came  to 
Antonio  with  outstretched  hands.  "  Behold  !  " 
said  he  ;  "  I  am  in  your  mercy,  my  lord.  If  you 
do  not  believe  me,  slay  me." 

Antonio  looked  at  him  with  searching  wist- 
ful eyes ;  he  hated  to  war  against  the  Duke, 
and  his  heart  was  aflame  with  the  hope  that 
dwelt  for  him  in  Robert's  words;  for  he  did  not 
doubt  but  that  neither  three  months,  nor  three 
years,  nor  three  hundred  years,  could  change 
his  lady's  love. 

"  You  speak  fair,  sir,"  said  he ;  "  but  what 
warrant  have  I  ?  " 

"  And,  save  your  honour,  what  warrant  have 
I,  who  stand  here  unarmed  before  you  ?  "  asked 
Robert. 

For  a  while  Antonio  pondered  ;  then  he  said. 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.   27 

"  My  lord,  I  must  crave  your  pardon  for  my 
doubt ;  but  the  matter  is  so  great  that  to  your 
word  I  dare  not  trust ;  but  if  you  will  ride  back 
with  your  men  and  pray  the  Duke  to  send  me 
a  promise  under  his  own  hand,  to  that  I  will 
trust.  And  meanwhile  Tommasino,  with  the 
Lady  Lucia,  shall  abide  in  a  safe  place,  and  I 
will  stay  here,  awaiting  your  return  ;  and,  if 
you  will,  let  two  of  your  men  stay  with  me." 

"  Many  a  man,  my  lord,"  returned  Robert, 
"  would  take  your  caution  in  bad  part.  But  let 
jtl)Q  so.  Come,  we  will  ride  after  my  company." 
And  he  rose  and  caught  Antonio's  horse  by  the 
bridle  and  brought  it  to  him  ;  "  Mount,  my  lord," 
said  he,  standing  by. 

Antonio,  believing  either  that  the  man  was 
true  or  that  his  treachery — if  treachery  there 
were  in  him — was  foiled,  and  seeing  him  to  all 
seeming  unarmed,  save  for  a  little  dagger  in  his 
belt  which  would  hardly  suffice  to  kill  a  man 
and  was  more  a  thing  of  ornament  than  use,  set 
his  foot  in  the  stirrup  and  prepared  to  mount. 
And  in  so  doing  he  turned  his  back  on  Robert 
de   Beauregard.     The    moment   for   which    that 


28        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

wicked  man  had  schemed  and  lied  was  come. 
Still  holding  Antonio's  stirrup  with  one  hand, 
he  drew,  swift  as  lightning,  from  under  his  cloak, 
a  dagger  different  far  from  the  toy  in  his  belt — 
short,  strong,  broad,  and  keen.  And  that  mo- 
ment had  been  Antonio's  last,  had  it  not  chanced 
that,  on  the  instant  Robert  drew  the  dagger, 
the  horse  started  a  pace  aside,  and  Antonio, 
taken  unawares,  stumbled  forward  and  came 
near  falling  on  the  ground.  His  salvation  lay 
in  that  stumble,  for  Robert,  having  put  all  his 
strength  into  the  blow,  and  then  striking  not 
Antonio  but  empty  air,  in  his  turn  staggered  for- 
ward, and  could  not  recover  himself  before  An- 
tonio turned  round,  a  smile  at  his  own  unwari- 
ness  on  his  lips. 

Then  he  saw  the  broad  keen  knife  in  the 
hand  of  Robert.  Robert  breathed  quickly,  and 
glared  at  him,  but  did  not  rush  on  him.  He 
stood  glaring,  the  knife  in  his  hands,  his  parted 
lips  displaying  grinning  teeth.  Not  a  word 
spoke  Antonio,  but  he  drew  his  sword,  and 
pointed  where  Robert's  sword  lay  on  the  grass. 
The  traitor,  recognising  the  grace  that  allowed 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.   29 

him  to  take  his  sword,  shamed,  it  may  be,  by 
such  return  for  his  own  treachery,  in  silence 
lifted  and  drew  it ;  and,  withdrawing  to  a  dis- 
tance from  the  horses,  which  quietly  cropped  the 
grass,  the  two  faced  one  another. 

Calm  and  easy  were  the  bearing  and  the  air 
of  Count  Antonio,  if  the  pictures  of  him  that 
live  drawn  in  the  words  of  those  who  knew  him 
be  truthful ;  calm  and  easy  ever  was  he,  save 
when  he  fought;  but  then  it  seemed  as  though 
'there  came  upon  him  a  sort  of  fury  akin  to 
riiadness,  or  (as  the  ancients  would  have  fabled) 
to  some  inspiration  from  the  God  of  War,  which 
transformed  him  utterly,  imbuing  him  with  a 
rage  and  rushing  impetuosity.  Here  lay  his 
danger  when  matched  with  such  a  swordsman 
as  was  little  Tommasino ;  but  for  all  that,  few 
cared  to  meet  him,  some  saying  that,  though 
they  called  themselves  as  brave  as  others, 
yet  they  seemed  half  appalled  when  Count 
Antonio  set  upon  them  ;  for  he  fought  as  though 
he  must  surely  win  and  as  though  God  were 
with  him.  Thus  now  he  darted  upon  Robert 
de    Beauregard,  in   seeming   recklessness   of  re- 


30 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


ceiving  thrusts  himself,  yet  ever  escaping  them 
by  his  sudden  resource  and  dexterity  and  ever 
himself  attacking,  leaving  no  space  to  take  breath, 
and  bewildering  the  other's  practised  skill  by  the 
dash  and  brilliance  of  his  assault.  And  it  may 
be  also  that  the  darkness,  which  was  now  fall- 
ing fast,  hindered  Robert  the  more,  for  Antonio 
was  famed  for  the  keenness  of  his  eyes  by  night. 
Be  these  things  as  they  may,  in  the  very  mo- 
ment when  Robert  pricked  Antonio  in  the  left 
arm  and  cried  out  in  triumph  on  his  stroke, 
Antonio  leapt  on  him  and  drove  his  sword 
through  his  heart ;  and  Robert,  with  the  sword 
yet  in  him,  fell  to  the  ground,  groaning.  And 
when  Antonio  drew  forth  the  sword,  the  man 
at  his  feet  died.  Thus,  if  it  be  God's  will,  may 
all  traitors  perish. 

Antonio  looked  round  the  plain ;  but  it  grew 
darker  still,  and  even  his  sight  did  not  avail  for 
more  than  some  threescore  yards.  Yet  he  saw  a 
dark  mass  on  his  right,  distant,  as  he  judged,  that 
space  or  more.  Rapidly  it  moved  :  surely  it  was 
a  group  of  men  galloping,  and  Antonio  stood 
motionless  regarding  them.     But  they  swept  on, 


HOW  COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.   31 

not  turning  whither  he  stood  ;  and  he,  unable  to 
tell  what  they  did,  whether  they  sought  him  or 
whither  they  went,  watched  them  till  they  faded 
away  in  the  darkness ;  and  then,  leaving  Robert 
where  he  lay,  he  mounted  his  horse  and  made 
speed  towards  the  hills,  praying  that  there  he 
should  find  his  cousin  and  the  Lady  Lucia,  es- 
caped from  the  pursuit  of  the  Duke's  men.  Yet 
had  he  known  what  those  dimly  discerned  riders 
bore  with  them,  he  would  have  been  greatly 
"ippved  at  all  costs  and  at  every  hazard  to  follow 
'after  them  and  seek  to  overtake  them  before  they 
came  to  the  city. 

On  he  rode  towards  the  hills,  quickly,  yet 
not  so  hastily  but  that  he  scanned  the  ground 
as  he  went  so  well  as  the  night  allowed  him. 
The  moon  was  risen  now  and  to  see  was  easier. 
When  he  had  covered  a  distance  of  some  two 
miles,  he  perceived  something  lying  across  his 
path.  Bending  to  look,  he  found  it  to  be  the 
corpse  of  a  horse :  he  leapt  down  and  bent  over 
it.  It  was  the  horse  Tommasino  had  ridden ;  it 
was  hamstrung,  and  its  throat  had  been  cut. 
Antonio,  seeing  it,  in  sudden  apprehension  of  ca- 


32 


THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 


lamity,  cried  aloud ;  and  to  his  wonder  his  cry 
was  answered  by  a  voice  which  came  from  a 
clump  of  bushes  fifty  yards  on  the  right.  He 
ran  hastily  to  the  spot,  thinking  nothing  of  his 
own  safety  nor  of  anything  else  than  what  had 
befallen  his  friends  ;  and  under  the  shelter  of  the 
bushes  two  men  of  the  Duke's  Guard,  their 
horses  tethered  near  them,  squatted  on  the 
ground,  and,  between,  Tommasino  lay  full 
length  on  the  ground.  His  face  was  white,  his 
eyes  closed,  and  a  bloody  bandage  was  about 
his  head.  One  of  the  two  by  him  had  forced 
his  lips  open  and  was  giving  him  to  drink  from 
a  bottle.  The  other  sprang  up  on  sight  of  An- 
tonio and  laid  a  hand  to  his  sword-hilt. 

"  Peace,  peace !  "  said  Antonio.  "  Is  the  lad 
dead  ?  " 

"  He  is  not  dead,  my  lord,  but  he  is  sore 
hurt." 

"  And  what  do  you  here  with  him  ?  And  how 
did  you  take  him  ?  " 

"  We  came  up  with  him  here,  and  surrounded 
him ;  and  while  some  of  us  held  him  in  front,  one 
cut  the  hamstrings  of  his  horse  from  behind  ;  and 


HOW   COUNT   ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.   33 

the  horse  fell,  and  with  the  horse  the  lady  and 
the  young  lord.  He  was  up  in  an  instant ;  but  as 
he  rose,  the  lieutenant  struck  him  on  the  head 
and  dealt  him  the  wound  you  see.  Then  he 
could  fight  no  more ;  and  the  lieutenant  took  the 
lady,  and  with  the  rest  rode  back  towards  the 
city,  leaving  us  charged  with  the  duty  of  bring- 
ing the  young  lord  in  so  soon  as  he  was  in  a 
state  to  come  with  us." 

"  They  took  the  lady  ?  " 

"  Even  so,  my  lord." 

"  And  why  did  they  not  seek  for  me? " 

The  fellow — Martolo  was  his  name — smiled 
grimly ;  and  his  comrade,  looking  up,  answered : 
"  Maybe  they  did  not  wish  to  find  you,  my  lord. 
They  had  been  eight  to  one,  and  could  not  have 
failed  to  take  you  in  the  end." 

"Aye,  in  the  end,"  said  Martolo,  laughing 
now.  "  Nor,"  added  he,  "  had  the  lieutenant 
such  great  love  for  Robert  de  Beauregard  that 
he  would  rejoice  to  deliver  you  to  death  for  his 
sake,  seeing  that  you  are  a  Monte  Velluto  and  he 
a  rascally " 

"  Peace !     He  is  dead,"  said  Count  Antonio. 


34        THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  You  have  killed  him  ? "  they  cried  with  one 
voice. 

"  He  attacked  me  in  treachery,  and  I  have 
killed  him,"  answered  Antonio. 

For  a  while  there  was  silence.  Then  Antonio 
asked,  "  The  lady— did  she  go  willingly  ?  " 

"  She  was  frightened  and  dazed  by  her  fall, 
my  lord  ;  she  knew  not  what  she  did  nor  what 
they  did  to  her.  And  the  lieutenant  took  her  in 
front  of  him,  and,  holding  her  with  all  gentleness, 
so  rode  towards  the  city." 

"  God  keep  her,"  said  Antonio. 

"  Amen,  poor  lady  !  "  said  Martolo,  doffing  his 
cap. 

Then  Antonio  whistled  to  his  horse,  which 
came  to  his  side ;  with  a  gesture  he  bade  the 
men  stand  aside,  and  they  obeyed  him  ;  and  he 
gathered  Tommasino  in  his  arms.  "  Hold  my 
stirrup,  that  I 'may  mount,"  said  he;  and  still 
they  obeyed.  But  when  they  saw  him  mounted, 
with  Tommasino  seated  in  front  of  him,  Martolo 
cried,  "  But,  my  lord,  we  are  charged  to  take 
him  back  and  deliver  him  to  the  Duke." 

*'  And  if  you  do  ?  "  asked  Antonio. 


HOW   COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO   THE   HILLS.    35 

Martolo  made  a  movement  as  of  one  tying  a 
noose. 

"  And  if  you  do  not?  "  asked  Antonio. 

"  Then  we  had  best  not  show  ourselves  alive 
to  the  Duke." 

Antonio  looked  down  on  them.  "  To  whom 
bear  you  allegiance?"  said  he. 

"  To  His  Highness  the  Duke,"  they  answered, 
uncovering  as  they  spoke. 

"  And  to  whom  besides  ?  "  asked  Antonio. 
^,^^ "  To    none    besides,"    they    answered,    won- 
'derihg. 

•'  Aye,  but  you  do,"  said  he.  "  To  One  who 
wills  not  that  you  should  deliver  to  death  a  lad 
who  has  done  but  what  his  honour  bade  him." 

"  God's  counsel  God  knows,"  said  Martolo. 
"  We  are  dead  men  if  we  return  alone  to  the 
city.  You  had  best  slay  us  yourself,  my  lord,  if 
we  may  not  carry  the  young  lord  with  us." 

"  You  are  honest  lads,  are  you  not?  "  he  asked. 
"  By  your  faces,  you  are  men  of  the  city." 

"  So  are  we,  my  lord  ;  but  we  serve  the  Duke 
in  his  Guard  for  reward." 

"  I  love  the  men  of  the  city  as  they  love  me," 


36       THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

said  Antonio.     "  And  a  few  pence  a  day  should 
not  buy  a  man's  soul  as  well  as  his  body." 

The  two  men  looked  at  one  another  in  per- 
plexity. The  fear  and  deference  in  which  they 
held  Antonio  forbade  them  to  fall  on  him  ;  yet 
they  dared  not  let  him  take  Tommasino.  Then, 
as  they  stood  doubting,  he  spoke  low  and  softly 
to  them :  "  When  he  that  should  give  law  and 
uphold  right  deals  wrong,  and  makes  white  black 
and  black  white,  it  is  for  gentlemen  and  honest 
men  to  be  a  law  unto  themselves.  Mount  your 
horses,  then,  and  follow  me.  And  so  long  as  I 
am  safe,  you  shall  be  safe ;  and  so  long  as  I  live, 
you  shall  live;  and  while  I  eat  and  drink,  you 
shall  have  to  drink  and  eat ;  and  you  shall  be  my 
servants.  And  when  the  time  of  God's  will- 
whereof  God  forbid  that  I  should  doubt— is 
come,  I  will  go  back  to  her  I  love,  and  you  shall 
go  back  to  them  that  love  you;  and  men  shall 
say  that  you  have  proved  yourselves  true  men 
and  good." 

Thus  it  was  that  two  men  of  the  Duke's 
Guard— Martolo  and  he  whom  they  called  Bena 
(for  of  his  true  name  there  is  no  record)— went 


HOW  COUNT  ANTONIO   TOOK   TO  THE   HILLS.   37 

together  with  Count  Antonio  and  his  cousin 
Tommasino  to  a  secret  fastness  in  the  hills;  and 
there  in  the  course  of  many  days  Tommasino 
was  healed  of  the  wound  which  the  Lieutenant 
of  the  Guard  had  given  him,  and  rode  his  horse 
again,  and  held  next  place  to  Antonio  himself  in 
the  band  that  gathered  round  them.  For  there 
came  to  them  every  man  that  was  wrongfully 
oppressed ;  and  some  came  for  love  of  adven- 
ture and  because  they  hoped  to  strike  good 
))lows ;  and  some  came  whom  Antonio  would  not 
receive,  inasmuch  as  they  were  greater  rogues 
than  were  those  whose  wrath  they  fled  from. 

Such  is  the  tale  of  how  Count  Antonio  was 
outlawed  from  the  Duke's  peace  and  took  to  the 
hills.  Faithfully  have  I  set  it  down,  and  whoso 
will  may  blame  the  Count,  and  whoso  will  may 
praise  him.  For  myself,  I  thank  Heaven  that  I 
am  well  rid  of  this  same  troublesome  passion  of 
love  that  likens  one  man  to  a  lion  and  another 
to  a  fox. 

But  the  Lady  Lucia,  being  brought  back  to 
the  city  by  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard,  was 
lodged  in  her  own  house,  and  the  charge  of  her 


38        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

was  commended  by  the  Duke  into  the  hands  of 
a  discreet  lady ;  and  for  a  while  His  Highness, 
for  very  shame,  forbore  to  trouble  her  with 
suitors.  For  he  said,  in  his  bitter  humour,  as 
he  looked  down  on  the  dead  body  of  Robert  de 
Beauregard :  "  I  have  lost  two  good  servants 
and  four  strong  arms  through  her ;  and  may- 
hap, if  I  find  her  another  suitor,  she  will  rob  me 
of  yet  another  stalwart  gentleman." 

So  she  abode,  in  peace  indeed,  but  in  sore 
desolation  and  sorrow,  longing  for  the  day  when 
Count  Antonio  should  come  back  to  seek  her. 
And  again  was  she  closely  guarded  by  the 
Duke. 


CHAPTER   II. 

COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   TRAITOR   PRINCE. 

Of  all  the  deeds  that  Count  Antonio  of 
Monte  Vellutoxdid  during-  the  time  that  he  was 
an  outlaw  in  the  hills  (for  a  price  had  been  set 
ott  his  head  by  Duke  Valentine),  there  was  none 
that  made  greater  stir  or  struck  more  home  to 
the  hearts  of  men,  howsoever  they  chose  to  look 
upon  it,  than  that  which  he  performed  on  the 
high  hill  that  faces  the  wicket  gate  on  the  west 
side  of  the  city  and  is  called  now  the  Hill  of 
Duke  Paul.  Indeed  it  was  the  act  of  a  man 
whose  own  conscience  was  his  sole  guide,  and 
who  made  the  law  which  his  own  hand  was  to 
carry  out.  That  it  had  been  a  crime  in  most 
men,  who  can  doubt?  That  it  was  a  crime  in 
him,  all  governments  must  hold  ;  and  the  same, 
I  take  it,  must  be  the  teaching  of  the  Church. 

39 


40        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Yet  not  all  men  held  it  a  crime,  although  they 
had  not  ventured  it  themselves,  both  from  the 
greatness  of  the  person  whom  the  deed  con- 
cerned, and  also  for  the  burden  that  it  put  on 
the  conscience  of  him  that  did  it.  Here,  then, 
is  the  story  of  it,  as  it  is  still  told  both  in  the 
houses  of  the  noble  and  in  peasants'  cottages. 

While  Count  Antonio  still  dwelt  at  the 
Court,  and  had  not  yet  fled  from  the  wrath 
aroused  in  the  Duke  by  the  Count's  attempt 
to  carry  off  the  Lady  Lucia,  the  Duke's  ward, 
the  nuptials  of  His  Highness  had  been  cele- 
brated with  great  magnificence  and  universal 
rejoicing;  and  the  feasting  and  exultation  had 
been  most  happily  renewed  on  the  birth  of  an 
infant  Prince,  a  year  later.  Yet  heavy  was  the 
price  paid  for  this  gift  of  Heaven,  for  Her 
Highness  the  Duchess,  a  lady  of  rare  grace  and 
kindliness,  survived  the  birth  of  her  son  only 
three  months,  and  then  died,  amidst  the  passion- 
ate mourning  of  the  people,  leaving  the  Duke  a 
prey  to  bitter  sorrow.  Many  say  that  she  had 
turned  his  heart  to  good  had  she  but  lived,  and 
that  it   was    the    loss    of    her    that   soured    him 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.  41 

and  twisted  his  nature.  If  it  be  so,  I  pray  that 
he  has  received  pardon  for  all  his  sins ;  for  his 
grief  was  great,  and  hardly  to  be  assuaged  even 
by  the  love  he  had  for  the  little  Prince,  from 
whom  he  would  never  be  parted  for  an  hour, 
if  he  could  contrive  to  have  the  boy  with  him, 
and  in  whom  he  saw,  with  pride,  the  heir  of  his 
throne. 

Both  in  the  joy  of  the  wedding  and  the  grief 
at  the  Duchesses  death,  none  had  made  more 
ostentatious  sign  of  sharing  than  His  Highness's 
brother,  Duke  Paul.  Yet  hollow  alike  were  his 
joy  and  his  grief,  save  that  he  found  true  cause 
for  sorrow  in  that  the  Duchess  left  to  her 
husband  a  dear  memorial  of  their  brief  union. 
Paul  rivalled  the  Duke  in  his  caresses  and  his 
affected  love  for  the  boy,  but  he  had  lived  long 
in  the  hope  that  His  Highness  would  not  marry, 
and  that  he  himself  should  succeed  him  in  his 
place,  and  this  hope  he  could  not  put  out  of  his 
heart.  Nay,  as  time  passed  and  the  baby  grew 
to  a  healthy  boy,  Paul's  thoughts  took  a  still 
deeper  hue  of  guilt.  It  was  no  longer  enough 
for  him  to  hope  for  his  nephew's  death,  or  even 


42 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


to  meditate  how  he  should  bring  it  about. 
One  wicked  imagining  led  on,  as  it  is  wont  in 
our  sinful  nature,  to  another,  and  Satan  whis- 
pered in  Paul's  ear  that  the  Duke  himself  was 
short  of  forty  by  a  year,  that  to  wait  for  power 
till  youth  were  gone  was  not  a  bold  man's  part, 
and  that  to  contrive  the  child's  death,  leaving 
his  father  alive,  was  but  to  double  the  risk  with- 
out halving  the  guilt.  Thus  was  Paul  induced 
to  dwell  on  the  death  of  both  father  and  son, 
and  to  say  to  himself  that  if  the  father  went  first 
the  son  would  easily  follow,  and  that  with  one 
cunning  and  courageous  stroke  the  path  to  the 
throne  might  be  cleared. 

While  Paul  pondered  on  these  designs,  there 
came  about  the  events  which  drove  Count  An- 
tonio from  the  Court;  and  no  sooner  was  he 
gone  and  declared  in  open  disobedience  and 
contumacy  against  the  Duke,  than  Paul,  seeking 
a  handle  for  his  plans,  seemed  to  find  one  in 
Antonio.  Here  was  a  man  driven  from  his 
house  (which  the  Duke  had  burnt),  despoiled  of 
his  revenues,  bereft  of  his  love,  proclaimed  a 
free  mark  for  whosoever  would  serve  the  Duke 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   TRAITOR  PRINCE. 


43 


by  slaying  him.  Where  could  be  a  better  man 
for  the  purposes  of  a  malcontent  prince?  And 
the  more  was  Paul  inclined  to  use  Antonio  from 
the  fact  that  he  had  shown  favour  to  Antonio, 
and  been  wont  to  seek  his  society ;  so  that 
Antonio,  failing  to  pierce  the  dark  depths  of 
his  heart,  was  loyally  devoted  to  him,  and  had 
returned  an  answer  full  of  gratitude  and  friend- 
ship to  the  secret  messages  in  which  Paul  had 
sent  him  condolence  on  the  mishap  that  had 
befallen  him. 

'  Now  in  the  beginning  of  the  second  year  of 
Count  Antonio's  outlawry,  His  Highness  was 
most  mightily  incensed  against  him,  not  merely 
because  he  had  so  won  the  affection  of  the 
country-folk  that  none  would  betray  his  hiding- 
place  either  for  threats  or  for  reward,  but  most 
chiefly  by  reason  of  a  certain  act  which  was  in 
truth  more  of  Tommasino's  doing  than  of  An- 
tonio's. For  Tommasino,  meeting  one  of  the 
Duke's  farmers  of  taxes,  had  lightened  him  of 
his  fat  bag  of  money,  saying  that  he  would 
himself  assume  the  honour  of  delivering  what 
was  fairly  due  to  His  Highness,  and  had  upon 


44 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


that  scattered  three-fourths  of  the  spoil  among 
the  poor,  and  sent  the  beggarly  remnant  privily 
by  night  to  the  gate  of  the  city,  with  a  writing, 
"  There  is  honour  among  thieves ;  who,  then, 
may  call  Princes  thieves?"  And  this  writing 
had  been  read  by  many,  and  the  report  of  it, 
spreading  through  the  city,  had  made  men  laugh. 
Therefore  the  Duke  had  sworn  that  by  no  means 
should  Antonio  gain  pardon  save  by  delivering 
that  insolent  young  robber  to  the  hands  of 
justice.  Thus  he  was  highly  pleased  when  his 
brother  sought  him  in  the  garden  (for  he  sat 
in  his  wonted  place  under  the  wall  by  the 
fish-pond)  and  bade  him  listen  to  a  plan 
whereby  the  outlaws  should  be  brought  to 
punishment.  The  Duke  took  his  little  son  upon 
his  knees  and  prayed  his  brother  to  tell  his 
device. 

"  You  could  not  bring  me  a  sweeter  gift  than 
the  head  of  Tommasino,"  said  he,  stroking  the 
child's  curls  ;  and  the  child  shrank  closer  into  his 
arms,  for  the  child  did  not  love  Paul  but  feared 
him. 

"  Antonio  knows  that  I  love  Your  Highness," 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR  PRINCE.  45 

said  Paul,  seating  himself  on  the  seat  by  the 
Duke,  "  but  he  knows  also  that  I  am  his  friend, 
and  a  friend  to  the  Lady  Lucia,  and  a  man  of 
tender  heart.  Would  it  seem  to  him  deep  treach- 
ery if  I  should  go  privately  to  him  and  tell  him 
how  that  on  a  certain  day  you  would  go  forth 
with  your  guard  to  camp  in  the  spurs  of  Mount 
Agnino,  leaving  the  city  desolate,  and  that  on  the 
night  of  that  day  I  could  contrive  that  Lucia 
should  come  secretly  to  the  gate,  and  that  it 
should  be  opened  for  her,  so  that  by  a  sudden 
descent  she  might  be  seized  and  carried  safe  to 
his  hiding-place  before  aid  could  come  from  Your 
Highness?" 

"  But  what  should  the  truth  be  ?  "  asked  Val- 
entine. 

"  The  truth  should  be  that  while  part  of  the 
Guard  went  to  the  spurs  of  the  Mount,  the  rest 
should  lie  in  ambush  close  inside  the  city  gates 
and  dash  out  on  Antonio  and  his  company." 

"  It  is  well,  if  he  will  believe." 

Then  Paul  laid  his  finger  on  his  brother's  arm. 
"  As  the  clock  in  the  tower  of  the  cathedral  strikes 
three  on  the  morning  of  the  15th  of  the  month,  do 


46        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

you,  dear  brother,  be  in  your  summer-house  at 
the  corner  of  the  garden  yonder ;  and  I  will  come 
thither  and  tell  you  if  he  has  believed  and  if  he 
has  come.  For  by  then  I  shall  have  learnt  from 
him  his  mind:  and  we  two  will  straightway  go 
rouse  the  guards  and  lead  the  men  to  their  ap- 
pointed station,  and  when  he  approaches  the  gate 
we  can  lay  hands  on  him." 

"  How  can  you  come  to  him  ?  For  we  do  not 
know  where  he  is  hid." 

"  Alas,  there  is  not  a  rogue  of  a  peasant  that 
cannot  take  a  letter  to  him  !  " 

"  Yet  when  I  question  them,  aye,  though  I 
beat  them,  they  know  nothing !  "  cried  Valentine 
in  chagrin.  "  Truly,  the  sooner  we  lay  him  by 
the  heels,  the  better  for  our  security." 

"  Shall  it  be,  then,  as  I  say,  my  lord?" 

"  So  let  it  be,"  said  the  Duke.  "  I  will  await 
3'-ou  in  the  summer-house." 

Paul,  perceiving  that  his  brother  had  no  sus- 
picions of  him,  and  would  await  him  in  the  sum- 
mer-house, held  his  task  to  be  already  half  done. 
For  his  plan  was  that  he  and  Antonio  should 
come  together  to  the  summer-house,  but  that  An- 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.   47 

tonio  should  lie  hid  till  Paul  had  spoken  to  the 
Duke  ;  then  Paul  should  go  out  on  pretext  of  bid- 
ding the  guard  make  ready  the  ambush,  and  leave 
the  Duke  alone  with  Antonio.  Antonio  then,  sud- 
denly springing  forth,  should  slay  the  Duke ;  while 
Paul — and  when  he  thought  on  this,  he  smiled  to 
himself — would  so  contrive  that  a  body  of  men 
should  bar  Antonio's  escape,  and  straightway  kill 
him.  Thus  should  he  be  quit  both  of  his  brother 
and  of  Antonio,  and  no  man  would  live  who  knew 
»how  the  deed  was  contrived.  "  And  then,"  said 
'hgj  ^^  I  doubt  whether  the  poor  child,  bereft  of  all 
parental  care,  will  long  escape  the  manifold  perils 
of  infancy." 

Thus  he  schemed  ;  and  when  he  had  made  all 
sure,  and  noised  about  the  Duke's  intentions 
touching  his  going  to  the  spurs  of  Mount  Agni- 
no,  he  himself  set  forth  alone  on  his  horse  to  seek 
Antonio.  He  rode  till  he  reached  the  entrance  of 
the  pass  leading  to  the  recesses  of  the  hills.  There 
he  dismounted,  and  sat  down  on  the  ground  ;  and 
this  was  at  noon  on  the  13th  day  of  the  month. 
He  had  not  long  been  sitting,  when  a  face 
peered    from    behind    a    wall    of    moss-covered 


48        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

rock  that  fronted  him,  and  Paul  cried,  "  Is  it  a 
friend  ? " 

"  A  friend  of  whom  mean  you,  my  lord  ? " 
came  from  the  rock. 

"  Of  whom  else  than  of  Count  Antonio  ? " 
cried  Paul. 

A  silence  followed  and  a  delay ;  then  two 
men  stole  cautiously  from  behind  the  rock,  and 
in  one  of  them  Paul  knew  the  man  they  called 
Bena,  who  had  been  of  the  Duke's  Guard.  The 
men,  knowing  Paul,  bowed  low  to  him,  and 
asked  him  his  pleasure,  and  he  commanded  them 
to  bring  him  to  Antonio.  They  wondered, 
knowing  not  whether  he  came  from  the  Duke 
or  despite  the  Duke ;  but  he  was  urgent  in  his 
commands,  and  at  length  they  tied  a  scarf  over 
his  eyes,  and  set  him  on  his  horse,  and  led  the 
horse.  Thus  they  went  for  an  hour.  Then  they 
prayed  him  to  dismount,  saying  that  the  horse 
could  go  no  farther ;  and  though  Paul's  eyes 
saw  nothing,  he  heard  the  whinnying  and  smelt 
the  smell  of  horses. 

"  Here  are  your  stables  then,"  said  he,  and 
dismounted  with  a  laugh. 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE. 


49 


Then  Bena  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  the 
other  guided  his  feet,  and  climbing  up  steep 
paths,  over  boulders  and  through  little  water- 
courses, they  went,  till  at  length  Bena  cried, 
"  We  are  at  home,  my  lord  ;  "  and  Paul,  tearing 
off  his  bandage,  found  himself  on  a  small  level 
spot,  ringed  round  with  stunted  wind-beaten  firs ; 
and  three  huts  stood  in  the  middle  of  the  space, 
and  before  one  of  the  huts  sat  Tommasino,  com- 
posing a  sonnet  to  a  pretty  peasant  girl  whom 
-he  had  chanced  to  meet  that  day  ;  for  Tomma- 
'S'l-fto  had  ever  a  hospitable  heart.  But  seeing 
Paul,  Tommasino  left  his  sonnet,  and  with  a  cry 
of  wonder  sprang  to  meet  him  ;  and  Paul  took 
him  by  both  hands  and  saluted  him.  That  night 
and  the  morning  that  followed,  Paul  abode  with 
Antonio,  eating  the  good  cheer  and  drinking  the 
good  wine  that  Tommasino,  who  had  charged 
himself  with  the  care  of  such  matters,  put  before 
him.  Whence  they  came  from,  Paul  asked  not; 
nor  did  Tommasino  say  more  than  that  they  were 
offerings  to  Count  Antonio — but  whether  offer- 
ings of  free-will  or  necessity,  he  said  not.  And 
during  this  time  Paul  spoke  much  with  Antonio 


50        THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

privily  and  apart,  persuading  him  of  his  friend- 
ship, and  telling  most  pitiful  things  of  the  harsh- 
ness shown  by  Valentine  his  brother  to  the  Lady 
Lucia,  and  how  the  lady  grew  pale,  and  peaked 
and  pined,  so  that  the  physicians  knit  their 
brows  over  her  and  the  women  said  no  drugs 
would  patch  a  broken  heart.  Thus  he  inflamed 
Antonio's  mind  with  a  great  rage  against  the 
Duke,  so  that  he  fell  to  counting  the  men  he 
had  and  wondering  whether  there  were  force 
to  go  openly  against  the  city.  But  in  sorrow 
Paul  answered  that  the  pikemen  were  too 
many. 

"  But  there  is  a  way,  and  a  better,"  said  Paul, 
leaning  his  head  near  to  Antonio's  ear,  "  A  way 
whereby  you  may  come  to  your  own  again,  and 
rebuild  your  house  that  the  Duke  has  burnt,  and 
enjoy  the  love  of  Lucia,  and  hold  foremost  place 
in  the  Duchy." 

"  What  way  is  that  ?  "  asked  Antonio  in  won- 
dering eagerness.  "  Indeed  I  am  willing  to  serve 
His  Highness  in  any  honourable  service,  if  by 
that  I  may  win  his  pardon  and  come  to  that  I 
long  for." 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   TRAITOR  PRINCE.    51 

"His     pardon!       When     did     he     pardon?" 
sneered  Paul. 

To  know  honest  men  and  leave  them  to  their 
honesty  is  the  last  great  gift  of  villainy.  But 
Paul  had  it  not ;  and  now  he  unfolded  to  Anto- 
nio the  plan  that  he  had  made,  saving  (as  needs 
not  to  be  said)  that  part  of  it  whereby  Antonio 
himself  was  to  meet  his  death.  For  a  pretext 
he  alleged  that  the  Duke  oppressed  the  city,  and 
that  he,  Paul,  was  put  out  of  favour  because 
,he  had  sought  to  protect  the  people,  and  was 
,•  fasilen  into  great  suspicion.  Yet,  judging  Anto- 
nio's heart  by  his  own,  he  dwelt  again  and  longer 
on  the  charms  of  Lucia,  and  on  the  great  things 
he  would  give  Antonio  when  he  ruled  the  Duchy 
for  his  nephew  ;  for  of  the  last  crime  he  medi- 
tated, the  death  of  the  child,  he  said  naught 
then,  professing  to  love  the  child.  When  the  tale 
began,  a  sudden  start  ran  through  Antonio,  and 
his  face  flushed ;  but  he  sat  still  and  listened 
with  unmoved  face,  his  eyes  gravely  regarding 
Paul  the  while.  No  anger  did  he  show,  nor 
wonder,  nor  scorn,  nor  now  any  eagerness ;  but 
he  gazed  at  the  Prince  with  calm  musing  glance, 


52 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


as  though  he  considered  of  some  great  question 
put  before  him.  And  when  Paul  ended  his  tale, 
Antonio  sat  yet  silent  and  musing.  But  Paul 
was  trembling  now,  and  he  stretched  out  his 
hand  and  laid  it  on  Antonio's  knee,  and  asked, 
with  a  feigned  laugh  that  choked  in  the  utter- 
ance, "  Well,  friend  Antonio,  is  it  a  clever  plan, 
and  will  you  ride  with  me  ? " 

Minute  followed  minute  before  Antonio  an- 
swered. At  length  the  frown  vanished  from  his 
brow,  and  his  face  grew  calm  and  set,  and  he  an- 
swered Duke  Paul,  saying,  "  It  is  such  a  plan  as 
you,  my  lord,  alone  of  all  men  in  the  Duchy 
could  make ;  and  I  will  ride  with  you." 

Then  Paul,  in  triumph,  caught  him  by  the 
hands  and  pressed  his  hands,  calling  him  a  man 
of  fine  spirit  and  a  true  friend,  who  should  not 
lack  reward.  And  all  this  Antonio  suffered 
silently ;  and  in  silence  still  he  listened  while 
Paul  told  him  how  that  a  path  led  privately  from 
the  bank  of  the  river,  through  a  secret  gate  in 
the  wall,  to  the  summer-house  where  the  Duke 
was  to  be  ;  of  this  gate  he  alone,  saving  the  Duke 
had   the  key ;  they  had   but   to   swim   the  river 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.    53 

and  enter  by  this  gate.  Having  hidden  Antonio, 
Paul  would  talk  with  the  Duke ;  then  he  would 
go  and  carry  off  what  remained  of  the  guard  over 
and  above  those  that  were  gone  to  the  hills ;  and 
Antonio,  having  done  his  deed,  could  return  by 
the  same  secret  path,  cross  the  river  again,  and 
rejoin  his  friends.  And  in  a  short  space  of  time 
Paul  would  recall  him  with  honour  to  the  city 
and  give  him  Lucia  to  wife. 

"  And  if  there  be  a  question  as  to  the  hand 
^that  dealt  the  blow,  there  is  a  rascal  whom  the 
'Diike  flogged  but  a  few  days  since,  a  steward  in 
the  palace.  He  deserves  hanging,  Antonio,  for  a 
thousand  things  of  which  he  is  guilty,  and  it  will 
trouble  me  little  to  hang  him  for  one  whereof  he 
chances  to  be  innocent."  And  Duke  Paul  laughed 
heartily. 

"  I  will  ride  with  you,"  said  Antonio  again. 
Then,  it  being  full  mid-day,  they  sat  down  to 
dinner,  Paul  bandying  many  merry  sayings  with 
Tommasino,  Antonio  being  calm  but  not  uncheer- 
ful.  And  when  the  meal  was  done,  Paul  drank 
to  the  good  fortune  of  their  expedition ;  and  An- 
tonio having  drained  his  glass,  said,  "  May  God 


54        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

approve  the  issue,"  and  straightway  bade  Tom- 
masino  and  Martolo  prepare  to  ride  with  him. 
Then,  Paul  being  again  blindfolded,  they  climbed 
down  the  mountain  paths  till  they  came  where 
the  horses  were,  and  thus,  as  the  sun  began  to  de- 
cline, set  forward,  at  a  fair  pace,  Duke  Paul  and 
'  Antonio  leading  by  some  few  yards  ;  while  Tom- 
masino  and  Martolo,  having  drunk  well,  and  snif- 
fing sport  in  front  of  them,  sang,  jested,  and 
played  pranks  on  one  another  as  they  passed 
along.  But  when  night  fell  they  became  silent; 
even  Tommasino  turned  grave  and  checked  his 
horse,  and  the  space  between  them  and  the  pair 
who  led  grew  greater,  so  that  it  seemed  to  Duke 
Paul  that  he  and  Antonio  rode  alone  through  the 
night,  under  the  shadows  of  the  great  hills.  Once 
and  again  he  spoke  to  Antonio,  first  of  the 
scheme,  then  on  some  light  matter ;  but  Antonio 
did  no  more  than  move  his  head  in  assent.  And 
Antonio's  face  was  very  white,  and  his  lips  were 
close  shut. 

It  was  midnight  when  Duke  Paul  and  An- 
tonio reached  the  plain  :  the  moon,  till  now  hidden 
by  the  mountains,  shone  on  them,  and,  seeing  An- 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.    55 

tonio's  face  more  plainly,  Paul  cried,  half  in  jest, 
half  in  uneasiness,  '  Come,  man,  look  not  so  glum 
about  it !     'Tis  but  the  life  of  a  rogue." 

"  Indeed  it  is  no  more,"  said  Antonio,  and  he 
turned  his  eyes  on  Duke  Paul. 

Paul  laughed,  but  with  poor  merriment. 
Whence  it  came  he  knew  not,  but  a  strange  sud- 
den sense  of  peril  and  of  doom  had  fallen  on  him. 
The  massive  quiet  figure  of  Antonio,  riding  ever 
close  to  him,  silent,  stern,  and  watchful,  oppressed 
hjs  spirit. 

,  -c Suddenly  Antonio  halted  and  called  to  ISIar- 
tolo  to  bring  him  a  lantern  :  one  hung  from  Mar- 
tolo's  saddle,  and  he  brought  it,  and  went  back. 
Then  Antonio  lit  the  lantern  and  gave  an  ivor}^ 
tablet  to  Paul  and  said  to  him,  "  Write  me  your 
promise." 

"  You  distrust  me,  then  ? "  cried  Paul  in  a 
great  show  of  indignation. 

"  I  will  not  go  till  you  have  written  the 
promise." 

Now  Paul  was  somewhat  loth  to  write  the 
promise,  fearing  that  it  should  be  found  on  An- 
tonio's body  before  he  could  contrive  to  remove 


56       THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

it ;  but  without  it  Antonio  declared  he  would 
not  go.  So  Paul  wrote,  bethinking  himself  that 
he  held  safe  in  his  house  at  home  permission 
from  the  Duke  to  seek  Antonio  arid  beguile  him 
to  the  city,  and  that  with  the  witness  of  this 
commission  he  could  come  off  safe,  even  though 
the  tablet  were  found  on  Antonio.  Taking  the 
peril  then,  rather  than  fail,  he  wrote,  setting  out 
the  promises  he  made  to  Antonio  in  case  (thus 
he  phrased  it)  of  the  death  of  his  brother.  And 
he  delivered  the  tablet  to  Antonio ;  and  Antonio, 
restoring  the  lantern  to  Martolo,  stowed  the 
tablet  about  him,  and  they  set  forth  again. 

As  the  clock  in  the  tower  of  the  cathedral, 
distantly  booming  in  their  ears,  sounded  the  hour 
of  two,  they  came  to  where  the  road  parted. 
In  one  direction  it  ran  level  across  the  plain  to 
the  river  and  the  city,  and  by  this  way  they 
must  go,  if  they  would  come  to  the  secret  gate 
and  thence  to  the  Duke's  summer-house.  But 
the  second  road  left  the  plain,  and  mounted  the 
hill  that  faces  the  wicket-gate,  which  is  now 
called  the  Hill  of  Duke  Paul.  And  at  the  part- 
ing of  the  road,  Antonio  reined  in  his  horse  and 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.    57 

sat  silent  for  a  great  while.  Again  Paul,  scan- 
ning his  face,  was  troubled,  so  that  Martolo, 
who  had  drawn  near,  saw  him  wipe  a  drop  from 
his  brow.  And  Paul  said,  "  For  what  wait  we, 
Antonio  ?  Time  presses,  for  it  has  gone  two 
o'clock." 

Then  Antonio  drew  him  apart,  and  fixing  his 
eyes  on  him,  said,  "  What  of  the  child  ?  What 
mean  you  by  the  child?  How  does  it  profit 
you  that  the  father  die,  if  the  child  live?" 
,  Paul,  deeming  that  Antonio  doubted  him  and 
saw  a  snare,  and  holding  it  better  to  seem  the 
greatest  of  villains  than  to  stir  suspicion  in  a 
man  who  held  him  in  his  hands,  smiled  cun- 
ningly, and  answered,  "  The  child  will  grow 
sickly  and  pine  when  his  father  is  not  alive  to 
care  for  him." 

"  It  is  enough,"  said  Antonio ;  and  again  a 
flush  mounted  on  his  face,  and  died  down  again, 
and  left  him  pale.  For  some  think  he  would 
have  turned  from  his  purpose,  had  Paul  meant 
honestly  by  the  child.  I  know  not.  At  least, 
the  foul  murder  plotted  against  the  child  made 
him  utterly  relentless. 


58        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Let  US  go  on  and  end  the  matter,"  urged 
Paul,  full  of  eagerness,  and,  again,  of  that  strange 
uneasiness  born  of  Antonio's  air, 

"  Ay,  we  will  go  on  and  finish  it,"  said  An- 
tonio, and  with  that  he  leapt  down  from  his 
horse.  Paul  did  the  like,  for  it  had  been  agreed 
that  the  others,  with  the  horses,  were  to  await 
Antonio's  return,  while  the  Count  and  Paul  went 
forward  on  foot :  and  Tommasino  and  IMartolo, 
dismounting  also,  tied  the  horses  to  trees  and 
stood  waiting  Antonio's  orders. 

*'  Forward  !  "  cried  Paul. 

"  Come,  then,"  said  Antonio,  and  he  turned 
to  the  road  that  mounted  the  hill. 

"  It  is  by  the  other  road  we  go,"  said  Paul. 

"  It  is  by  this  road,"  said  Antonio,  and  he 
raised  his  hand  and  made  a  certain  sign,  where- 
at the  swords  of  his  friends  leapt  from  their 
scabbards,  and  they  barred  the  way,  so  that 
Duke  Paul  could  turn  nowhere  save  to  the  road 
that  mounted  the  hill.  Then  Paul's  face  grew 
long,  drawn,  and  sallow  with  sudden  fear. 
"  What  means  this  ?  "  he  cried.  "  What  means 
this,  Antonio?" 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.    59 

"  It  means,  my  lord,  that  you  must  mount 
the  hill  with  me,"  answered  Antonio,  "  even  to 
the  top  of  it,  whence  a  man  can  see  the  city." 

"But  for  what?" 

"  That  this  matter  may  be  finished,"  said  An- 
tonio ;  and,  coming  to  Paul,  he  laid  a  hand  on 
his  shoulder  and  turned  him  to  the  path  up  the 
hill.  But  Paul,  seeing  his  face  and  the  swords 
of  Tommasino  ajid  Martolo  that  barred  all  escape, 
seized  his  hand,  saying,  "  Before  God,  I  mean 
5»«ai  true,  Antonio !  As  Christ  died  for  us,  I 
mean  you  true,  Antonio  !  " 

"  Of  that  I  know  not,  and  care  not ;  yet  do 
not  swear  it  now  by  Christ's  name  if  it  be  not 
true.  How  meant  you,  my  lord,  by  your  brother 
and  your  brother's  son?" 

Paul  licked  his  lips,  for  they  had  gone  dry, 
and  he  breathed  as  a  man  pants  who  has  run  far 
and  fast.     "  You  are  three  to  one,"  he  hissed. 

"  We  shall  be  but  man  to  man  on  the  top  of 
the  hill,"  said  Antonio. 

Then  suddenly  Tommasino  spoke  unbidden. 
*'  There  is  a  priest  in  the  village  a  mile  away," 
said  he,  and  there  was  pity  in  his  voice. 


6o       THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Peace,  Tommasino !  What  priest  has  he 
provided  for  his  brother?" 

And  Tommasino  said  no  more,  but  he  turned 
his  eyes  away  from  the  face  of  Duke  Paul :  yet 
when  he  was  an  old  man,  one  being  in  his  com- 
pany heard  him  say  he  dreamed  yet  of  it.  As  for 
Martolo,  he  bent  his  head  and  crossed  himself. 

Then  Paul  threw  himself  on  his  knees  before 
Antonio  and  prayed  him  to  let  him  go ;  but  An- 
tonio seemed  not  to  hear  him,  and  stood  silent 
with  folded  arms.  Yet  presently  he  said,  "  Take 
your  sword  then,  my  lord.  If  I  fall,  these  shall 
not  touch  you.  This  much  I  give,  though  it  is 
more  than  I  have  right  to  give." 

But  Paul  would  not  take  his  sword,  but  knelt, 
still  beseeching  Antonio  with  tears,  and  mingling 
prayers  and  curses  in  a  flow  of  agonised  words. 

At  last  Antonio  plucked  him  from  the  ground 
and  sternly  bade  him  mount  the  hill ;  and  finding 
no  help,  he  set  out,  his  knees  shaking  beneath 
him,  while  Antonio  followed  close  upon  him. 
And  thus  Tommasino  and  Martolo  watched  them 
go  till  the  winding  of  the  path  hid  them  from 
view,  when  Martolo  fell  on  his  knees,  and  Tom- 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.   6l 

masino  drew  a  breath  as  though  a  load  had  rested 
on  his  chest. 

It  was  but  a  short  way  to  the  summit,  but  the 
path  was  steep,  and  the  two  went  slowly,  so  that, 
as  they  came  forth  on  the  top,  the  first  gleam  of 
dawn  caught  them  in  its  pale  light.  The  city  lay 
grey  and  drab  below  them,  and  the  lonely  tree, 
that  stands  to  this  day  upon  the  hill,  swayed  in 
the  wind  with  mournful  murmurings.  Paul 
stumbled  and  sank  in  a  heap  on  the  ground.  And 
Airt-onio  said  to  him,  "  If  you  will,  pray,"  and 
weilt'and  leant  against  the  bare  trunk  of  the  tree, 
a  little  way  apart.  But  Paul,  thinking  on  man's 
mercy,  not  on  God's,  crawled  on  his  knees  across 
the  space  between  and  laid  hold  of  Antonio's 
legs.  And  he  said  nothing,  but  gazed  up  at 
Antonio.  And  at  the  silent  appeal  Antonio  shiv- 
ered for  an  instant,  but  he  did  not  fly  the  gaze  of 
Paul's  eyes,  but  looked  down  on  him  and  an- 
swered, "  You  must  die.  Yet  there  is  your  sword, 
and  there  a  free  road  to  the  city." 

Then  Paul  let  go  Antonio's  legs  and  rose,  and 
drew  his  sword.  But  his  hand  was  trembling, 
and  he  could  scarce  stand.     Then  Antonio  gave 


62        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

to  him  a  flask  that  he  carried,  holding  strong 
waters ;  and  the  wretch,  drinking  greedily,  found 
some  courage,  and  came  suddenly  at  Antonio 
before  Antonio  looked  for  his  attack.  But  the 
Count  eluded  him,  and  drawing  his  blade  awaited 
the  attack ;  and  Paul  seized  again  the  flask  that 
he  had  flung  on  the  ground,  and  drained  it,  and 
mad  now  with  the  fumes  rushed  at  Antonio, 
shrieking  curses  and  blasphemies.  The  sun  rose 
on  the  moment  that  their  blades  crossed ;  and 
before  its  rays  had  shone  a  minute,  Antonio  had 
driven  his  sword  through  the  howling  wretch's 
lung,  and  Duke  Paul  lay  dying  on  the  grassy 
hill. 

Then  Count  Antonio  stripped  off  his  doublet 
and  made  a  pillow  of  it  for  Paul's  head,  and  sat 
down  by  him,  and  wiped  his  brow,  and  disposed 
his  body  with  such  ease  as  seemed  possible.  Yet 
he  took  no  pains  to  stanch  the  blood  or  to  min- 
ister to  the  wound,  for  his  intent  was  that  Paul 
should  die  and  not  live.  And  Paul  lay  some 
moments  on  his  back,  then  twisted  on  his  side ; 
once  he  flung  his  legs  wide  and  gathered  them 
again  under  his  body,  and  shivered,  turning  on 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.   63 

his  back  again :  and  his  jaw  fell,  and  he  died 
there  on  the  top  of  the  hill.  And  the  Count 
closed  his  eyes,  and  sat  by  him  in  silence  for 
many  minutes ;  and  once  he  buried  his  face  in  his 
hands,  and  a  single  sob  shook  him. 

But  now  it  was  growing  to  day,  and  he  rose, 
and  took  from  the  Duke's  waist  the  broad  silken 
band  that  he  w^ore,  wrought  with  golden  em- 
broidery on  a  ground  of  royal  blue.  Then  he 
took  Paul  in  his  arms  and  set  him  upright  against 
^the  trunk  of  the  tree,  and,  encircling  tree  and 
'bedy  with  the  rich  scarf,  he  bound  the  corpse 
there ;  and  he  took  the  ivory  tablet  from  his  belt 
and  tied  the  riband  that  hung  through  a  hole  in 
it  to  the  riband  of  the  Order  of  St.  Frisian,  that 
was  round  Paul's  neck,  and  he  wrote  on  the 
tablet,  "  Witness  my  hand— Antonio  of  Monte 
Velluto."  And  he  wiped  the  blade  of  his  sword 
long  and  carefully  on  the  grass  till  it  shone  pure, 
clean,  and  bright  again.  Then  he  gazed  awhile 
at  the  city,  that  grew  now  warm  and  rich  in  the 
increasing  light  of  the  sun,  and  turned  on  his 
heel  and  went  down  the  hill  by  the  way  that  he 
had  come. 


64        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

At  the  foot,  Tommasino  and  Martolo  awaited 
him ;  and  when  he  came  down  alone,  Martolo 
again  signed  the  cross ;  but  Tommasino  glanced 
one  question,  and,  finding  answer  in  Antonio's 
nod,  struck  his  open  palm  on  the  quarters  of 
Duke  Paul's  horse  and  set  it  free  to  go  where 
it  would ;  and  the  horse,  being  free,  started  at 
a  canter  along  the  road  to  the  city.  And  An- 
tonio mounted  and  set  his  face  again  towards 
the  hills.  For  awhile  he  rode  alone  in  front ; 
but  when  an  hour  was  gone,  he  called  to  Tom- 
masino, and,  on  the  lad  joining  him,  talked  with 
him,  not  gaily  indeed  (that  could  not  be),  yet 
with  calmness  and  cheerfulness  on  the  matters 
that  concerned  the  band.  But  Paul's  name  did 
not  cross  his  lips  ;  and  the  manner  in  which  he 
had  dealt  with  Paul  on  the  hill  rested  unknown 
till  a  later  time,  when  Count  Antonio  formally 
declared  it,  and  wrote  with  his  own  hand  how 
Duke  Paul  had  died.  Thus,  then,  Count  Anto- 
nio rode  back  to  the  hills,  having  executed  on 
the  body  of  Paul  that  which  seemed  to  him  right 
and  just. 

Long    had    Duke    Valentine    waited    for    his 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   TRAITOR   PRINCE,   65 

brother  in  the  summer-house  and  greatly  won- 
dered that  he  came  not.  And  as  the  morning- 
grew  and  yet  Paul  came  not,  the  Duke  feared 
that  in  some  manner  Antonio  had  detected  the 
snare,  and  that  he  held  Paul  a  prisoner ;  for  it 
did  not  enter  the  Duke's  mind  that  Antonio 
would  dare  to  kill  his  brother.  And  when  it 
was  five  o'clock,  the  Duke,  heavy-eyed  for  want 
of  sleep,  left  the  summer-house,  and  having  trav- 
ersed the  garden,  entered  his  cabinet  and  flung 
'himself  on  a  couch  there ;  and  notwithstanding 
hi^  uneasiness  for  his  brother,  being  now  very 
drowsy,  he  fell  asleep.  But  before  he  had  slept 
long,  he  was  roused  by  two  of  his  pages,  who 
ran  in  crying  that  Duke  Paul's  horse  had  come 
riderless  to  the  gate  of  the  city.  And  the  Duke 
sprang  up,  smiting  his  thigh,  and  crying,  "  If 
harm  has  come  to  him,  I  will  not  rest  till  I  have 
Antonio's  head."  So  he  mustered  a  party  of  his 
guards,  some  on  horseback  and  some  on  foot, 
and  passed  with  all  speed  out  of  the  city,  seek- 
ing his  brother,  and  vowing  vengeance  on  the 
insolence  of  Count  Antonio. 

But  the  Duke  was   not  first  out  of  the  city  ; 


66        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

for  he  found  a  stream  of  townsmen  flocking 
across  the  bridge  ;  and  at  the  end  of  the  bridge 
was  a  gathering  of  men,  huddled  close  round  a 
peasant  who  stood  in  the  centre.  The  pikemen 
made  a  way  for  His  Highness ;  and  when  the 
peasant  saw  him,  he  ran  to  him,  and  resting  his 
hand  on  the  neck  of  the  Duke's  horse,  as  though 
he  could  scarce  stand  alone,  he  cried,  pointing 
with  his  hand  to  the  hill  that  rose  to  the  west, 
"The  Duke  Paul,  the  Duke  Paul!"  And  no 
more  could  he  say. 

"  Give  him  a  horse,  one  of  you,  and  let  an- 
other lead  it,"  cried  the  Duke.  "  And  forward, 
gentlemen,  whither  he  points!" 

Thus  they  set  forth,  and  as  they  went,  the 
concourse  grew,  some  overtaking  them  from  the 
city,  some  who  were  going  on  their  business  or  for 
pleasure  into  the  city  turning  and  following  after 
the  Duke  and  his  company.  So  that  a  multitude 
went  after  Valentine  and  the  peasant,  and  they 
rode  together  at  the  head.  And  the  Duke  said 
thrice  to  the  peasant,  "  What  of  my  brother  ?  " 
But  the  peasant,  who  was  an  old  man,  did  but 
point  again  to  the  hill. 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.  6/ 

At  the  foot  of  the  hill,  all  that  had  horses 
left  them  in  charge  of  the  boys  who  were  of 
the  party,  for  the  Duke,  presaging  some  fearful 
thing,  would  suffer  none  but  grown  men  to 
mount  with  him ;  and  thus  they  went  forward 
afoot  till  they  reached  the  grassy  summit  of  the 
hill.  And  then  the  peasant  sprang  in  front,  cry- 
ing, "  There,  there  !  "  and  all  of  them  beheld  the 
body  of  Duke  Paul,  bound  to  the  tree  by  the 
embroidered  scarf,  his  head  fallen  on  his  breast, 
'.and  the  ivory  tablet  hanging  from  the  riband  of 
'  the'  Order  of  St.  Frisian.  And  a  great  silence 
fell  on  them  all,  and  they  stood  gazing  at  the 
dead  prince. 

But  presently  Duke  Valentine  went  forward 
alone ;  and  he  knelt  on  one  knee  and  bowed  his 
head,  and  kissed  his  brother's  right  hand.  And 
a  shout  of  indignation  and  wrath  went  up  from 
all  the  crowd,  and  they  cried,  "  Whose  deed  is 
this?"  The  Duke  minded  them  not,  but  rose  to 
his  feet  and  laid  his  hand  on  the  ivory  tablet ; 
and  he  perceived  that  it  was  written  by  Duke 
Paul ;  and  he  read  what  Paul  had  written  to 
Antonio ;  how  that    he,   the    Duke,  being   dead, 


68        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Antonio  should  come  to  his  own  again,  and 
wed  Lucia,  and  hold  foremost  place  in  the 
Duchy.  And,  this  read,  the  Duke  read  also  the 
subscription  of  Count  Antonio — "  Witness  my 
hand — Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto."  Then  he 
was  very  amazed,  for  he  had  trusted  his  brother. 
Yet  he  did  not  refuse  the  testimony  of  the  ivory 
tablet  nor  suspect  any  guile  or  deceit  in  An- 
tonio. And  he  stood  dry-eyed,  looking  on  the 
dead  face  of  Duke  Paul.  Then,  turning  round, 
he  cried  in  a  loud  voice,  so  that  every  man  on 
the  hill  heard  him,  "  Behold  the  body  of  a 
traitor!"  And  men  looked  on  him,  and  from 
him  to  the  faces  of  one  another,  asking  what  he 
meant.  But  he  spoke  no  other  word,  and  went 
straightway  down  the  hill,  and  mounted  his 
horse  again,  and  rode  back  to  the  city ;  and, 
having  come  to  his  palace,  he  sent  for  his  little 
son,  and  went  with  him  into  the  cabinet  behind 
the  great  hall,  where  the  two  stayed  alone  to- 
gether for  many  hours.  And  when  the  child 
came  forth,  he  asked  none  concerning  his  uncle 
the  Duke  Paul. 

Now   all   the    company    had    followed    down 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  TRAITOR   PRINCE.  69 

from  the  hill  after  the  Duke,  and  no  man  dared 
to  touch  the  body  unbidden.  Two  days  passed, 
and  a  great  storm  came,  so  that  the  rain  beat 
on  Paul's  face  and  the  lightning  blackened  it. 
But  on  the  third  day,  when  the  storm  had 
ceased,  the  Duke  bade  the  Lieutenant  of  the 
Guard  to  go  by  night  and  bring  the  body  of 
Paul:  and  the  Lieutenant  and  his  men  flung-  a 
cloak  over  the  face,  and,  having  thus  done, 
brought  the  body  into  the  city  at  the  break  of 
'•d^ty :  yet  the  great  square  was  full  of  folk  watch- 
ing in  awe  and  silence.  And  they  took  the  body 
to  the  Cathedral,  and  buried  it  under  the  wall 
on  the  north  side  in  the  shade  of  a  cypress 
tree,  laying  a  plain  flat  stone  over  it.  And 
Duke  Valentine  gave  great  sums  for  masses  to 
be  said  for  the  repose  of  his  brother's  soul. 
Yet  there  are  few  men  who  will  go  by  night 
to  the  Hill  of  Duke  Paul ;  and  even  now  when 
I  write,  there  is  a  man  in  the  city  who  has  lost 
his  senses  and  is  an  idiot :  he,  they  say,  went  to 
the  hill  on  the  night  of  the  15th  of  the  month 
wherein  Paul  died,  and  came  back  mumbling 
things  terrible   to   hear.      But  whether  he  went 


70        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

because  he  lacked  his  senses,  or  lost  his  senses 
by  reason  of  the  thing  he  saw  when  he  went,  I 
know  not. 

Thus  died  Duke  Paul  the  traitor.  Yet, 
though  the  Duke  his  brother  knew  that  what 
was  done  upon  him  was  nothing  else  than  he 
had  deserved  and  should  have  suffered  had  he 
been  brought  alive  to  justice,  he  was  very  wroth 
with  Count  Antonio,  holding  it  insolence  that 
any  man  should  lay  hands  on  one  of  his  blood, 
and,  of  his  own  will,  execute  sentence  upon  a 
criminal  of  a  degree  so  exalted.  Therefore  he 
sent  word  to  Antonio,  that  if  he  caught  him, 
he  would  hang  him  on  the  hill  from  the  branches 
of  the  tree  to  which  Antonio  had  bound  Paul, 
and  would  leave  his  body  there  for  three  times 
three  days.  And,  this  message  coming  to  An- 
tonio, he  sent  one  privily  by  night  to  the  gate 
of  the  city,  who  laid  outside  the  gate  a  letter 
for  the  Duke ;  and  in  the  letter  was  written, 
"God  chooses  the  hand.     All  is  well." 

And  Count  Antonio  abode  still  an  outlaw  in 
the  mountains,  and  the  Lady  Lucia  mourned  in 
the  city. 


CHAPTER  III. 

COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE   OF 
MANTIVOGLIA. 

I  KNOW  of  naught  by  which  a  man  may  better 
be  judged  than  by  his  bearing  in  matters  of  love. 
Wfcat  know  I  of  love,  say  you — I,  whose  head 
is  grey,  and  shaven  to  boot?  True,  it  is  grey, 
and  it  is  shaven.  But  once  it  was  brown,  and 
the  tonsure  came  not  there  till  I  had  lived 
thirty  years  and  borne  arms  for  twelve.  Then 
came  death  to  one  I  loved,  and  the  tonsure  to 
me.  Therefore,  O  ye  proud  young  men  and 
laughing  girls,  old  Ambrose  knows  of  love, 
though  his  knowledge  be  only  like  the  memory 
that  a  man  has  of  a  glorious  red-gold  sunset 
which  his  eyes  saw  a  year  ago :  cold  are  the 
tints,  gone  the  richness,  sober  and  faint  the  pic- 
ture.    Yet  it  is  something ;  he  sees  no  more,  but 

71 


72        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

he  has  seen ;  and  sometimes  still  I  seem  to  see  a 
face  that  last  I  saw  smiling  in  death.  They  tell 
me  such  thoughts  are  not  fitting  in  me,  but  I 
doubt  their  doing  a  man  much  harm ;  for  they 
make  him  take  joy  when  others  reap  the  happi- 
ness that  he,  forestalled  by  fate's  sickle,  could  not 
garner.  But  enough !  It  is  of  Count  Antonio  I 
would  write,  and  not  of  my  poor  self.  And  the 
story  may  be  worth  the  reading — or  would  be, 
had  I  more  skill  to  pen  it. 

Now  in  the  summer  of  the  second  year  of 
Count  Antonio's  banishment,  when  the  fierce 
anger  of  Duke  Valentine  was  yet  hot  for  the  pre- 
sumption shown  by  the  Count  in  the  matter  of 
Duke  Paul's  death,  a  messenger  came  privily  to 
where  the  band  lay  hidden  in  the  hills,  bringing 
greeting  to  Antonio  from  the  Prince  of  Man- 
tivoglia,  between  whom  and  the  Duke  there  was 
great  enmity.  For  in  days  gone  by  Firmola  had 
paid  tribute  to  Mantivoglia,  and  this  burden  had 
been  broken  off  only  some  thirty  years ;  and  the 
Prince,  learning  that  Antonio  was  at  variance 
with  Duke  Valentine,  perceived  an  opportunity, 
and  sent  to  Antonio,  praying  him  very  courte- 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  n-i 

ously  to  visit  Mantivoglia  and  be  his  guest. 
Antonio,  who  knew  the  Prince  well,  sent  him 
thanks,  and,  having  made  dispositions  for  the 
safety  of  his  company  and  set  Tommasino  in 
charge  of  it,  himself  rode  with  the  man  they 
called  Bena,  and,  having  crossed  the  frontier, 
came  on  the  second  day  to  Mantivoglia.  Here 
he  was  received  with  great  state,  and  all  in  the 
city  were  eager  to  see  him,  having  heard  how 
he  had  dealt  with  Duke  Paul  and  how  he  now 
renounced  the  authority  of  Valentine.  And  the 
Prince  lodged  him  in  his  palace,  and  prepared  a 
banquet  for  him,  and  set  him  on  the  right  hand  of 
the  Princess,  who  was  a  very  fair  lady,  learned, 
and  of  excellent  wit ;  indeed,  I  have  by  me  cer- 
tain stories  which  she  composed,  and  would  read 
on  summer  evenings  in  the  garden ;  and  it  may 
be  that,  if  I  live,  I  will  make  known  certain  of 
them.  Others  there  are  that  only  the  discreet 
should  read  ;  for  what  to  one  age  is  but  mirth 
turns  in  the  mind  of  the  next  to  unseemliness  and 
ribaldry.  This  Princess,  then,  was  very  gracious 
to  the  Count,  and  spared  no  effort  to  give  him 

pleasure ;    and  she  asked  him  very  many  things 
6 


74        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

concerning-  the  Lady  Lucia,  saying  at  last,  "  Is 
she  fairer  than  I,  my  lord  ? "  But  Antonio  an- 
swered, with  a  laugh,  "  The  moon  is  not  fairer 
than  the  sun,  nor  the  sun  than  the  moon :  yet 
they  are  different."  And  the  Princess  laughed 
also,  saying  merrily,  "  Well  parried,  my  lord  ! " 
And  she  rose  and  went  with  the  Prince  and  An- 
tonio into  the  garden.  Then  the  Prince  opened 
to  Antonio  what  was  in  his  mind,  saying,  "  Take 
what  command  you  will  in  my  service,  and 
come  with  me  against  Firmola ;  and  when  we 
have  brought  Valentine  to  his  knees,  I  will 
take  what  was  my  father's,  and  should  be  mine : 
and  you  shall  wring  from  him  your  pardon  and 
the  hand  of  your  lady."  And  the  Princess  also 
entreated  him.  But  Antonio  answered,  "  I  can- 
not do  it.  If  Your  Highness  rides  to  Firmola,  it 
is  likely  enough  that  I  also  may  ride  thither ;  but 
I  shall  ride  to  put  my  sword  at  the  service  of  the 
Duke.  For,  although  he  is  not  my  friend,  yet  his 
enemies  are  mine."  And  from  this  they  could 
not  turn  him.  Then  the  Prince  praised  him, 
saying,  "  I  love  you  more  for  denying  me,  An- 
tonio ;   and  when  I  send  word  of  my  coming  to 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  jc 

Valentine,  I  will  tell  him  also  of  what  you  have 
done.  And  if  we  meet  by  the  walls  of  Firmola, 
we  will  fight  like  men ;  and,  after  that,  you  shall 
come  again  to  Mantivoglia  ;  "  and  he  drank  wine 
with  Antonio,  and  so  bade  him  God-speed.  And 
the  Princess,  when  her  husband  was  gone,  looked 
at  the  Count  and  said,  "Valentine  will  not  give 
her  to  you.     Why  will  not  you  take  her  ?  " 

But  Antonio  answered :  **  The  price  is  too 
high." 

"  I  would  not  have  a  man  who  thought  any 
price  too  high,"  cried  the  Princess. 

"  Then  your  Highness  would  mate  with  a 
rogue  ?  "    asked  Count  Antonio,  smiling. 

"  If  he  were  one  for  my  sake  only,"  said  she, 
fixing  her  eyes  on  his  face  and  sighing  lightly,  as 
ladies  sigh  when  they  would  tell  something,  and 
yet  not  too  much  nor  in  words  that  can  be  re- 
peated. But  Antonio  kissed  her  hand,  and  took 
leave  of  her  ;  and  with  another  sigh  she  watched 
him  go. 

But  when  the  middle  of  the  next  month  came, 
the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  gathered  an  army  of 
three  thousand  men,  of  whom  seventeen  hundred 


76        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

were  mounted,  and  crossed  the  frontier,  direct- 
ing his  march  towards  Firmola  by  way  of  the 
base  of  Mount  Agnino  and  the  road  to  the  village 
of  Rilano.  The  Duke,  hearing  of  his  approach, 
mustered  his  Guards  to  the  number  of  eight 
hundred  and  fifty  men,  and  armed  besides  hard 
upon  two  thousand  of  the  townsmen  and  appren- 
tices, taking  an  oath  of  them  that  they  would 
serve  him  loyally  ;  for  he  feared  and  distrusted 
them  ;  and  of  the  whole  force,  eleven  hundred 
had  horses.  But  Count  Antonio  lay  still  in  the 
mountains,  and  did  not  offer  to  come  to  the 
Duke's  aid. 

"  Will  you  not  pray  his  leave  to  come  and 
fight  for  him  ?  "  asked  Tommasino. 

"  He  will  love  to  beat  the  Prince  without  my 
aid,  if  he  can,"  said  Antonio.  "  Heaven  forbid 
that  I  should  seem  to  snatch  at  glory,  and  make 
a  chance  for  myself  from  his  necessity." 

So  he  abode  two  days  where  he  was  ;  and 
then  there  came  a  shepherd,  who  said,  "  My  lord, 
the  Duke  has  marched  out  of  the  city  and  lay  last 
night  at  Rilano,  and  is  to-day  stretched  across 
the  road  that  leads  from  the  spurs  of  Agnino  to 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   PRINCE.  77 

Rilano,  his  right  wing  resting  on  the  river. 
There  he  waits  the  approach  of  the  Prince  ;  and 
they  say  that  at  daybreak  to-morrow  the  Prince 
will  attack." 

Then  Antonio  rose,  saying,  "  What  of  the 
night?  " 

Now  the  night  was  very  dark,  and  the  fog 
hung  like  a  grey  cloak  over  the  plain.  And  An- 
tonio collected  all  his  men  to  the  number  of 
threescore  and  five,  all  well-armed  and  well- 
*HQrsed  ;  and  he  bade  them  march  very  silently 
and  with  great  caution,  and  led  them  down 
into  the  plain.  And  all  the  night  they  rode 
softly,  husbanding  their  strength  and  sparing 
their  horses  ;  and  an  hour  before  the  break  of 
day  they  passed  through  the  outskirts  of  Rilano 
and  halted  a  mile  beyond  the  village,  seeing  the 
fires  of  the  Duke's  bivouacs  stretched  across  the 
road  in  front  of  them  ;  and  beyond  there  were 
other  fires  where  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  lay 
encamped.  And  Bena  said,  "  The  Prince  will  be 
too  strong  for  the  Duke,  my  lord." 

"  If  he  be,  we  also  shall  fight  to-morrow, 
Bena,"  answered  Antonio. 


78        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  I  trust,  then,  that  they  prove  at  least  well 
matched,"  said  Bena  ;  for  he  loved  to  fight,  and 
yet  was  ashamed  to  wish  that  the  Duke  should  be 
defeated. 

Then  Count  Antonio  took  counsel  with  Tom- 
masino ;  and  they  led  the  band  very  secretly 
across  the  rear  of  the  Duke's  camp  till  they  came 
to  the  river.  There  was  a  mill  on  the  river,  and 
by  the  mill  a  great  covered  barn  where  the  sacks 
of  grain  stood  ;  and  Antonio,  having  roused  the 
miller,  told  him  that  he  came  to  aid  the  Duke, 
and  not  to  fight  against  him,  and  posted  his  men 
in  this  great  barn ;  so  that  they  were  behind  the 
right  wing  of  the  Duke's  army,  and  were  hidden 
from  sight.  Day  was  dawning  now :  the  camp- 
fires  paled  in  the  growing  light,  and  the  sounds 
of  preparation  were  heard  from  the  camp.  And 
from  the  Prince's  quarters  also  came  the  noise  of 
trumpets  calling  the  men  to  arms. 

At  four  in  the  morning  the  battle  was  joined, 
Antonio  standing  with  Tommasino  and  watch- 
ing from  the  mill.  Now  Duke  Valentine  had 
placed  his  own  guards  on  either  wing,  and  the 
townsmen    in   the    centre ;    but    the    Prince  had 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   PRINCE. 


'9 


posted  the  flower  of  his  troops  in  the  centre ; 
and  he  rode  there  himself,  surrounded  by  many 
lords  and  gentlemen ;  and  with  great  valour  and 
impetuosity  he  flung  himself  against  the  towns- 
men, recking  little  of  how  he  fared  on  either 
wing.  This  careless  haste  did  not  pass  unno- 
ticed by  the  Duke,  who  was  a  cool  man  and 
wore  a  good  head  ;  and  he  said  to  Lorenzo,  one 
of  his  lords  who  was  with  him,  "  If  we  win  on 
right  and  left,  it  will  not  hurt  us  to  lose  in  the 
"middle ;  "  and  he  would  not  strengthen  the  towns- 
man against  the  Prince,  but  rather  drew  oS  more 
of  them,  and  chiefly  the  stoutest  and  best 
equipped,  whom  he  divided  between  the  right 
wing  where  he  himself  commanded,  and  the  left 
which  Lorenzo  led.  Nay,  men  declare  that  he 
was  not  ill  pleased  to  see  the  brunt  of  the  strife 
and  the  heaviest  loss  fall  on  the  apprentices  and 
townsmen.  For  a  while  indeed  these  stood 
bravely  ;  but  the  Prince's  chivalry  came  at  them 
in  fierce  pride  and  gallant  scorn,  and  bore  them 
down  with  the  weight  of  armour  and  horses, 
the  Prince  himself  leading  on  a  white  charger 
and  with  his  own  hand  slaying  Glinka,  who  was 


8o        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

head  of  the  city-bands  and  a  great  champion 
among  them.  But  Duke  Valentine  and  Lorenzo 
upheld  the  battle  on  the  wings,  and  pressed 
back  the  enemy  there ;  and  the  Duke  would  not 
send  aid  to  the  townsmen  in  the  centre,  saying 
"  I  shall  be  ready  for  the  Prince  as  soon  as  the 
Prince  is  ready  for  me,  and  I  can  spare  some 
of  those  turbulent  apprentices."  And  he  smiled 
his  crafty  smile,  adding,  "  From  enemies  also  a 
wise  man  may  suck  good  ; "  and  he  pressed  for- 
ward on  the  right  fighting  more  fiercely  than 
was  his  custom.  But  when  Antonio  beheld  the 
townsmen  hard  pressed  and  being  ridden  down 
by  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia's  knights  and  saw 
that  the  Duke  would  not  aid  them,  he  grew  very 
hot  and  angry,  and  said  to  Tommasino,  "  These 
men  have  loved  my  house,  Tommasino.  It  may 
be  that  I  spoil  His  Highness's  plan,  but  are  we 
to  stand  here  while  they  perish  ?  " 

"  A  fig  for  His  Highness's  plan  !  "  said  Tom- 
masino ;  and  Bena  gave  a  cry  of  joy  and  sprang, 
unbidden,  on  his  horse. 

"  Since  you  are  up,  Bena,"  said  the  Count, 
"  stay  up,  and  let  the  others  mount.     The  Duke's 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   PRINCE.  gl 

plan,  if  I  read  it  aright,  is  craftier  than   I  love, 
and  I  do  not  choose  to  understand  it." 

Then,  when  the  townsmen's  line  was  giving 
way  before  the  Prince,  and  the  apprentices,  con- 
ceiving themselves  to  be  shamefully  deserted, 
were  more  of  a  mind  to  run  away  than  to  fight 
any  more,  suddenly  Antonio  rode  forth  from  the 
mill.  He  and  his  company  came  at  full  gallop ; 
but  he  himself  was  ten  yards  ahead  of  Bena  and 
Tommasino,  for  all  that  they  raced  after  him. 
2Ki3,d  he  cried  aloud,  *'  To  me,  men  of  Firmola, 
to  me,  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto !  "  and  they 
beheld  him  with  utter  astonishment  and  great 
joy.  For  his  helmet  was  fallen  from  his  head, 
and  his  fair  hair  gleamed  in  the  sun,  and  the 
light  of  battle  played  on  his  face.  And  the  band 
followed  him,  and,  though  they  had  for  the  most 
part  no  armour,  yet  such  was  the  fury  of  their 
rush,  and  such  the  mettle  and  strength  of  their 
horses,  that  they  made  light  of  meeting  the 
Prince's  knights  in  full  tilt.  And  the  townsmen 
cried,  "  It  is  the  Count !  To  death  after  the 
Count !  "  And  Antonio  raised  the  great  sword 
that  he  carried,  and  rode  at  the  Marshal  of  the 


82        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Prince's  palace,  who  was  in  the  van  of  the  fight, 
and  he  split  helmet  and  head  with  a  blow.  Then 
he  came  to  where  the  Prince  himself  was,  and 
the  great  sword  was  raised  again,  and  the  Prince 
rode  to  meet  him,  saying,  "  If  I  do  not  die  now, 
I  shall  not  die  to-day."  But  when  Antonio  saw 
the  Prince,  he  brought  his  sword  to  his  side  and 
bowed  and  turned  aside,  and  engaged  the  most 
skilful  of  the  Mantivoglian  knights.  And  he 
fought  that  day  like  a  man  mad  ;  but  he  would 
not  strike  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia.  And  after 
a  while  the  Prince  ceased  to  seek  him  ;  and  a 
flatterer  said  to  the  Prince,  "  He  is  bold  against 
us,  but  he  fears  you,  my  lord."  But  the  Prince 
said,  "  Peace,  fool.  Go  and  fight."  For  he  knew 
that  not  fear,  but  friendship,  forbade  Antonio  to 
assail  him. 

Yet  by  now  the  rout  of  the  townsmen  was 
stayed  and  they  were  holding  their  own  again  in 
good  heart  and  courage,  while  both  on  the  right 
and  on  the  left  the  Duke  pressed  on  and  held  the 
advantage.  Then  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  per- 
ceived that  he  was  in  a  dangerous  plight,  for  he 
was  in  peril  of  being  worsted  along  his  whole 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   PRINCE.  83 

line ;  for  his  knights  did  no  more  than  hold  a 
doubtful  balance  against  the  townsmen  and  An- 
tonio's company,  while  the  Duke  and  Lorenzo 
were  victorious  on  either  wing ;  and  he  knew  that 
if  the  Duke  got  in  rear  of  him  and  lay  between 
him  and  Mount  Agnino,  he  would  be  sore  put  to 
it  to  find  a  means  of  retreat.  Therefore  he  left 
the  centre  and  rode  to  the  left  of  his  line  and 
himself  faced  Duke  Valentine.  Yet  slowly  was 
he  driven  back,  and  he  gave  way  sullenly,  obsti- 
nately, and  in  good  order,  himself  performing 
ma'fey  gallant  deeds,  and  seeking  to  come  to  a 
conflict  with  the  Duke.  But  the  Duke,  seeing 
that  the  day  was  likely  to  be  his,  would  not  meet 
him  and  chose  to  expose  his  person  to  no  more 
danger:  "For,"  he  said,  "a  soldier  who  is  killed  is 
a  good  soldier ;  but  a  chief  who  is  killed  save  for 
some  great  object  is  a  bad  chief."  And  he  bided 
his  time  and  slowly  pressed  the  Prince  back, 
seeking  rather  to  win  the  battle  than  the  praise 
of  bravery.  But  when  Count  Antonio  saw  that 
all  went  well,  and  that  the  enemy  were  in  re- 
treat, he  halted  his  band  ;  and  at  this  they 
murmured,  Bena  daring  to   say,    "  My    lord,  we 


84 


THE  CHRONICLES  OF   COUNT  ANTONIO. 


have  had  dinner,  and  may  we  not  have  supper 
also?"  Antonio  smiled  at  Bena,  but  would  not 
listen. 

"  No,"  said  he.  "  His  Highness  has  won  the 
victory  by  his  skill  and  cunning.  I  did  but  move 
to  save  my  friends.  It  is  enough.  Shall  I  seek 
to  rob  him  of  his  glory  ?  For  the  ignorant  folk, 
counting  the  arm  more  honourable  than  the  head, 
will  give  me  more  glory  than  him  if  I  continue  in 
the  fight."  And  thus,  not  being  willing  to  force 
his  aid  on  a  man  who  hated  to  receive  it,  he  drew 
off  his  band.  Awhile  he  waited  ;  but  when  he 
saw  that  the  Prince  was  surely  beaten,  and  that 
the  Duke  held  victory  in  his  hand,  he  gave  the 
word  that  they  should  return  by  the  way  they 
had  come. 

"  Indeed,"  said  Tommasino,  laughing,  "  it  may 
be  wisdom  as  well  as  good  manners,  cousin.  For 
I  would  not  trust  myself  to  Valentine  if  he  be 
victorious,  for  all  the  service  which  we  have 
done  him  in  saving  the  apprentices  he  loves  so 
well." 

So  Antonio's  band  turned  and  rode  off  from 
the  field,  and  they  passed  through  Rilano.     But 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   PRINCE.  85 

they  found  the  village  desolate ;  for  report  had 
come  from  the  field  that  the  Duke's  line  was 
broken,  and  that  in  a  short  space  the  Prince  of 
Mantivoglia  would  advance  in  triumph,  and 
having  sacked  Rilano,  would  go  against  Firmola, 
where  there  were  but  a  few  old  men  and  boys 
left  to  guard  the  walls  against  him.  And  one 
peasant,  whom  they  found  hiding  in  the  wood  by 
the  road,  said  there  was  panic  in  the  city,  and 
that  many  were  escaping  from  it  before  the 
ehemy  should  appear. 

•"^It  is  months  since  I  saw  Firmola,"  said  An- 
tonio with  a  smile.  "  Let  us  ride  there  and  reas- 
sure these  timid  folk.  For  my  lord  the  Duke 
has  surely  by  now  won  the  victory,  and  he  will 
pursue  the  Prince  till  he  yields  peace  and  aban- 
dons the  tribute." 

Now  a  great  excitement  rose  in  the  band  at 
these  words ;  for  although  they  had  lost  ten  men 
in  the  battle  and  five  more  were  disabled,  yet 
they  were  fifty  stout  and  ready ;  and  it  was  not 
likely  that  there  was  any  force  in  Firmola  that 
could  oppose  them.  And  Martolo,  who  rode 
with  Tommasino,  whispered  to  him,  "  My  lord. 


86        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

my  lord,  shall  we  carry  off  the  Lad}'^  Lucia  before 
His  Highness  can  return  ?  " 

Tommasino  glanced  at  Antonio.  "Nay,  I 
know  not  what  my  cousin  purposes,"  said  he. 

Then  Antonio  bade  Bena  and  Martolo  ride  on 
ahead,  taking  the  best  horses,  and  tell  the  people 
at  Firmola  that  victory  was  with  the  Duke,  and 
that  His  Highness's  servant,  Antonio  of  Monte 
Velluto,  was  at  hand  to  protect  the  city  till  His 
Highness  should  return  in  triumph.  And  the 
two,  going  ahead  while  the  rest  of  the  band  took 
their  mid-day  meal,  met  many  ladies  and  certain 
rich  merchants  and  old  men  escaping  from  the 
city,  and  turned  them  back,  saying  that  all  was 
well ;  and  the  ladies  would  fain  have  gone  on 
and  met  Antonio ;  but  the  merchants,  hearing 
that  he  was  there,  made  haste  to  get  within  the 
walls  again,  fearing  that  he  would  levy  a  toll  on 
them  for  the  poor,  as  his  custom  was.  At  this 
Bena  laughed  mightily,  and  drew  rein,  saying, 
"  These  rabbits  will  run  quicker  back  to  their 
burrow  than  we  could  ride,  Martolo.  Let  us 
rest  awhile  under  a  tree ;  I  have  a  flask  of  wine 
in  my  saddle-bag."     So  they  rested ;  and  while 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  87 

they  rested,  they  saw  what  amazed  them  ;  for  a 
lady  rode  alone  towards  them  on  a  palfrey,  and 
though  the  merchants  met  her  and  spoke  with 
her,  yet  she  rode  on.  And  when  she  came  to  the 
tree  where  Bena  and  Martolo  were,  they  sprang- 
up  and  bared  their  heads  ;  for  she  was  the  Lady 
Lucia ;  and  her  face  was  full  of  fear  and  eager- 
ness as  she  said,  "  No  guard  is  kept  to-day,  even 
on  helpless  ladies.  Is  it  true  that  my  lord  is 
near?" 

,^i  Yes,  he  is  near,"  said  Bena,  kissing  her 
haricl.  '  "  See,  there  is  the  dust  of  his  company  on 
the  road." 

"  Go,  one  of  you,  and  say  that  I  wait  for 
him,"  she  commanded  ;  so  Martolo  rode  on  to 
carry  the  news  farther,  and  Bena  went  to  An- 
tonio and  said,  "  Heaven,  my  lord,  sends  fortune. 
The  Lady  Lucia  has  escaped  from  the  city,  and 
awaits  you  under  yonder  tree." 

And  when  Tommasino  heard  this,  he  put  out 
his  hand  suddenly  and  caught  Antonio's  hand 
and  pressed  it,  saying,  "  Go  alone,  and  bring  her 
here:  we  will  wait:  the  Duke  will  not  be  here 
for  many  hours  yet." 


88        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Then  Antonio  rode  alone  to  the  tree  where 
Lucia  was ;  and  because  he  had  not  seen  her  for 
many  months,  he  leapt  down  from  his  horse  and 
came  running  to  her,  and,  kneeling,  kissed  her 
hand ;  but  she,  who  stood  now  by  her  palfrey's 
side,  flung  her  arms  about  his  neck  and  fell  with 
tears  and  laughter  into  his  arms,  saying,  "  An- 
tonio, Antonio !  Heaven  is  with  us,  Antonio." 

"  Yes,"  said  he.  "  For  His  Highness  has  won 
the  day." 

"Have  not  we  won  the  day  also?"  said  she, 
reaching  up  and  laying  her  hands  on  his 
shoulders. 

"  Heart  of  my  heart,"  said  he  softly,  as  he 
looked  in  her  eyes. 

"  The  cage  is  opened,  and,  Antonio,  the  bird 
is  free,"  she  whispered,  and  her  eyes  danced  and 
her  cheek  went  red.  "  Lift  me  to  my  saddle, 
Antonio." 

The  Count  obeyed  her,  and  himself  mounted  ; 
and  she  said,  "  We  can  reach  the  frontier  in  three 
hours,  and  there — there,  Antonio,  none  fears  the 
Duke's  wrath."  And  Antonio  knew  what  she 
would   say,  save    that   she   would   not   speak  it 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  go 

bluntly — that  there  they  could  find  a  priest  to 
marry  them.  And  his  face  was  pale  as  he  smiled 
at  her.  Then  he  laid  his  hand  on  her  bridle  and 
turned  her  palfrey's  head  towards  Firmola.  Her 
eyes  darted  a  swift  question  at  him,  and  she  cried 
low,  "Thither,  Antonio?" 

Then  he  answered  her,  bending  still  his  look 
on  her,  "  Alas,  I  am  no  learned  man,  nor  a  doctor 
skilled  in  matters  of  casuistry  and  nice  distinc- 
tions. I  can  but  do  what  the  blood  that  is  in  me 
tells  me  a  gentleman  should  do.  To-day,  sweet- 
he:^*t — ah,  will  you  not  hide  your  face  from  me, 
sweetheart,  that  my  words  may  not  die  in  my 
mouth  ? — to-day  our  lord  the  Duke  fights  against 
the  enemies  of  our  city,  holding  for  us  in  hard 
battle  the  liberty  that  we  have  won,  and  bearing 
the  banner  of  Firmola  high  to  heaven  in  victory." 

She  listened  with  strained  frightened  face ; 
and  the  horses  moved  at  a  walk  towards  Firmola. 
And  she  laid  her  hand  on  his  arm,  saying  again, 
"  Antonio ! " 

"  And  I  have  fought  with  my  lord  to-day,  and 
I  would  be  at  his  side  now,  except  that  I  do  his 
pleasure  better  by  leaving  him  to  triumph  alone. 


go        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

But  my  hand  has  been  with  him  to-day,  and  my 
heart  is  with  him  to-day.  Tell  me,  sweetheart,  if 
I  rode  forth  to  war  and  left  you  alone,  would  you 
do  aught  against  me  till  I  returned?" 

She  did  not  answer  him. 

"  A  Prince's  city,"  said  he,  "  should  be  as  his 
faithful  wife ;  and  when  he  goes  to  meet  the 
enemy,  none  at  home  should  raise  a  hand  against 
him  ;  above  all  may  not  one  who  has  fought  by 
his  side.  For  to  stand  side  by  side  in  battle  is  a 
promise  and  a  compact  between  man  and  man, 
even  as  though  man  swore  to  man  on  a  holy 
relic." 

Then  she  understood  what  he  would  say, 
and  she  looked  away  from  him  across  the  plain ; 
and  a  tear  rolled  down  her  cheek  as  she  said, 
"  Indeed,  my  lord,  the  error  lies  in  my  thoughts ; 
for  I  fancied  that  your  love  was  mine." 

Antonio  leant  from  his  saddle  and  lightly 
touched  her  hair.  "  Was  that  indeed  your 
fancy?"  said  he.     "And  I  prove  it  untrue?" 

"  You  carry  me  back  to  my  prison,"  she  said. 
"  And  you  will  ride  away." 

"And  so  I  love  you  not?"  he  asked. 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  qi 

"  No,  you  love  me  not,"  said  she ;  and  her 
voice  caught  in  a  sob. 

"  See,"  said  he ;  "  we  draw  near  to  Firmola, 
and  the  city  gates  are  open ;  and,  look,  they 
raise  a  flag  on  the  Duke's  palace ;  and  there  is 
joy  for  the  victory  that  Martolo  has  told  them 
of.  And  in  all  the  Duchy  there  are  but  two 
black  hearts  that  burn  with  treacherous  thoughts 
against  His  Highness,  setting  their  own  infinite 
joy    above    the     honour     and    faith    they    owe 

Kl«3." 

*^Nay,  but  are  there  two?"  she  asked,  turn- 
ing her  face  from  him. 

"  In  truth  I  would  love  to  think  there  was 
but  one,"  said  he.  "  And  that  one  beats  in  me, 
sweetheart,  and  so  mightily,  that  I  think  it  will 
burst  the  walls  of  my  body,  and  1  shall  die." 

"  Yet  we  ride  to  Firmola,"  said  she. 

"  Yet,  by  Christ's  grace,"  said  Count  Antonio, 
"  we  ride  to  Firmola." 

Then  the  Lady  Lucia  suddenly  dropped  her 
bridle  on  the  neck  of  her  palfrey  and  caught 
Antonio's  right  hand  in  her  two  hands  and  said 
to  him,  "  When  I  pray  to-night,  I  will  pray  for 


92        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  cleansing  of  the  black  heart,  Antonio.  And 
I  will  make  a  wreath  and  carry  it  to  the  Duke 
and  kiss  his  hand  for  his  victory.  And  I  will 
set  lights  in  my  window  and  flags  on  my  house ; 
and  I  will  give  my  people  a  feast ;  and  I  will 
sing  and  laugh  for  the  triumph  of  the  city  and 
for  the  freedom  this  day  has  won  for  us :  and 
when  I  have  done  all  this,  what  may  I  do  then, 
Antonio  ?  " 

"  I  am  so  cruel,"  said  he,  "  that  then  I  would 
have  you  weep  a  little :  yet  spoil  not  the  loveliest 
eyes  in  all  the  world  ;  for  if  you  dim  them,  it 
may  be  that  they  will  not  shine  like  stars  across 
the  plain  and  even  into  the  hut  where  I  live 
among  the  hills." 

"Do  they  shine  bright,  Antonio?" 
"  As  the  gems  on  the  Gates  of  Heaven,"  he 
answered ;  and  he  reined  in  his  horse  and  gave 
her  bridle  into  her  hands.  And  then  for  many 
minutes  neither  spoke ;  and  Count  Antonio 
kissed  her  lips,  and  she  his  ;  and  they  promised 
with  the  eyes  what  they  needed  not  to  promise 
with  the  tongue.  And  the  Lady  Lucia  went 
alone  on  her  way  to  Firmola.     But  the  Count 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  gj 

sat  still  like  a  statue  of  marble  on  his  horse,  and 
watched  her  as  she  rode.  And  there  he  stayed 
till  the  gates  of  the  city  received  her  and  the 
walls  hid  her  from  his  sight ;  and  the  old  men 
on  the  walls  saw  him  and  knew  him,  and  asked, 
"  Does  he  come  against  us  ?  But  it  was  against 
the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  that  we  swore  to 
fight."  And  they  watched  him  till  he  turned 
and  rode  at  a  foot's  pace  away  from  the  city. 
And  now  as  he  rode  his  brow  was  smooth  and 
calm  and  there  was  a  smile  on  his  lips. 

But  when  Antonio  had  ridden  two  or  three 
miles  and  came  where  he  had  left  the  band,  he 
could  see  none  of  them.  And  a  peasant  came 
running  to  him  in  great  fright  and  said,  "  My 
lord,  your  men  are  gone  again  to  aid  the  Duke ; 
for  the  Prince  has  done  great  deeds,  and  turned 
the  fight,  and  it  is  again  very  doubtful :  and  my 
lord  Tommasino  bade  me  say  that  he  knew  your 
mind,  and  was  gone  to  fight  for  Firmola." 

Then  Antonio,  wondering  greatly  at  the  news, 
set  his  horse  to  a  gallop  and  passed  through  Ri- 
lano  at  furious  speed,  and  rode  on  towards  Ag- 
nino ;  and  it  was  now  afternoon.     Presently  he 


Q4        THE   CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

saw  the  armies,  but  they  seemed  to  lie  idle,  over 
against  one  another.  And,  riding  on,  he  met 
Bena,  who  was  come  to  seek  him.  And  Bena 
said,  "  The  Prince  and  his  knights  have  fought 
like  devils,  my  lord,  and  the  townsmen  grew 
fearful  again  when  you  were  gone;  and  we, 
coming  back,  have  fought  again.  But  now  a 
truce  has  sounded,  and  the  Prince  and  the  Duke 
are  meeting  in  conference  between  the  armies. 
Yet  they  say  that  no  peace  will  be  made  ;  for  the 
Prince,  taking  heart  from  his  sudden  success, 
though  he  is  willing  to  abandon  the  tribute,  asks 
something  in  return  which  the  Duke  will  not 
grant.  Yet  perhaps  he  has  granted  it  by  now, 
for  his  men  are  weary." 

"  He  should  grant  nothing,"  cried  Antonio, 
and  galloped  on  again.  But  Bena  said  to  himself 
with  an  oath,  "  He  has  sent  back  the  lady  !  The 
saints  save  us ! "  and  followed  Antonio  with  a 
laugh  on  his  face.  ' 

But  Antonio,  thinking  nothing  of  his  own 
safety,  rode  full  into  the  ranks  of  the  Duke's 
Guard,  saying,  *'  Where  does  my  lord  talk  with 
the  Prince  ?  "     And  they  showed  him  where  the 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  g^ 

place  was ;  for  the  Prince  and  the  Duke  sat  alone 
under  a  tree  between  the  two  arrays.  And  the 
Duke  looked  harsh  and  resolute,  while  the  Prince 
was  very  courteously  entreating  him. 

"  Indeed,"  said  he,  "  so  doubtful  has  the  day 
been,  my  lord,  that  I  might  well  refuse  to  aban- 
don the  tribute,  and  try  again  to-morrow  the 
issue  of  the  fight.  But,  since  so  many  brave  men 
have  fallen  on  both  sides,  I  am  willing  to  abandon 
it,  asking  of  you  only  such  favour  as  would  be 
ccflTceded  to  a  simple  gentleman  asking  of  his 
friend.  And  yet  you  will  not  grant  it  me,  and 
thus  bring  peace  between  us  and  our  peoples." 

Duke  Valentine  frowned  and  bit  his  lip ;  and 
the  Prince  rose  from  where  he  had  been  seated, 
and  lifted  his  hand  to  the  sky,  and  said,  "  So  be 
it,  my  lord  ;  on  your  head  lies  the  blame.  For  to- 
morrow I  will  attack  again;  and,  as  God  lives,  I 
will  not  rest  till  the  neck  of  the  city  of  Firmola  is 
under  my  foot,  or  my  head  rolls  from  my  shoul- 
ders by  your  sword." 

Then  Duke  Valentine  paced  up  and  down, 
pondering  deeply.  For  he  was  a  man  that  hated 
to  yield  aught,  and  beyond  all  else  hated  what 


q6        the   chronicles   of   count   ANTONIO. 

the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  asked  of  him.  Yet  he 
feared  greatly  to  refuse ;  for  the  townsmen  had 
no  stomach  for  another  fight  and  had  threatened 
to  march  home  if  he  would  not  make  peace  with 
the  Prince.  Therefore  he  turned  to  the  Prince, 
and,  frowning  heavily,  was  about  to  say,  "  Since 
it  must  be  so,  so  let  it  be,"  when  suddenly  the 
Count  Antonio  rode  up  and  leapt  from  his  horse, 
crying,  "  Yield  nothing,  my  lord,  yield  nothing ! 
For  if  you  will  tell  me  what  to  do,  and  suffer  me 
to  be  your  hand,  we  will  drive  the  enemy  over 
our  borders  with  great  loss." 

Then  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  fell  to  laugh- 
ing, and  he  came  to  Antonio  and  put  his  arm 
about  his  neck,  saying,  "  Peace,  peace,  thou  fool- 
ish man ! " 

Antonio  saluted  him  with  all  deference,  but 
he  answered,  "  I  must  give  good  counsel  to  my 
lord  the  Duke."  And  he  turned  to  the  Duke 
again,  saying,  "  Yield  nothing  to  the  Prince,  my 
lord." 

Duke  Valentine's  lips  curved  in  his  slow  smile 
as  he  looked  at  Antonio.  "  Is  that  indeed  your 
counsel?    And  will  you  swear,  Antonio,  to  give 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   PRINCE.  gj 

me  your  aid  against  the   Prince  so  long  as  the 
war  lasts,  if  I  follow  it? " 

"  Truly,  I  swear  it,"  cried  Antonio.  "  Yet 
what  need  is  there  of  an  oath?  Am  I  not  Your 
Highness's  servant,  bound  to  obey  without  an 
oath?" 

"  Nay,  but  you  do  not  tell  him "  began  the 

Prince  angrily. 

Duke  Valentine  smiled  again ;  he  was  ever 
desirous  to  make  a  show  of  fairness  where  he 
risked  nothing  by  it ;  and  he  gazed  a  moment  on 
Antonio's  face ;  then  he  answered  to  the  Prince 
of  Mantivoglia,  "  I  know  the  man,  my  lord.  I 
know  him  in  his  strength  and  in  his  folly.  Do  not 
we  know  one  another,  Antonio  ?  " 

"Indeed,  I  know  not  all  your  Highness's 
mind,"  answered  Antonio. 

"  Well,  I  will  tell  him,"  said  Duke  Valentine. 
"  This  Prince,  Antonio,  has  consented  to  a  peace, 
and  to  abandon  all  claim  to  tribute  from  our  city, 
on  one  condition ;  which  is,  that  I,  the  Duke, 
shall  do  at  his  demand  what  of  my  own  free  and 
sovereign  will  I  would  not  do." 

"  His  demand  is  not  fitting  nor  warranted  by 


gS        THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

his  power,"  said  Antonio ;  but  in  spite  of  his 
words  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  passed  his  arm 
through  his,  and  laughed  ruefully,  whispering, 
"  Peace,  man,  peace." 

"  And  thus  I,  the  Duke,  having  bowed  my 
will  to  his,  shall  return  to  Firmola,  not  beaten  in- 
deed, yet  half-beaten  and  cowed  by  the  power  of 
Mantivoglia." 

"  It  shall  not  be,  my  lord,"  cried  Count 
Antonio. 

"  Yet,  my  lord  Duke,  you  do  not  tell  him 
what  the  condition  is,"  said  the  Prince. 

"  Why,  it  is  nothing  else  than  that  I  should 
pardon  you,  and  suffer  you  to  wed  the  Lady 
Lucia,"  said  Duke  Valentine. 

Then  Count  Antonio  loosed  himself  from  the 
arm  of  the  Prince  and  bent  and  kissed  the 
Prince's  hand  ;  but  he  said,  "  Is  this  thing  to 
come  twice  on  a  man  in  one  day  ?  For  it  is  but 
an  hour  or  less  that  I  parted  from  the  lady  of 
whom  you  speak ;  and  if  her  eyes  could  not 
move  me,  what  else  shall  move  me  ?  "  And  he 
told  them  briefly  of  his  meeting  with  the  Lady 
Lucia.     But  Duke  Valentine  was  wroth  with  the 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  qq 

shame  that  a  generous  act  rouses  in  a  heart  that 
knows  no  generosity  ;  and  the  Prince  was  yet 
more  wroth,  and  he  said  to  Duke  Valentine, 
"  Were  there  any  honour  in  you,  my  lord,  you 
would  not  need  my  prayers  to  pardon  him." 

At  this  the  Duke's  face  grew  very  dark ;  and 
he  cried  angrily,  "  Get  back  to  your  own  line, 
my  lord,  or  the  truce  shall  not  save  you."  And 
he  turned  to  Antonio  and  said,  "  Three  hours 
do  I  give  you  to  get  hence,  before  I  pursue." 
'.^Antonio  bowed  low  to  him  and  to  the  Prince ; 
alid-'tliey  three  parted,  the  two  princes  in  bitter 
wrath,  and  set  again  on  fighting  to  the  end, 
the  one  because  he  was  ashamed  and  3'et  ob- 
stinate, the  other  for  scorn  of  a  rancour  that 
found  no  place  in  himself.  But  Count  Antonio 
went  back  to  his  company  and  drew  it  some 
little  way  off  from  both  armies  ;  and  he  said  to 
Toramasino,  "  The  truce  is  ended,  and  they  will 
fight  again  so  soon  as  the  men  have  had  some 
rest ;  "  and  he  told  Tommasino  what  had  passed. 
Then  he  sat  silent  again ;  but  presently  he  laid 
hold  of  his  cousin's  arm,  saying,  "  Look  you, 
Tommasino,   princes   are   sometimes   fools ;    and 


lOO     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

hence  come  trouble  and  death  to  honest  hum- 
ble folk.  It  is  a  sore  business  that  they  fight 
again  to-morrow,  and  not  now  for  any  great  mat- 
ter, but  because  they  are  bitter  against  one  an- 
other on  my  account.  Cannot  I  stop  them, 
Tommasino?  " 

"  Aye,  if  you  have  five  thousand  men  and 
not  thirty-five — for  that  is  the  sum  of  us  now, 
counting  Martolo,  who  is  back  from  Firmola." 

Antonio  looked  thoughtfully  through  the 
dusk  of  evening  which  now  fell.  "  They  will 
not  fight  to-night,"  he  said.  "  I  am  weary  of 
this  blood-letting."  And  Tommasino  saw  that 
there  was  something  in  his  mind. 

Now  the  night  fell  dark  again  and  foggy, 
even  as  the  night  before ;  and  none  in  either 
army  dared  to  move,  and  even  the  sentries  could 
see  no  more  than  a  few  yards  before  them.  But 
Antonio's  men  being  accustomed  to  ride  in  the 
dark,  and  to  find  their  way  through  mists  both 
in  plain  and  hill,  could  see  more  clearly  ;  and 
'Antonio  divided  them  into  two  parties,  himself 
leading  one,  and  giving  the  other  into  Tom- 
masino's  charge.     Having  very  securely  tethered 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   PRINCE.  joi 

their  horses,  they  set  forth,  crawling  on  their 
bellies  through  the  grass.  Antonio  with  his 
party  made  for  the  camp  of  the  Prince,  while 
Tommasino  and  his  party  directed  their  way  to- 
wards the  Duke's  bivouacs.  And  they  saw  the 
fires  very  dimly  through  the  mist,  and  both 
parties  passed  the  sentries  unobserved,  and  made 
their  way  to  the  centre  of  the  camps.  Then, 
on  the  stroke  of  midnight,  a  strange  stir  arose  in 
both  the  camtps.  Nothing  could  be  seen  by 
reason  of  the  darkness  and  the  mist ;  but  sud- 
denly cries  arose,  and  men  ran  to  and  fro  ;  and 
a  cry  went  up  from  the  Duke's  camp,  "  They 
are  behind  us !  They  are  behind  us !  We 
are  surrounded  !  "  And  in  the  Prince's  camp 
also  was  great  fear ;  for  from  behind  them, 
towards  where  the  spurs  of  Mount  Agnino  be- 
gan, there  came  shouts  of  "  At  them,  at  them  ! 
Charge  !  "  And  the  Prince's  officers,  perceiving 
the  cries  to  be  from  men  of  Firmola  (and  this 
they  knew  by  reason  of  certain  differences  in 
the  phrasing  of  words),  conceived  that  the 
Duke  had  got  behind  them,  and  was  lying 
across  their  way  of  retreat. 


102      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Then  the  Duke,  hearing  the  shouts  in  his 
own  camp,  ran  out  from  his  tent ;  and  he  was 
met  by  hundreds  of  the  townsmen,  who  cried, 
"  My  lord,  we  are  surrounded ! "  For  An- 
tonio's men  had  gone  to  the  townsmen  and 
shewn  them  how  they  might  escape  more  fight- 
ing ;  and  the  townsmen  were  nothing  loth  ;  and 
they  insisted  with  the  Duke  that  a  body  of 
men  on  horseback  had  passed  behind  them.  So 
the  Duke  sent  out  scouts,  who  could  see  noth- 
ing of  the  horsemen.  But  then  the  townsmen 
cried,  some  being  in  the  secret,  others  not, 
"  Then  they  have  ridden  past  us,  and  are  mak- 
ing for  Firmola.  And  they  will  do  Heaven 
knows  what  there.  Lead  us  after  them,  my 
lord  !  "  And  the  Duke  was  very  angry  ;  but  he 
was  also  greatly  afraid,  for  he  perceived  that 
there  was  a  stir  in  the  Prince's  camp  also,  and 
heard  shouts  from  there,  but  could  not  distin- 
guish what  was  said.  And  while  he  considered 
what  to  do,  the  townsmen  formed  their  ranks 
and  sent  him  word  that  they  were  for  Firmola  ; 
and  when  he  threatened  them  with  his  Guard, 
they  rejoined    that   one   death   was   as  good  as 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   PRINCE.  103 

another ;  and  the  Duke  gnawed  his  nails  and 
went  pale  with  rage.  But  Count  Antonio's  men, 
seeing  how  well  the  plan  had  sped,  crept  again 
out  from  the  camp,  and  returned  to  where  they 
had  tethered  their  horses,  and  mounted,  each 
taking  a  spare  horse.  And  before  they  had  been 
there  long,  they  heard  trumpets  sound  in  the 
Duke's  camp,  and  the  camp  was  struck,  and  the 
Duke  and  all  his  force  began  to  retreat  on 
Rilano,  throwing  out  many  scouts,  and  moving 
''▼€ry  cautiously  in  the  darkness  and  mist.  Yet 
wlien  they  came  on  nobody,  they  marched 
more  quickly,  even  the  Duke  himself  now  be- 
lieving that  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  had  of  a 
purpose  allowed  the  stir  in  his  camp  to  be  seen 
and  heard,  in  order  that  he  might  detach  a 
column  to  Firmola  unobserved,  and  attack  the 
city  before  the  Duke  came  up.  Therefore  he 
now  pressed  on,  saying,  "  I  doubt  not  that  the 
Prince  himself  is  with  the  troop  that  has  gone 
to  Firmola."  And  all  night  long  they  marched 
across  the  plain,  covering  a  space  of  eighteen 
miles;  and  just  before  the  break  of  day  they 
came  to  the  city. 


I04      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Thus  did  it  fall  out  with  the  army  of  Duke 
Valentine.  But  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  had 
been  no  less  bewildered  ;  for  when  he  sent  out 
men  to  see  what  the  cries  behind  the  camp 
meant,  he  found  no  man ;  but  he  still  heard 
scattered  cries  among  the  rising  ground,  where 
the  hills  began.  And  he  in  his  turn  saw  a  stir 
in  the  camp  opposite  to  him.  And,  being  an 
impetuous  Prince,  as  he  had  shown  both  in  evil 
and  in  good  that  day,  he  snatched  up  his  sword, 
swearing  that  he  would  find  the  truth  of  the 
matter,  and  bidding  his  ofihcers  wait  his  return 
and  not  be  drawn  from  their  position  before  he 
came  again  to  them ;  and  taking  some  of  his 
younger  knights  and  a  few  more,  he  passed  out 
of  his  camp,  and  paused  for  a  moment,  bidding 
those  with  him  spread  themselves  out  in  a  thin 
line,  in  order  the  better  to  reconnoitre,  and  that, 
if  some  fell  into  an  ambuscade,  others  might  sur- 
vive to  carry  the  news  back  to  the  camp.  And 
he,  having  given  his  order,  himself  stood  resting 
on  his  sword.  But  in  an  instant,  before  he  could 
so  much  as  lift  the  point  of  his  sword  from  the 
ground,  silent  blurred  shapes  came  from  the  mist, 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  105 

and  were  in  front  and  behind  and  round  him ; 
and  they  looked  so  strange  that  he  raised  his 
hand  to  cross  himself ;  but  then  a  scarf  was 
thrown  over  his  mouth,  and  he  was  seized  by 
eight  strong  hands  and  held  so  that  he  could  not 
struggle ;  and  neither  could  he  cry  out  by  reason 
of  the  scarf  across  his  mouth.  And  they  that 
held  him  began  to  run  rapidly ;  and  he  was 
carried  out  of  the  camp  without  the  knowledge 
of  any  of  those  who  were  with  him,  and  they, 
"jJiJssing  their  leader,  fell  presently  into  a  great 
consternation,  and  ran  to  and  fro  in  the  gloom 
crying,  "  The  Prince  ?  Have  you  seen  the 
Prince?  Is  His  Highness  with  you?  In  God's 
name,  has  the  Prince  been  this  way  ?  "  But  the}'- 
did  not  find  him,  and  they  grew  more  con- 
founded, stumbling  against  one  another  and 
being  much  afraid.  And  when  the  Prince  was 
nowhere  to  be  found,  they  lost  heart,  and  be- 
gan to  fall  back  towards  their  own  borders, 
skirting  the  base  of  Agnino.  And  their  re- 
treat grew  quicker ;  and  at  last,  when  morn- 
ing came,  they  were  near  the  border ;  but  the 
fog    still    wrapped   all    the    plain    in    obscurity, 


I06     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

and,  robbed  of  their  leader,  they  dared  attempt 
nothing. 

Now  the  Prince  of  Mantivoglia,  whom  his 
army  sought  thus  in  fear  and  bewilderment,  was 
carried  very  quickly  up  to  the  high  ground, 
where  the  rocks  grew  steep  and  close  and  the 
way  led  to  the  peak  of  Agnino.  And  as  he  was 
borne  along,  some  one  bound  his  hands  and  his 
feet;  and  still  he  was  carried  up,  till  at  last  he 
found  himself  laid  down  gently  on  the  ground. 
And  though  he  knew  no  fear — for  they  of 
Mantivoglia  have  ever  been  most  valiant  Princes 
and  strangers  to  all  fear — yet  he  thought  that  his 
last  hour  was  come,  and,  fearing  God  though  he 
feared  nothing  else,  he  said  a  prayer  and  com- 
mended his  soul  to  the  Almighty,  grieving  that 
he  should  not  receive  the  last  services  of  the 
Church.  And  having  done  this,  he  lay  still  until 
the  dawning  day  smote  on  his  eyes  and  he  could 
see ;  for  the  fog  that  lay  dense  on  the  plain  was 
not  in  the  hills,  but  hung  between  them  and  the 
plain.  And  he  looked  round,  but  saw  no  man. 
So  he  abode  another  hour,  and  then  he  heard  a 
step  behind  him,  and  a  man  came,  but  whence  he 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   PRINCE. 


107 


could  not  see ;  and  the  man  stooped  and  loosed 
the  scarf  from  his  mouth  and  cut  his  bonds,  and 
he  sat  up,  uttering  a  cry  of  wonder.  For  Count 
Antonio  stood  before  him,  his  sword  sheathed  by 
his  side.  And  he  said  to  the  Prince  of  Manti- 
voglia,  "  Do  to  me  what  you  will,  my  lord.  If 
you  will  strike  me  as  I  stand,  strike.  Or  if  you 
will  do  me  the  honour  to  cross  swords,  my  sword 
is  ready.  Or^  my  lord,  if  you  will  depart  in 
peace  and  in  my  great  love  and  reverence,  I  will 
gfve  thanks  to  Heaven  and  to  a  noble  Prince." 

"Antonio,  what  does  this  mean?"  cried  the 
Prince,  divided  between  anger  and  wonder. 

Then  Antonio  told  him  all  that  he  had  done: 
how  the  Duke  was  gone  back  with  his  army  to 
Firmola,  and  how  the  Prince's  army  had  re- 
treated towards  the  borders  of  Mantivoglia ;  for 
of  all  this  his  men  had  informed  him  ;  and  he 
ended,  saying,  "  For  since  it  seemed  that  I  was 
to  be  the  most  unworthy  cause  of  more  fighting 
between  two  great  Princes,  it  came  into  my  head 
that  such  a  thing  should  not  be.  And  I  rejoice 
that  now  it  will  not ;  for  the  townsmen  will  not 
march   out   again   this   year   at   least,  and   Your 


I08      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Highness  will  scarce  sit  down  before  Firmola 
with  the  season  now  far  gone." 

"  So  I  am  baulked?"  cried  the  Prince,  and  he 
rose  to  his  feet.  "  And  this  trick  is  played  me 
by  a  friend  !  " 

"  I  am  of  Firmola,"  said  Antonio,  flushing  red. 
"  And  while  there  was  war,  I  might  in  all  honour 
have  played  another  trick,  and  carried  you  not 
hither,  but  to  Firmola." 

"  I  care  not,"  cried  the  Prince  angrily.  *'  It 
was  a  trick,  and  no  fair  fighting." 

"  Be  it  as  3^ou  will,  my  lord,"  said  Antonio. 
"  A  man's  own  conscience  is  his  only  judge.  Will 
you  draw  your  sword,  my  lord  ?  " 

But  the  Prince  was  very  angry,  and  he  an- 
swered roughly,  "  I  will  not  fight  with  you,  and 
I  will  not  speak  more  with  you.     I  will  go." 

'•  I  wall  lead  Your  Highness  to  your  horse," 
said  Antonio. 

Then  he  led  him  some  hundreds  of  paces 
down  the  hill,  and  they  came  where  a  fine  horse 
stood  ready  saddled. 

"  It  is  not  my  horse,"  said  the  Prince. 

"  Be   not   afraid,   my   lord,      It   is   not   minCp 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  109 

either,"  said  Antonio  smiling.  "  A  rogue  who 
serves  me,  and  is  called  Bena,  forgot  his  manners 
so  far  as  to  steal  it  from  the  quarters  of  the  Duke. 
I  pray  you  use  some  opportunity  of  sending  it 
back  to  him,  or  I  shall  be  dubbed  horse-stealer 
with  the  rest." 

"  I  am  glad  it  is  not  yours,"  said  the  Prince, 
and  he  prepared  to  mount,  Antonio  holding  the 
stirrup  for  him.  And  when  he  was  mounted, 
,  Antonio  told  him  how  to  ride,  so  that  he  should 
.  Gome  safely  to  his  own  men,  and  avoid  certain 
scouting  parties  of  the  Duke  that  he  had  thrown 
out  behind  him  as  he  marched  back  to  Firmola. 
And  having  done  this,  Antonio  stood  back  and 
bared  his  head  and  bowed. 

"  And  where  is  your  horse  ? "  asked  the 
Prince  suddenly. 

"  I  have  no  horse,  my  lord,"  said  Antonio. 
"  My  men  with  all  my  horses  have  ridden  back 
to  our  hiding-place  in  the  hills.  I  am  alone  here, 
for  I  thought  that  Your  Highness  would  kill  me, 
and  I  should  need  no  horse." 

"  How,  then,  will  you  escape  the  scouting 
parties  ?  " 


no     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  I  fear  I  shall  not  escape  them,  my  lord," 
said  Antonio,  smiling  again. 

"  And  if  they  take  you  ?  " 

"  Of  a  surety  I  shall  be  hanged,"  said  Count 
Antonio. 

The  Prince  of  Mantivoglia  gathered  his  brow 
into  a  heavy  frown,  but  the  corners  of  his  lips 
twitched,  and  he  did  not  look  at  Antonio.  And 
thus  they  rested  a  few  moments,  till  suddenly  the 
Prince,  unable  to  hold  himself  longer,  burst  into 
a  great  and  merry  peal  of  laughter;  and  he 
raised  his  fist  and  shook  it  at  Antonio,  crying, 
"  A  scurvy  trick,  Antonio !  By  my  faith,  a  scur- 
vier trick  by  far  than  that  other  of  yours !  Art 
thou  not  ashamed,  man  ?  Ah,  you  cast  down 
your  eyes !     You  dare  not  look  at  me,  Antonio." 

"  Indeed  I  have  naught  to  say  for  this  last 
trick,  my  lord,"  said  Antonio,  laughing  also. 

"  Indeed  I  must  carry  this  knave  with  me ! " 
cried  the  Prince.  "  Faugh,  the  traitor !  Get  up 
behind  me,  traitor !  Clasp  me  by  the  waist, 
knave !  Closer,  knave !  Ah,  Antonio,  I  know 
not  in  what  mood  Heaven  was  when  you  were 
made !     I  would  I  had  the  heart  to  leave  you  to 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  m 

your  hanging!  For  what  a  story  will  my  Prin- 
cess make  of  this !  I  shall  be  the  best-derided 
man  in  all  Mantivoglia." 

"  I  think  not,  my  dear  lord,"  said  Count  An- 
tonio, "  unless  a  love  that  a  man  may  reckon  on 
as  his  lady-love's  and  a  chivalry  that  does  not 
fail,  and  a  valour  that  has  set  two  armies  all 
agape  in  wonder,  be  your  matters  for  mirth  in 
Mantivoglia.  'And  indeed,  my  lord,  I  would  that 
I  were  riding  to  the  lady  I  love  best  in  the 
'vTprld,  as  Your  Highness  rides;  for  she  might 
laugh  till  her  sweet  eyes  ran  tears  so  I  were  near 
to  dry  them." 

The  Prince  put  back  his  hand  towards  An- 
tonio and  clasped  Antonio's  hand,  and  said, 
"What  said  she  w^hen  you  left  her,  Antonio? 
For  with  women  love  is  often  more  than  honour, 
and  their  tears  rust  the  bright  edge  of  a  man's 
conscience." 

"  Her  heart  is  even  as  Our  Lady's,  and  with 
tears  and  smiles  she  left  me,"  said  Antonio,  and 
he  grasped  the  Prince's  hand.  "  Come,  my  lord, 
we  must  ride,  or  it  is  a  prison  for  you  and  a  hal- 
ter for  me." 


112      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

So  they  rode  together  in  the  morning  on  the 
horse  that  Bena  had  stolen  from  among  the 
choicest  of  Duke  Valentine's,  and,  keeping  cun- 
ningly among  the  spurs  of  the  hills,  they  were 
sighted  once  only  from  afar  off  by  the  Duke's 
scouts,  and  escaped  at  a  canter,  and  came  safe  to 
the  Prince's  army,  where  they  were  received 
with  great  wonder  and  joy.  But  the  Prince 
would  not  turn  again  to  besiege  Firmola,  for  he 
had  had  a  fill  of  fighting,  and  the  season  grew 
late  for  the  siege  of  a  walled  town.  So  he  re- 
turned with  all  his  force  to  Mantivoglia,  having 
won  by  his  expedition  much  praise  of  valour,  and 
nothing  else  in  the  wide  world  besides ;  which 
thing  indeed  is  so  common  in  the  wars  of  princes 
that  even  wise  men  have  well-nigh  ceased  to  won- 
der at  it. 

But  the  Princess  of  Mantivoglia  heard  all  that 
had  passed  with  great  mirth,  and  made  many 
jests  upon  her  husband ;  and  again,  lest  the 
Prince  should  take  her  jesting  in  evil  part,  more 
upon  Duke  Valentine.  But  concerning  Count 
Antonio  and  the  Lady  Lucia  she  did  not  jest. 
Yet  one  day,  chancing   to  be  alone  with  Count 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE. 


113 


Antonio — for  he  stayed  many  days  at  the  Court 
of  Mantivoglia,  and  was  treated  with  great  hon- 
our— she  said  to  him,  with  a  smile  and  half-raised 
eyelids,  "  Had  I  been  a  man,  my  lord  Antonio,  I 
would  not  have  returned  alone  from  the  gates  of 
Firmola.  In  truth,  your  lady  needs  patience  for 
her  virtue,  Count  Antonio  !  " 

"  I  trust,  then,  that  Heaven  sends  it  to  her, 
madame,"  said^fVntonio. 

"  And  to  you  also,"  she  retorted  with  a  laugh. 
,".Aijd  to  her  trust  in  you  also,  I  pray.  For  an 
absent  lover  is  often  an  absent  heart,  Antonio, 
and  I  hear  that  many  ladies  would  fain  soften 
your  exile.  And  what  I  hear,  the  Lady  Lucia 
may  hear  also." 

"  She  would  hear  it  as  the  idle  babbling 
of  water  over  stunes,"  said  Antonio,  "  But, 
madame,  I  am  glad  that  I  have  some  hon- 
esty in  me.  For  if  there  were  not  honest 
men  and  true  maids  in  this  world,  I  think  more 
than  a  half  of  the  wits  would  starve  for  lack  of 
food." 

"  Mercy,  mercy  !  "  she  cried.  "  Indeed  your 
wit  has  a  keen  edge,  my  lord." 


114      '^^^^   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Yet  it  is  not  whetted  on  truth  and  honesty," 
said  he. 

She  answered  nothing  for  a  moment;  then 
she  drew  near  to  him  and  stood  before  him, 
regarding  his  face  ;  and  she  sighed  "  Heigh-ho  !  " 
and  again  "  Heigh-ho !  "  and  dropped  her  eyes, 
and  raised  them  again  to  his  face  ;  and  at  last 
she  said,  "  To  some  faithfulness  is  easy.  I  give 
no  great  praise  to  the  Lady  Lucia."  And  when 
she  had  said  this  she  turned  and  left  him,  and 
was  but  little  more  in  his  company  so  long  as 
he  stayed  at  Mantivoglia.  And  she  spoke  no 
more  of  the  Lady  Lucia.  But  when  he  was 
mounting,  after  bidding  her  farewell,  she  gave 
him  a  white  rose  from  her  bosom,  saying  care- 
lessly, "  Your  colour,  my  lord,  and  the  best. 
Yet  God  made  the  other  roses  also." 

"  All  that  He  made  He  loves,  and  in  all  there 
is  good,"  said  Antonio,  and  he  bowed  very  low, 
and,  having  kissed  her  hand,  took  the  rose ; 
and  he  looked  into  her  eyes  and  smiled,  saying, 
"  Heaven  give  peace  where  it  has  given  wit  and 
beauty ;  "  and  so  he  rode  away  to  join  his  com- 
pany in  the  hills.     And  the  Princess  of  Manti- 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   PRINCE.  115 

vog-lia,  having  watched  till  he  was  out  of  sight, 
went  into  dinner,  and  was  merrier  than  ever 
she  had  shown  herself  before  ;  so  that  they  said, 
"  She  feared  Antonio  and  is  glad  that  he  is 
gone."  Yet  that  night,  while  her  husband  slept, 
she  wept. 


•%. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   WIZARD'S   DRUG. 

The  opinion  of  man  is  ever  in  flux  save  where 
it  is  founded  on  the  rock  of  true  religion.  What 
our  fathers  believed,  we  disbelieve ;  but  often 
our  sons  shall  again  receive  it.  In  olden  time 
men  held  much  by  magic  and  black  arts ;  now 
such  are  less  esteemed ;  yet  hereafter  it  may 
well  be  that  the  world  will  find  new  incantations 
and  fresh  spells,  the  same  impulse  flowing  in  a 
different  channel  and  never  utterly  to  be  checked 
or  stemmed  by  the  censures  of  the  Church  or  the 
mocking  of  unbelievers.  As  for  truth — in  truth 
who  knows  truth  ?  For  the  light  of  Revelation 
shines  but  in  few  places,  and  for  the  rest  we  are 
in  natural  darkness,  groping  along  unseen  paths 
towards  unknown  ends.  May  God  keep  our 
footsteps ! 

ii6 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    117 

Now  towards  the  close  of  the  third  year  of 
his  outlawry  the  heart  of  Count  Antonio  of 
Monte  Velluto  had  grown  very  sad.  For  it  was 
above  the  space  of  a  year  since  he  had  heard 
news  of  the  Lady  Lucia,  and  hard  upon  two 
since  he  had  seen  her  face ;  so  closely  did 
Duke  Valentine  hold  her  prisoner  in  Firmola. 
And  as  he  walked  to  and  fro  among  his  men 
in  their  hiding  place  in  the  hills,  his  face  was 
sorrowful.  Yet,  coming  where  Tommasino  and 
^ena  sat  together,  he  stopped  and  listened  to 
their  talk  with  a  smile.  For  Bena  cried  to 
Tommasino,  "  By  the  saints,  my  lord,  it  is  even 
so!  My  father  himself  had  a  philtre  from  him 
thirty  years  ago ;  and  though,  before,  my  mother 
had  loathed  to  look  on  my  father,  yet  now  here 
am  I,  nine-and-twenty  years  of  age  and  a  child 
born  in  holy  wedlock.  Never  tell  me  that  it  is 
foolishness,  my  lord  !  " 

"Of  whom  do  you  speak,  Bena?"  asked 
Antonio. 

"  Of  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta,  my  lord.  Aye, 
and  he  can  do  more  than  make  a  love-potion. 
He  can  show  you  all   that   shall   come   to   you 


Il8      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

in  a  mirror,  and  make  the  girl  you  love  rise 
before  your  eyes  as  though  the  shape  were 
good  flesh  and  blood." 

"  All  this  is  foolishness,  Bena,"  said  Count 
Antonio. 

"  Well,  God  knows  that,"  said  Bena.  "  But 
he  did  it  for  my  father;  and  as  he  is  thirty 
years  older,  he  will  be  wiser  still  by  now ; " 
and  Bena  strode  off  to  tend  his  horse,  somewhat 
angry  that  Antonio  paid  so  little  heed  to  his 
words. 

"  It  is  all  foolishness,  Tommasino,"  said  An- 
tonio. 

"  They  say  that  of  many  a  thing  which  gives 
a  man  pleasure,"  said  Tommasino. 

"  I  have  heard  of  this  man  before,"  continued 
the  Count,  "  and  marvellous  stories  are  told  of 
him.  Now  I  leave  what  shall  come  to  me  in  the 
hands  of  Heaven ;  for  to  know  is  not  to  alter,  and 
knowledge  without  power  is  but  fretting  of  the 
heart;  but "     And  Antonio  broke  off. 

"  Ride  then,  if  you  can  safely,  and  beg  him  to 
show  you  Lucia's  face,"  said  Tommasino.  "  For 
to  that  I  think  you  are  making." 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG,    ng 

"  In  truth  I  was,  fool  that  I  am,"  said  An- 
tonio. 

"  But  be  wary ;  for  Baratesta  is  but  ten  miles 
from  the  city,  and  His  Highness  sleeps  with  an 
open  eye." 

So  Antonio,  albeit  that  he  was  in  part 
ashamed,  learnt  from  Bena  where  the  wizard 
dwelt  on  the  bridge  that  is  outside  the  gate  of 
Baratesta — for  the  Syndic  would  not  suffer  such 
folk  to  live  inside  the  wall — and  one  evening  he 
s'a^dled  his  horse  and  rode  alone  to  seek  the 
wizard,  leaving  Tommasino  in  charge  of  the 
band.  And  as  he  went,  he  pondered,  saying,  "  I 
am  a  fool,  yet  I  would  see  her  face ;  "  and  thus, 
still  dubbing  himself  fool,  yet  still  persisting,  he 
came  to  the  bridge  of  Baratesta ;  and  the  wizard, 
w^ho  Vvas  a  very  old  man  and  tall  and  marvellous- 
ly lean,  met  him  at  the  door  of  the  house,  crying, 
"  I  looked  for  your  coming,  my  lord."  And  he 
took  Antonio's  horse  from  him  and  stood  it  in  a 
stable  beside  the  house,  and  led  Antonio  in,  say- 
ing again,  "  Your  coming  was  known  to  me,  my 
lord  ;  "  and  he  brought  Antonio  to  a  chamber  at 
the  back  of  the  house,  having  one  window,  past 


I20     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

which  the  river,  being  then  in  flood,  rushed  with 
noise  and  fury.  There  were  many  strange  things 
in  the  chamber,  skulls  and  the  forms  of  animals 
from  far-off  countries,  great  jars,  basins,  and  re- 
torts, and  in  one  corner  a  mirror  half-draped  in 
a  black  cloth. 

"You  know  who  I  am?"  asked  Antonio. 

"  That  needs  no  art,"  answered  the  wizard, 
"and  I  pretend  to  none  in  it.  Your  face,  my 
lord,  was  known  to  me  as  to  any  other  man,  from 
seeing  you  ride  with  the  Duke  before  your  ban- 
ishment." 

''And  you  knew  that  I  rode  hither  to-night?" 

"  Aye,"  said  the  wizard.  "  For  the  stars  told 
of  the  coming  of  some  great  man ;  and  I  turned 
from  my  toil  and  watched  for  you." 

"  What  toil  ?  "  asked  Antonio.  "  See,  here  is 
money,  and  I  have  a  quiet  tongue.     What  toil?" 

The  wizard  pointed  to  a  heap  of  broken  and 
bent  pieces  of  base  metal.  "  I  was  turning  dross 
to  gold,"  said  he,  in  a  fearful  whisper. 

"  Can  you  do  that?"  asked  Antonio,  smiling. 

"  I  can,  my  lord,  though  but  slowly." 

"  And  hate  to  love  ?  "  asked  Count  Antonio. 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    121 

The  wizard  laughed  harshly.  "  Let  them  that 
prize  love,  seek  that,"  said  he.  "  It  is  not  for 
me." 

"  I  would  it  had  been ;  then  had  my  errand 
here  been  a  better  one.  For  I  am  come  to  see 
the  semblance  of  a  maiden's  face." 

The  wizard  frowned  as  he  said,  "  I  had  looked 
for  a  greater  matter.  For  you  have  a  mighty 
enemy,  my  lord,  and  I  have  means  of  power 
for  freeing  men  of  their  enemies." 
"■"  But  Count  Antonio,  knowing  that  he  spoke  of 
some  dark  device  of  spell  or  poison,  answered, 
"  Enough  !  enough  !  For  I  am  a  man  of  quick 
temper,  and  it  is  not  well  to  tell  me  of  wicked 
things,  lest  I  be  tempted  to  anticipate  Heaven's 
punishment." 

"  I  shall  not  die  at  your  hands,  my  lord,"  said 
the  wizard.  "  Come,  will  you  see  what  shall  be- 
fall you?" 

"  Nay,  I  would  but  see  my  lady's  face ;  a  great 
yearning  for  that  has  come  over  me,  and,  al- 
though I  take  shame  in  it,  yet  it  has  brought  me 
here." 

"  You  shall  see  it  then ;  and  if  you  see  more, 
9 


122      TPIE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

it  is  not  by  my  will,"  said  the  wizard ;  and  he 
quenched  the  lamp  that  burned  on  the  table, 
and  flung  a  handful  of  some  powder  on  the 
charcoal  in  the  stove ;  and  the  room  was  filled 
with  a  thick  sweet-smelling  vapour.  And  the 
wizard  tore  the  black  cloth  off  the  face  of  the 
mirror  and  bade  Antonio  look  steadily  in  the 
mirror.  Antonio  looked  till  the  vapour  that  en- 
veloped all  the  room  cleared  off  from  the  face  of 
the  mirror,  and  the  wizard,  laying  his  hand  on 
Antonio's  shoulder,  said,  "  Cry  her  name  thrice." 
And  Antonio  thrice  cried  "  Lucia  ! "  and  again 
waited.  Then  something  came  on  the  polished 
surface  of  the  mirror  ;  but  the  wizard  muttered 
low  and  angrily,  for  it  was  not  the  form  of 
Lucia  nor  of  any  maiden  ;  yet  presently  he  cried 
low,  "  Look,  my  lord,  look  ! "  and  Antonio,  look- 
ing, saw  a  dim,  and  shadowy  face  in  the  mirror; 
and  the  wizard  began  to  fling  his  body  to  and 
fro,  uttering  strange  whispered  words;  and  the 
sweat  stood  in  beads  on  his  forehead.  "  Now, 
now ! "  he  cried ;  and  Antonio,  with  beating 
heart,  fastened  his  gaze  on  the  mirror.  And  as 
the  story  goes  (I  vouch  not  for  it)  he  saw,  though 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    123 

very  dimly,  the  face  of  Lucia ;  but  more  he  saw 
also  ;  for  beside  the  face  was  his  own  face,  and 
there  was  a  rope  about  his  neck,  and  the  half- 
shaped  arm  of  a  gibbet  seemed  to  hover  above 
him.     And  he  shrank  back  for  an  instant. 

"  What  more  you  see  is  not  by  my  will,"  said 
the  wizard. 

*'  What    shall    come    is    only  by  God's  will," 
said    Antonio."'  *'  I    have   seen    her    face.      It    is 
•enough." 

-  "i.But  the  wizard  clutched  him  by  the  arm, 
whispering  in  terror,  "  It  is  a  gibbet ;  and  the 
rope  is  about  your  neck." 

''  Indeed,  I  seem  to  have  worn  it  there  these 
three  years,  and  it  is  not  drawn  tight  yet ;  nor 
is  it  drawn  in  the  mirror." 

"  You  have  a  good  courage,"  said  the  wizard 
with  a  grim  smile.  "  I  will  show  you  more ;  " 
and  he  flung  another  powder  on  the  charcoal ; 
and  the  shapes  passed  from  the  mirror.  But 
another  came  ;  and  the  wizard,  with  a  great  cry, 
fell  suddenly  on  his  knees,  exclaiming,  "  They 
mock  me,  they  mock  me !  They  show  what 
they  will,  not  what  I  will.     Ah,  my  lord,  whose 


124 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


is  the  face  in  the  mirror?"  And  he  seized  An- 
tonio again  by  the  arm. 

"  It  is  your  face,"  said  Antonio  ;  "  and  it  is  the 
face  of  a  dead  man,  for  his  jaw  has  dropped, 
and  his  features  are  drawn  and  wrung." 

The  wizard  buried  his  face  in  his  hands;  and 
so  they  rested  awhile  till  the  glass  of  the  mirror 
cleared ;  and  Antonio  felt  the  body  of  the  wiz- 
ard shaking  against  his  knee. 

"  You  are  old,"  said  Antonio,  "  and  death 
must  come  to  all.  Maybe  it  is  a  lie  of  the  devil ; 
but  if  not,  face  it  as  a  man  should." 

But  the  wizard  trembled  still ;  and  Antonio, 
casting  a  pitiful  glance  on  him,  rose  to  depart. 
But  on  the  instant  as  he  moved,  there  came  a 
sudden  loud  knocking  at  the  door  of  the  house, 
and  he  stood  still.  The  wizard  lifted  his  head 
to  listen. 

"  Have  you  had  warning  of  more  visitors  to- 
night?" asked  Antonio. 

"  I  know  not  what  happens  to-night,"  mut- 
tered the  wizard.    "  My  power  is  gone  to-night." 

The  knocking  at  the  door  came  again,  loud 
and  impatient. 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE  WIZARD'S  DRUG.    125 

"They  will  beat  the  door  down  if  you  do  not 
open,"  said  Antonio.  "  I  will  hide  myself  here 
behind  the  mirror ;  for  I  cannot  pass  them  with- 
out being-  seen  ;  and  if  I  am  seen  here,  it  is  like 
enough  that  the  mirror  will  be  proved  right 
both  for  you  and  me." 

So  Antonio  hid  himself,  crouching  down  be- 
hind the  mirror ;  and  the  wizard,  having  lit  a 
small  dim  lamp,  went  on  trembling  feet  to  the 
door.  And  presently  he  came  back,  followed  by 
two  men  whose  faces  were  hid  in  their  cloaks. 
One  of  them  sat  down,  but  the  other  stood  and 
flung  his  cloak  back  over  his  shoulders  ;  and  An- 
tonio, observing  him  from  behind  the  mirror, 
saw  that  he  was  Lorenzo,  the  Duke's  favourite. 

Then  Lorenzo  spoke  to  the  wizard  saying, 
"  Why  did  you  not  come  sooner  to  open  the 
door?" 

"  There  was  one  here  with  me,"  said  the 
wizard,  whose  air  had  become  again  composed. 

"  And  is  he  gone  ?     For  we  would  be  alone." 

"  He  is  not  to  be  seen,"  answered  the  wizard. 
"  Utterly  alone  here  you  cannot  be." 

When  he  heard  this,  Lorenzo  turned  pale,  for 


126     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

he  did  not  love  this  midnight  errand  to  the  wiz- 
ard's chamber. 

"  But  no  man  is  here,"  said  the  wizard. 

A  low  hoarse  laugh  came  from  the  man  who 
sat.  "  Tricks  of  the  trade,  tricks  of  the  trade ! " 
said  he ;  and  Antonio  started  to  hear  his  voice. 
"  Be  sure  that  where  a  prince,  a  courtier,  and  a 
cheat  are  together,  the  devil  makes  a  fourth. 
But  there  is  no  need  to  turn  pale  over  it,  Lo- 
renzo." 

When  the  wizard  heard,  he  fell  on  his  knees ; 
for  he  knew  that  it  was  Duke  Valentine  who 
spoke. 

"  Look  you,  fellow,"  pursued  His  Highness, 
"you  owe  me  much  thanks  that  you  are  not 
hanged  already  ;  for  by  putting  an  end  to  you 
I  should  please  my  clergy  much  and  the  Syn- 
dic of  Baratesta  not  a  little.  But  if  you  do  not 
obey  me  to-night,  you  shall  be  dead  before 
morning." 

"  I  shall  not  die  unless  it  be  written  in  the 
stars,"  said  the  wizard,  but  his  voice  trembled. 

"  I  know  nothing  of  the  stars,"  said  the  Duke, 
"but  I  know  the  mind  of  the  Duke  of  Firmola, 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   WIZARD'S   DRUG.    127 

and  that  is  enough  for  my  purpose."  And  he 
rose  and  began  to  walk  about  the  chamber,  ex- 
amining the  strange  objects  that  were  there ; 
and  thus  he  came  in  front  of  the  mirror,  and 
stood  within  half  a  yard  of  Antonio.  But 
Lorenzo  stood  where  he  was,  and  once  he 
crossed  himself  secretly  and  unobserved. 

"  What  would  my  lord  the  Duke  ?  "  asked  the 
wizard. 

"  There  is  a  certain  drug,"  said  the  Duke, 
*^rning  round  towards  the  wizard,  "  which  if  a 
man  drink — or  a  woman,  Lorenzo — he  can  walk 
on  his  legs  and  use  his  arms,  and  seem  to  be 
waking  and  in  his  right  mind ;  yet  is  his  mind 
a  nothing,  for  he  knows  not  what  he  does,  but 
does  everything  that  one,  being  with  him,  may 
command,  and  without  seeming  reluctance ;  and 
again,  when  bidden,  he  will  seem  to  lose  all 
power  of  movement,  and  to  lack  his  senses.  I 
saw  the  thing  once  when  I  sojourned  with  the 
Lord  of  Florence ;  for  a  wizard  there,  having 
given  the  drug  to  a  certain  man,  put  him 
through  strange  antics,  and  he  performed  them 
all  willingly." 


128     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Aye,  there  is  such  a  drug,"  said  the  wizard. 

"Then  give  it  me,"  said  the  Duke;  "and  I 
give  you  your  life  and  fifty  pieces  of  gold. 
For  I  have  great  need  of  it." 

Now  when  Antonio  heard  the  Duke's  words, 
he  was  seized  with  great  fear;  for  he  surmised 
that  it  was  against  Lucia  that  the  Duke  meant 
to  use  this  drug ;  and  noiselessly  he  loosened 
his  sword  in  its  sheath  and  bent  forward  again 
to  listen. 

"  And  though  my  purpose  is  nothing  to  you, 
yet  it  is  a  benevolent  purpose.  Is  it  not,  Lo- 
renzo?" 

"  It  is  your  will,  not  mine,  my  lord,"  said 
Lorenzo  in  a  troubled  voice. 

"  Mine  shall  be  the  crime,  then,  and  yours 
the  reward,"  laughed  the  Duke.  "  For  I  will 
give  her  the  drug,  and  she  shall  wed  you." 

Then  Antonio  doubted  no  longer  of  what  was 
afoot,  nor  that  a  plot  was  laid  whereby  Lucia 
should  be  entrapped  into  marriage  with  Lorenzo, 
since  she  could  not  be  openly  forced.  And  anger 
burned  hotly  in  him.  And  he  swore  that,  sooner 
than  suffer  the  thing  to  be  done,  he  would  kill 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    129 

the  Duke  there  with  his  own  hand  or  himself 
be  slain. 

"  And  you  alone  know  of  this  drug  now,  they 
say,"  the  Duke  went  on.  "  For  the  wizard  of 
Florence  is  dead.     Therefore  give  it  me  quickly." 

But  the  wizard  answered,  "  It  will  not  serve, 
my  lord,  that  I  give  you  the  drug.  With  my 
own  hand  I  must  give  it  to  the  persons  whom 
you  would  thus  affect,  and  I  must  tell  them  what 
j:hey  should  do." 

,  -i**,More  tricks  !  "  said  the  Duke  scornfully.  "  I 
know  your  ways.  Give  me  the  drug."  And  he 
would  not  believe  what  the  wizard  said. 

"  It  is  even  as  I  say,"  said  the  wizard.  "  And 
if  Your  Highness  will  carry  the  drug  yourself, 
I  will  not  vouch  its  operation." 

"Give  it  me;  for  I  know  the  appearance  of 
it,"  said  the  Duke. 

Then  the  wizard,  having  again  protested,  went 
to  a  certain  shelf  and  from  some  hidden  recess 
took  a  small  phial,  and  came  with  it  to  the 
Duke,  saying,  "  Blame  me  not,  if  its  operation 
fail." 

The  Duke    examined    the   phial   closely,  and 


I30 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


also  smelt  its  smell.  "  It  is  the  same,"  said  he. 
"  It  will  do  its  work." 

Then  Count  Antonio,  who  believed  no  more 
than  the  Duke  what  the  wizard  had  said  concern- 
ing the  need  of  his  own  presence  for  the  working 
of  the  drug,  was  very  sorely  put  to  it  to  stay 
quietly  where  he  was ;  for  if  the  Duke  rode  away 
now  with  the  phial,  he  might  well  find  means  to 
give  it  to  the  Lady  Lucia  before  any  warning 
could  be  conveyed  to  her.  And,  although  the 
danger  was  great,  yet  his  love  for  Lucia  and  his 
fear  for  her  overcame  his  prudence,  and  sud- 
denly he  sprang  from  behind  the  mirror,  draw- 
ing his  sword  and  crying,  "  Give  me  that  drug, 
my  lord,  or  your  life  must  answer  for  it." 

But  fortune  served  him  ill;  for  as  the  Duke 
and  Lorenzo  shrank  back  at  his  sudden  appear- 
ance, and  he  was  about  to  spring  on  them,  be- 
hold, his  foot  caught  in  the  folds  of  the  black 
cloth  that  had  been  over  the  mirror  and  now  lay 
on  the  ground,  and,  falling  forward,  he  struck  his 
head  on  the  marble  rim  that  ran  round  the  char- 
coal stove,  and,  having  fallen  with  great  force, 
lay  there  like  a  man  dead.     With  loud  cries  of 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    131 

triumph,  the  Duke  and  Lorenzo,  having  drawn 
their  swords,  ran  upon  him  ;  and  the  Duke  plant- 
ed his  foot  upon  his  neck,  crying-,  "  Heaven  sends 
a  greater  prize  !  At  last,  at  last  I  have  him  ! 
Bind  his  hands,  Lorenzo." 

Lorenzo  bound  Antonio  s  hands  as  he  lay- 
there,  a  log  for  stillness.  The  Duke  turned  to 
the  wizard  and  a  smile  bent  his  lips.  "  O  faithful 
subject  and  servant !  "  said  he.  "  Well  do  you 
requite  my  mercy  and  forbearance,  by  harbour- 
itfg  my  bitterest  enemies  and  suffering  them  to 
hear  my  secret  counsels.  Had  not  Antonio 
chanced  to  trip,  it  is  like  enough  he  would  have 
slain  Lorenzo  and  me  also.  What  shall  be  your 
reward,  O  faithful  servant?" 

When  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta  beheld  the 
look  that  was  on  Duke  Valentine's  face,  he  sud- 
denly cried  aloud,  "The  mirror,  the  mirror!" 
and  sank  in  a  heap  on  the  floor,  trembling  in 
every  limb ;  for  he  remembered  the  aspect  of  his 
own  face  in  the  mirror  and  knew  that  the  hour  of 
his  death  had  come.  And  he  feared  mightily  to 
die ;  therefore  he  besought  the  Duke  very  pite- 
ously,  and  told   him   again   that  from    his    hand 


132     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

alone  could  the  drug  receive  its  potency.  And 
so  earnest  was  he  in  this,  that  at  last  he  half-won 
upon  the  Duke,  so  that  the  Duke  wavered. 
And  as  he  doubted,  his  eye  fell  on  Antonio ; 
and  he  perceived  that  Antonio  was  recovering 
from  his  swoon. 

"  There  is  enough  for  two,"  said  he,  "  in  the 
phial ;  and  we  will  put  this  thing  to  the  test. 
But  if  you  speak  or  move  or  make  any  sign, 
forthwith  in  that  moment  you  shall  die."  Then 
the  Duke  poured  half  the  contents  of  the  phial 
into  a  glass  and  came  to  Lorenzo  and  whis- 
pered to  him,  "  If  the  drug  works  on  him,  and 
the  wizard  is  proved  to  lie,  the  wizard  shall 
die  ;  but  we  will  carry  Antonio  with  us ;  and 
when  I  have  mustered  my  Guard,  I  will  hang 
him  in  the  square  as  I  have  sworn.  But  if  the 
drug  does  not  work,  then  we  must  kill  him 
here  ;  for  I  fear  to  carry  him  against  his  will ; 
for  he  is  a  wonderful  man,  full  of  resource,  and 
the  people  also  love  him.  Therefore,  if  the 
operation  of  the  drug  fail,  run  him  through  with 
your  sword  when  I  give  the  signal." 

Now  Antonio  was  recovering  from  his  swoon, 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    133 

and  he  overheard  part  of  what  the  Duke  said, 
but  not  all.  As  to  the  death  of  the  wizard  he 
did  not  hear,  but  he  understood  that  the  Duke 
was  about  to  test  the  effect  of  the  drug  on  him, 
and  that  if  it  had  no  effect,  he  was  to  die  ;  where- 
as, if  its  operation  proved  sufficient,  he  should  go 
alive;  and  he  saw  here  a  chance  for  his  life  in 
case  what  the  wizard  had  said  should  prove  true. 

"  Drink,  Antonio,"  said  the  Duke  softly.  "  No 
harm  comes  to  you.  Drink:  it  is  a  refreshing 
'&Trdught:' 

And  Antonio  drank  the  draught,  the  wizard 
looking  on  with  parted  lips  and  with  great 
drops  of  sweat  running  from  his  forehead  and 
thence  down  his  cheeks  to  his  mouth,  so  that 
his  lips  were  salt  when  he  licked  them.  And 
the  Duke,  having  seen  that  Lorenzo  had  his 
sword  ready  for  Antonio,  took  his  stand  by  the 
wizard  with  the  dagger  from  his  belt  in  his  hand. 
And  he  cried  to  Antonio,  "  Rise."  And  Antonio 
rose  up.  The  wizard  started  a  step  towards 
him;  but  the  Duke  showed  his  dagger,  and 
said  to  Antonio,  "  Will  you  go  with  me  to  Fir- 
mola,  Antonio?" 


134      THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

And  Antonio  answered,  "  I  will  go." 

"  Do  you  love  me,  Antonio?"  asked  the  Duke. 

"Aye,  my  lord,"  answered  Antonio. 

"  Yet  you  have  done  man}'-  wicked  things 
against  me." 

"  True,  my  lord,"  said  Antonio. 

"  Is  your  mind  then  changed  ?  " 

"  It  is,  my  lord,"  said  Antonio. 

"  Then  leap  two  paces  into  the  air,"  said  the 
Duke  ;  and  Antonio  straightway  obeyed. 

"  Go  down  on  your  knees  and  crawl ; "  and 
Antonio  crawled,  smiling  secretly  to  himself. 

Then  the  Duke  bade  Lorenzo  mount  Antonio 
on  his  horse ;  and  he  commanded  the  wizard  to 
follow  him ;  and  they  all  went  out  where  the 
horses  were ;  and  the  three  mounted,  and  the 
wizard  followed ;  and  they  came  to  the  end  of 
the  bridge.  There  the  Duke  turned  sharp  round 
and  rode  by  the  side  of  the  rushing  river.  And, 
suddenly  pausing,  he  said  to  Antonio,  "  Commend 
thy  soul  to  God  and  leap  in." 

And  Antonio  commended  his  soul  to  God, 
and  would  have  leapt  in  ;  but  the  Duke  caught 
him  by  the  arm  even  as  he  set  spurs  to  his  horse, 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    135 

saying,  "  Do  not  leap."  And  Antonio  stayed  his 
leap.  Then  the  Duke  turned  his  face  on  the 
wizard,  saying,  "  The  potion  works,  wizard. 
Why  did  you  lie  ?  " 

Then  the  wizard  fell  on  his  knees,  cursing  hell 
and  heaven  ;  for  he  could  not  see  how  he  should 
escape.  For  the  potion  worked.  And  Antonio 
wondered  what  should  fall  out  next.  But  Duke 
Valentine  leapt  down  from  his  horse  and  ap- 
proached the  wizard,  while  Lorenzo  set  his 
swprd  against  Antonio's  breast.  And  the  Duke, 
desirous  to  make  a  final  trial,  cried  again  to 
Antonio,  "  Fling  )■  ourself  from  your  horse." 
And  Antonio,  having  his  arms  bound,  yet  flung 
himself  from  his  horse,  and  fell  prone  on  the 
ground,  and  lay  there  sorely  bruised. 

"  It  is  enough,"  said  the  Duke.  "  You  lied, 
wizard." 

But  the  wizard  cried,  "  I  lied  not,  I  lied  not, 
my  lord.  Slay  me  not,  my  lord !  For  I  dare 
not  die." 

But  the  Duke  caught  him  by  the  throat  and 
drove  his  dagger  into  his  breast  till  the  fingers 
that  held  the  dagger  were  buried  in  the  folds  of 


136     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  wizard's  doublet ;  and  the  Duke  pulled  out 
the  dagger,  and,  when  the  wizard  fell,  he  pushed 
him  with  his  foot  over  the  brink,  and  the  body 
fell  with  a  loud  splash  into  the  river  below. 

Thus  died  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta,  who  was 
famed  above  all  of  his  day  for  the  hidden 
knowledge  that  he  had ;  yet  he  served  not  God, 
but  Satan,  and  his  end  was  the  end  of  a  sinner. 
And,  many  days  after,  his  body  was  found  a 
hundred  miles  from  that  place ;  and  certain 
charitable  men,  brethren  of  my  own  order,  gave 
it  burial.  So  that  he  died  that  same  night  in 
which  the  mirror  had  shown  him  his  face  as 
the  face  of  a  dead  man ;  but  whence  came  the 
vision  I  know  not. 

Then  the  Duke  set  Antonio  again  on  his 
horse,  and  the  three  rode  together  towards  Fir- 
mola,  and  as  they  went,  again  and  again  the 
Duke  tested  the  operation  of  the  drug,  setting 
Antonio  many  strange,  ludicrous,  and  unseemly 
things  to  do  and  to  say ;  and  Antonio  did  and 
said  them  all.  But  he  wondered  greatly  that  the 
drug  had  no  power  over  him,  and  that  his  brain 
was  clear  and  his  senses  all  his  own ;  nor  did  he 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    137 

then  believe  that  the  Duke  had,  in  truth,  slain 
the  wizard  for  any  reason  save  that  the  w^izard 
had  harboured  him,  an  outlaw,  and  suffered  him 
to  hear  the  Duke's  counsels :  and  he  was  grieved 
at  the  wizard's  death. 

Thus  they  rode  through  the  night;  and  it  was 
the  hour  of  dawn  when  they  came  to  the  gates 
of  Firmola.  Now  Antonio  was  puzzled  what  he 
should  do ;  for  having  been  in  a  sw^oon,  he  knew 
not  whether  the  Duke  had  more  of  the  potion; 
nor  could  he  tell  with  certainty  whether  the  po- 
tion would  be  powerless  against  the  senses  of  a 
weak  girl  as  it  had  proved  against  his  own. 
Therefore  he  said  to  the  Duke,  "  I  pray  you,  my 
lord,  give  me  more  of  that  sweet  drink.  For  it 
has  refreshed  me  and  set  my  mind  at  rest  from 
all  trouble." 

"  Nay,  Antonio,  you  have  had  enough,"  said 
the  Duke,  bantering  him.  "  I  have  another  use 
for  the  rest."  And  they  were  now  nearing  the 
gates  of  Firmola.  Then  Antonio  began  to  moan 
pitifully,  saying,  "  These  bonds  hurt  my  hands  ;  " 
and  he  whined  and  did  as  a  child  would  do,  feign- 
ing to  cry.     The  Duke  laughed  in  bitter  triumph, 


138     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

saying  to  Lorenzo,  "  Indeed  it  is  a  princely  drug 
that  makes  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto  like  a  peev- 
ish child  !  "  And  being  now  very  secure  of  the 
power  of  the  drug,  he  bade  Lorenzo  loosen  the 
bonds,  saying  to  Antonio,  "  Take  the  reins,  An- 
tonio, and  ride  with  us  into  the  city." 

And  Antonio  answered,  "  I  will,  my  good 
lord." 

"  It  is  even  as  I  saw  when  I  was  with  the 
Lord  of  Florence,"  whispered  the  Duke  in  ex- 
ultation. 

"  Yet  1  will  still  have  m}'  sword  ready,"  said 
Lorenzo. 

"  There  is  no  need ;  he  is  like  a  tame  dog," 
said  the  Duke  carelessly. 

But  the  Duke  was  not  minded  to  produce 
Antonio  to  the  people  till  all  his  Guards  were 
collected  and  under  arms,  and  the  people  thus 
restrained  by  a  great  show  of  force.  Therefore 
he  bade  Antonio  cover  his  face  with  his  cloak ; 
and  Antonio,  Lorenzo's  sword  being  still  at  his 
breast,  obeyed  ;  and  thus  they  three  rode  through 
the  gates  of  Firmola  and  came  to  the  Duke's 
palace ;    and  Antonio  did  all  that  the   Duke  or- 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    139 

dered,  and  babbled  foolishly  like  a  bewildered 
child  when  the  Duke  asked  him  questions,  so  that 
His  Highness  laughed  mightily,  and,  coming  into 
the  garden,  sat  down  in  his  favourite  place  by  the 
fish-pond,  causing  Antonio  to  stand  over  against 
him. 

"  Indeed,  Antonio,"  said  he,  "  I  can  do  no  other 
than  hang  you." 

"  If  it  be  your  pleasure,  my  lord." 
'^^  "  And  then  Lucia  shall  drink  of  this  wonderful 
'drtig  also,  and  she  will  be  content  and  obedient, 
and  will  gladly  wed  Lorenzo.  Let  us  have  her 
here  now,  and  give  it  to  her  without  delay.  You 
do  not  fret  at  that,  Antonio  ?  You  love  not  the 
obstinate  girl  ?  " 

"In  truth,  no,"  laughed  Antonio.  "She  is 
naught  to  me ! "  And  he  put  his  hand  to  his 
head,  sa3^ing  perplexedly,  "  Lucia  ?  Yes,  I  re- 
member that  name.  Who  was  she?  Was  she 
aught  to  me,  my  lord  ?  " 

Then  Lorenzo  wondered  greatly,  and  the 
doubts  that  he  had  held  concerning  the  power  of 
the  wizard's  drug  melted  away  ;  yet  he  did  not 
laugh  like  the  Duke,  but  looked  on  Antonio  and 


I40     THE   CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

said  sadly  to  the  Duke,  sinking  his  voice,  "  Not 
thus  should  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto  have 
died." 

"  So  he  dies,  I  care  not  how,"  answered  the 
Duke.  "  Indeed,  I  love  to  see  him  a  witless  fool 
even  while  his  body  is  yet  alive.  O  rare  wizard, 
I  go  near  to  repenting  having  done  justice  on 
you !  Go,  Lorenzo,  to  the  officer  of  the  Guard 
and  bid  him  fetch  hither  the  Lady  Lucia,  and  we 
will  play  the  pretty  comedy  to  the  end." 

"  Will  you  be  alone  with  him  ? "  asked  Lo- 
renzo. 

"  Aye  ;  why  not  ?  See  !  he  is  tame  enough," 
and  he  buffeted  Antonio  in  the  face  with  his 
riding-glove.  And  Antonio  whimpered  and 
whined. 

Now  the  officer  of  the  Guard  was  in  his  lodge 
at  the  entrance  of  the  palace,  an  the  other  side  of 
the  great  hall ;  and  Lorenzo  turned  and  went, 
and  presently  the  sound  of  his  feet  on  the  marble 
floor  of  the  hall  grew  faint  and  distant.  The 
Duke  sat  with  the  phial  in  his  hand,  smiling  at 
Antonio  who  crouched  at  his  feet.  And  Antonio 
drew    himself   on    his   knees   quite   close   to   the 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    141 

Duke,  and  looked  up  in  his  face  with  a  foolish 
empty  smile.  And  the  Duke,  laughing,  buffeted 
him  again.  Then,  with  a  sudden  spring,  like  the 
spring  of  that  Indian  tiger  which  the  Mogul  of 
Delhi  sent  lately  as  a  gift  to  the  Most  Christian 
King,  and  the  king,  for  his  diversion,  made  to 
slay  deer  before  him  at  the  chateau  of  Blois 
(which  I  myself  saw,  being  there  on  a  certain 
mission,  and  wonderful  was  the  sight).  Count 
-Antonio,  leaping,  was  upon  the  Duke ;  and  he 
'snatched  the  philtre  from  the  Duke's  hand  and 
seized  the  Duke's  head  in  his  hands  and  wrenched 
his  jaw  open,  and  he  poured  the  contents  of  the 
phial  down  the  Duke's  throat,  and  the  Duke 
swallowed  the  potion.  Then  Antonio  fixed  a 
stern  and  imperious  glance  on  the  Duke,  nailing 
his  eyes  to  the  Duke's  and  the  Duke's  to  his,  and 
he  said  in  a  voice  of  command,  "  Obey !  You 
have  drunk  the  potion !  "  And  still  he  kept  his 
eyes  on  the  Duke's.  And  the  Duke,  amazed,  sud- 
denly began  to  tremble,  and  sought  to  rise  ;  and 
Antonio  took  his  hands  off  him,  but  said,  "Sit 
there,  and  move  not."  Then,  although  Antonio's 
hands  were  no  longer  upon  him,  yti  His  High- 


142 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


ness  did  not  rise,  but  after  a  short  struggle  with 
himself  sank  back  in  his  seat,  and  stared  at  An- 
tonio like  a  bird  fascinated  by  a  snake.  And  he 
moaned,  "  Take  away  your  eyes ;  they  burn  my 
brain.  Take  them  away."  But  Antonio  gazed 
all  the  more  intently  at  him,  saying,  "  Be  still,  be 
still !  "  and  holding  up  his  arm  in  enforcement  of 
his  command.  And  Antonio  took  from  the  Duke 
the  sword  that  he  wore  and  the  dagger  where- 
with the  Duke  had  killed  the  Wizard  of  Bara- 
testa,  he  making  no  resistance,  but  sitting  motion- 
less with  bewildered  stare.  Then  Antonio  looked 
round,  for  he  knew  that  Lorenzo  would  soon 
come.  And  for  the  last  time  he  bent  his  eyes 
again  on  the  Duke's  eyes  in  a  very  long  gaze  and 
the  Duke  cowered  and  shivered,  moaning,  "  You 
hurt  me,  you  hurt  me." 

Then  Antonio  said,  "  Be  still  and  speak  not 
till  I  return  and  bid  you ; "  and  he  suddenly 
left  the  Duke  and  ran  at  the  top  of  his  speed 
along  under  the  wall  of  the  garden,  and  came 
where  the  wall  ended  ;  and  there  was  a  flight 
of  steps  leading  up  on  to  the  top  of  the  wall. 
Running   up   it,   Antonio   stood    for    a    moment 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    143 

on  the  wall;  and  the  river  ran  fifty  feet  below. 
But  he  heard  a  cry  from  the  garden,  and  be- 
held Lorenzo  rushing  up  to  the  Duke,  and 
behind  Lorenzo,  the  Captain  of  the  Guard  and, 
two  men  who  led  a  maiden  in  white.  Then 
Count  Antonio,  having  commended  himself  to 
the  keeping  of  God,  leapt  head  foremost  from 
the  top  of  the  wall  into  the  river,  and  his 
body  clove  the  water  as  an  arrow  cleaves  the 
'wand. 

Now  Lorenzo  marvelled  greatly  at  what  he 
saw,  and  came  to  the  Duke  crying,  "  My  lord, 
what  does  this  mean?  Antonio  flies!"  But 
the  Duke  answered  nothing,  sitting  with  empty 
eyes  and  lips  set  in  a  rigid  smile ;  nor  did  he 
move.  "  My  lord,  what  ails  you  ? "  cried  Lor- 
enzo. Yet  the  Duke  did  not  answer.  Then 
Lorenzo's  eye  fell  on  the  fragments  of  the  phial 
which  lay  broken  on  the  rim  of  the  fish-pond 
where  Antonio  had  flung  it ;  and  he  cried  out 
in  great  alarm,  "  The  potion !  Where  is  the 
potion?"  But  the  Duke  did  not  answer.  And 
Lorenzo  was  much  bewildered  and  in  sore  fear ; 
for  it  seemed  as  though  His   Highness's  senses 


144     ^^'^   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

were  gone  ;  and  Lorenzo  said,  "  By  some  means 
he  has  drunk  the  potion !  "  And  he  ran  up  to 
the  Duke,  and  caught  him  by  the  arm  and 
shook  him  violently,  seeking  to  rouse  him  from 
his  stupor,  and  calling  his  name  with  entreaties, 
and  crying,  "  He  escapes,  my  lord  ;  Antonio  es- 
capes !  Rouse  yourself,  my  lord — he  escapes ! " 
But  the  Duke  did  no  more  than  lift  heavy 
dull  eyes  to  Lorenzo's  face  in  puzzled  in- 
quiry. 

And,  seeing  the  strange  thing,  the  Captain  of 
the  Guard  hurried  up,  and  with  him  the  Lady 
Lucia,  and  she  said,  "  Alas,  my  lord  is  ill !  "  and 
coming  to  His  Highness  she  set  her  cool  soft 
hand  on  his  hot  throbbing  brow,  and  took  per- 
fume from  a  silver  flask  that  hung  at  her  girdle, 
and  wetted  her  handkerchief  with  it  and  bathed 
his  brow,  whispering  soft  soothing  words  to 
him,  as  though  he  had  been  a  sick  woman.  For 
let  a  woman  have  what  grudge  she  may  against 
a  man,  yet  he  gains  pardon  for  all  so  soon  as 
he  becomes  sick  enough  to  let  her  nurse  and 
comfort  him ;  and  Lucia  v/as  as  tender  to  the 
Duke    as    to    the    Count   Antonio   himself,   and 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    145 

forgot  all  save  the  need  of  giving  him  ease  and 
rousing  him  from  his  stupor. 

But  Lorenzo  cried  angrily,  "  I  at  least  have 
my  senses ! "  And  he  said  to  the  Captain  of 
the  Guard,  "  I  must  needs  stay  with  His  High- 
ness ;  but  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto  has  leapt 
from  the  wall  into  the  river.  Go  and  bring  him 
here,  dead  or^alive,  and  I  will  be  your  warrant 
to  the  Duke.  But  if  he  be  as  when  I  saw  him 
'IsLSt,  he  will  give  you  small  trouble.  For  he 
was  like  a  child  for  weakness  and  folly."  And 
having  said  this,  he  turned  to  the  Duke  again, 
and  gave  his  aid  to  Lucia's  ministrations. 

Now  the  gentleman  who  commanded  the 
Duke's  Guard  at  this  time  was  a  Spaniard,  by 
name  Corogna,  and  he  was  young,  of  high  cour- 
age, and  burning  to  do  some  great  deed.  There- 
fore he  said,  "  I  pray  he  be  as  he  is  wont  to  be : 
yet  I  will  bring  him  to  the  feet  of  my  lord  the 
Duke."  And  he  ran  swiftly  through  the  hall 
and  called  for  his  horse,  and  drawing  his  sword, 
rode  alone  out  of  the  city  and  across  the  bridge, 
seeking  Antonio,  and  saying  to  himself,  "  What  a 
thing  if  I  take  him !     And  if  he  slay  me,  why,  I 


146     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

will  show  that  a  gentleman  of  Andalusia  can 
die  ;  "  yet  he  thought  for  an  instant  of  the 
house  where  his  mother  lived.  Then  he  scanned 
the  plain,  and  he  beheld  a  man  running  some 
half-mile  away  ;  and  the  man  seemed  to  be  mak- 
ing for  the  hill  on  which  stood  the  ruins  of 
Antonio's  house  that  the  Duke  had  burnt.  Then 
Corogna  set  spurs  to  his  horse  ;  but  the  man, 
whom  by  his  stature  and  gait  Corogna  knew  to 
be  Antonio,  ran  very  swiftly,  and  was  not  over- 
taken before  he  came  to  the  hill ;  and  he  began 
to  mount  by  a  very  steep  rugged  path,  and  he 
was  out  of  sight  in  the  trees  when  Corogna 
came  to  the  foot.  And  Corogna's  horse  stum- 
bled among  the  stones,  and  could  not  mount  the 
path  ;  so  Corogna  sprang  off  his  back  and  ran 
on  foot  up  the  path,  sword  in  hand.  And  he 
came  in  sight  of  Antonio  round  a  curve  of  the 
path  three  parts  of  the  way  up  the  hill.  An- 
tonio was  leaning  against  the  trunk  of  a  tree 
and  wringing  the  water  out  of  his  cloak.  Coro- 
gna drew  near,  sword  in  hand,  and  with  a  prayer 
to  the  Holy  Virgin  on  his  lips.  And  he  trem- 
bled, not   with   fear,  but   because  fate  offered  a 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE  WIZARD'S  DRUG.    147 

great  prize,  and  his  name  would  be  famed 
throughout  Italy  if  he  slew  or  took  Antonio  of 
Monte  Velluto ;  and  for  fame,  even  as  for  a 
woman's  smile,  a  young  man  will  tremble  as  a 
coward  quakes  with  fear. 

The  Count  Antonio  stood  as  though  sunk  in  a 
reverie  ;  yet,  presently,  hearing  Corogna's  tread, 
he  raised  his  eyes,  and  smiling  kindly  on  the 
young  man,  he  said,  "  Very  strange  are  the  ways 
'.oj  Heaven,  sir.  I  think  that  the  Wizard  of 
'  !^fatesta  spoke  truth,  and  did  not  lie  to  the 
Duke.  Yet  I  had  that  same  power  which  the 
wizard  claimed,  although  the  Duke  had  none 
over  me.  We  are  children,  sir,  and  our  game  is 
blind-man's  buff ;  but  all  are  blinded,  and  it  is  but 
the  narrowest  glimpse  that  we  obtain  now  and 
again  by  some  clever  shifting  of  the  handker- 
chief. Yet  there  are  some  things  clear  enough  ; 
as  that  a  man  should  do  his  work,  and  be  clean 
and  true.  What  would  you  with  me,  sir  ?  For 
I  do  not  think  I  know  you." 

"  I  am  of  Andalusia,  and  my  name  is  Corogna. 
I  am  Captain  of  His  Highness's  Guard,  and  I  come 
to  bring  you,  alive  or  dead,  to  his  presence." 


148      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

*'  And  are  you  come  alone  on  that  errand, 
sir  ?  "  asked  Antonio  with  a  smile  that  he  strove 
to  smother,  lest  it  should  wound  the  young  man's 
honour. 

"  David  slew  Goliath,  my  lord,"  said  the 
Spaniard  with  a  bow. 

Then  Count  Antonio  held  out  his  hand  to 
the  young  man  and  said  courteously,  "  Sir,  your 
valour  needs  no  proof  and  fears  no  reproach.  I 
pray  you  suffer  me  to  go  in  peace.  I  would 
not  fight  with  you,  if  I  may  avoid  it  honourably. 
For  what  has  happened  has  left  me  more  in  the 
mood  for  thinking  than  for  fighting.  Besides, 
sir,  you  are  young,  and,  far  off  in  Andalusia,  lov- 
ing eyes,  and  maybe  sparkling  eyes,  are  strained 
to  the  horizon,  seeking  your  face  as  you  re- 
turn." > 

•'  What  is  all  that,  my  lord  ?  "  asked  Corogna. 
"  I  am  a  man,  though  a  young  one  ;  and  I  am 
here  to  carry  you  to  the  Duke."  And  he 
touched  Antonio's  sword  with  his,  saying, 
"  Guard  yourself." 

"  It  is  with  great  pain  and  reluctance  that  I 
take  my  sword,  and  I  call  you  to  witness  of  it ; 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    149 

but  if  I  must,  I  must ;  "  and  the    Count   took  up 
his  position  and  they  crossed  swords. 

Now  Corogna  was  well-taught  and  skilful,  but 
he  did  not  know  the  cunning  which  Antonio  had 
learned  in  the  school  of  Giacomo  in  Padua,  nor 
had  he  the  strength  and  endurance  of  the  Count. 
Antonio  would  fain  have  wearied  him  out,  and 
then,  giving  Mm  some  slight  wound  to  cover  his 
honour,  have  left  him  and  escaped ;  but  the 
"'-young  man  came  at  him  impetuously,  and  neg- 
lected to  guard  himself  while  he  thrust  at  his 
enemy  :  once  and  again  the  Count  spared  him ; 
but  he  did  not  know  that  he  had  received  the 
courtesy,  and  taking  heart  from  his  immunity 
came  at  Antonio  more  fiercely  again ;  until  at  last 
Antonio,  breathing  a  sigh,  stiffened  his  arm,  and, 
waiting  warily  for  the  young  man  again  to  un- 
cover himself,  thrust  at  his  breast,  and  the 
sword's  point  entered  hard  by  the  young  man's 
heart ;  and  the  young  man  staggered,  and  would 
have  fallen,  dropping  his  sword  ;  but  Antonio 
cast  away  his  own  sword  and  supported  him, 
stanching  the  blood  from  the  wound  and  crying, 
"  God  send  I  have  not  killed  him  !  " 


I50     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

And  on  his  speech  came  the  voice  of  Tom- 
masino,  saying  carelessly,  "  Here,  in  truth,  cous- 
in, is  a  good  prayer  wasted  on  a  Spaniard ! " 

Antonio,  looking  up,  saw  Tommasino  and 
Bena.  And  Tommasino  said,  "  When  you  did 
not  come  back,  we  set  out  to  seek  you,  fearing 
that  you  were  fallen  into  some  snare  and  dan- 
ger. And  behold,  we  find  you  nursing  this  young 
spark  ;  and  how  you  missed  his  heart,  Antonio, 
I  know  not,  nor  what  Giacomo  of  Padua  would 
say  to  such  bungling." 

But  Antonio  cared  not  for  his  cousin's  words, 
which  were  spoken  in  a  banter  that  a  man  uses 
to  hide  his  true  feelings ;  and  they  three  set 
themselves  to  save  the  young  man's  life ;  for 
Tommasino  and  Bena  had  seen  the  better  part 
of  the  fight  and  perceived  that  he  was  a  gallant 
youth.  But  as  they  tended  him,  there  came 
shouts  and  the  sound  of  horses'  hoofs  mounting 
the  hill  by  the  winding  road  that  led  past  An- 
tonio's house.  And  Tommasino  touched  Anto- 
nio on  the  shoulder,  saying,  "  We  can  do  no 
more  for  him  ;  and  if  we  linger,  we  must  fight 
again." 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    151 

Then  they  laid  the  young-  man  down,  Anto- 
nio stripping  off  his  cloak  and  making  a  pillow 
of  it ;  and  Bena  brought  the  horses,  for  they 
had  led  one  with  them  for  Antonio,  in  case  there 
should  be  need  of  it ;  and  they  were  but  just 
mounted  when  twenty  of  the  Duke's  Guard  ap- 
peared three  hundred  yards  away,  ascending 
the  crest  of  the  hill. 

"  Thank  Heaven  there  are  so  many,"  said 
'^ntonio,  "  for  now  we  can  fiee  without  shame  ; " 
'ami  they  set  spurs  to  their  horses  and  fied.  And 
certain  of  the  Duke's  Guard  pursued,  but  only 
two  or  three  were  so  well  mounted  as  to  be 
able  to  come  near  them  ;  and  these  two  or  three, 
finding  that  they  would  be  man  to  man,  had  no 
liking  for  the  business,  and  each  called  out  that 
his  horse  was  foundered  ;  and  thus  it  was  that 
none  of  them  came  up  with  Count  Antonio,  but 
all,  after  a  while,  returned  together  to  the  city, 
carrying  the  young  Spaniard  Corogna,  their  cap- 
tain. But  as  they  drew  near  to  the  gates,  Coro- 
gna opened  his  eyes  and  murmured  some  soft- 
syllabled  name  that  they  could  not  hear,  and, 
having    with    failing     fingers    signed    the    cross, 


152      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

turned  on  his  side  and  died.  And  they  brought 
his  body  to  the  great  hall  of  the  Duke's  palace. 
There  in  the  great  hall  sat  Duke  Valentine : 
his  face  was  pale  and  his  frown  heavy,  and  he 
gazed  on  the  dead  body  of  the  young  man  and 
spoke  no  word.  Yet  he  had  loved  Corogna,  and 
out  of  love  for  him  had  made  him  Captain  of 
his  Guard.  And  he  passed  his  hand  wearily 
across  his  brow,  murmuring,  "  I  cannot  think,  I 
cannot  think."  And  the  Lady  Lucia  stood  by 
him,  her  hand  resting  on  his  shoulder  and  her 
eyes  full  of  tears.  But  at  last  the  strange  spell 
which  lay  on  the  senses  of  the  Duke  passed 
away  :  his  eyes  again  had  the  light  of  reason  in 
them,  and  he  listened  while  they  told  him  how 
Antonio  had  himself  escaped,  and  had  afterwards 
slain  Corogna  on  the  top  of  the  hill  where  An- 
tonio's house  had  stood.  And  the  Duke  was 
very  sorry  for  Corogna's  death  :  and  he  looked 
round  on  them  all,  saying,  "  He  made  of  me  a 
log  of  wood,  and  not  a  man.  For  when  I  had 
drunk  and  looked  in  his  eyes,  it  seemed  to  me 
that  my  eyes  were  bound  to  his,  and  that  I 
looked  to  him  for  command,  and  to  know  what 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    153 

I  should  do,  and  that  he  was  my  God,  and  with- 
out his  will  I  could  not  move.  Yes,  I  was  then 
to  him  even  as  he  had  seemed  to  be  to  me  as  we 
rode  from  Baratesta.  And  even  now  I  am  not 
free  from  this  strange  affection ;  for  he  seems  still 
to  be  by  me,  and  if  his  voice  came  now  bidding 
me  to  do  anything,  by  St.  Frisian,  I  should  arise 
and  do  it !  Send  my  physician  to  me.  And  let 
this  young  man  lie  in  the  Chapel  of  the  Blessed 
Virgin  in  the  Cathedral,  and  to-morrow  he  shall 
be'feuried.  But  when  I  am  well,  and  this  strange 
affection  is  passed  from  me,  and  hangs  no  more 
like  a  fog  over  my  brain,  then  I  will  exact  the 
price  of  his  death  from  Antonio,  together  with 
the  reckoning  of  all  else  in  respect  of  which  he 
stands  in  my  debt." 

But  the  Lady  Lucia,  hearing  this,  said  boldly, 

"  My  lord,  it  is  by  your  deed  and  through  your 

devices  that  this   gentleman   has  met  his  death, 

and   the  blame  of  it  is  yours,  and  not  my  lord 

^  Antonio's." 

At  her  bold  and  angry  words  Duke  Valen- 
tine was  roused,  and  the  last  of  his  languor  left 
him ;    and    he    glared    at    her    in    wrath,  crying 


154     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"Go  to  your  house;"  and  he  rose  up  suddenly 
from  where  he  sat  and  went  into  his  cabinet, 
Lorenzo  attending  him.  And  on  the  day  after 
he  walked  first  behind  the  bier  of  Corogna, 
and  his  face  was  very  pale,  but  his  air  composed 
and  his  manner  as  it  was  wont  to  be.  For 
the  spell  had  passed  and  he  was  his  own  man 
again. 

But  Count  Antonio  heard  with  great  grief 
of  the  death  of  the  young  man,  and  was  very 
sorry  that  he  had  been  constrained  to  kill  him, 
and  took  great  blame  to  himself  for  seeking 
counsel  of  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta,  whence  had 
come  death  to  the  young  man  no  less  than  to 
the  wizard  himself. 

Such  is  the  story  of  the  drug  which  the 
Wizard  of  Baratesta  gave  to  Duke  Valentine  of 
Firmola.  To  me  it  seems  a  strange  tale,  but 
yet  it  is  well  attested  and  stands  on  as  strong 
a  rock  of  testimony  as  anything  which  is  told 
concerning  the  Count.  The  truth  of  it  I  do  not 
understand,  and  often  I  ponder  of  it,  wondering 
whether  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta  spoke  truth, 
and  why  the  drug   which    had    no    power   over 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    155 

Count  Antonio  bound  the  senses  and  limbs  of 
the  Duke  in  utter  torpor  and  helplessness.  And 
once,  when  I  was  thus  musing  over  the  story, 
there  came  to  my  cell  a  monk  of  the  Abbey  of 
St.  Frisian,  who  was  an  old  man  and  very 
learned ;  and  I  went  to  walk  with  him  in  the 
garden,  and  coming  to  the  fountain  we  sat  down 
by  the  basin ;  and  knowing  that  his  lore  was 
wide  and  deep,  I  set  before  him  all  the  story, 
^king  him  if  he  knew  of  this  strange  drug ;  but 
li^slniled  at  me,  and  taking  the  cup  that  lay 
by  the  basin  of  the  fountain,  he  filled  it  with  the 
clear  sparkling  water  and  drank  a  little,  and  held 
the  cup  to  me,  saying,  "  I  think  the  Wizard  of 
Baratesta  would  have  wrought  the  spell  as  well 
with  no  other  drug  than  this." 

"You  say  a  strange  thing,"  said  I. 

"  And  I  do  not  marvel,"  said  he,  "  that  the 
Duke  had  no  power  over  Count  Antonio,  for  he 
knew  not  how  to  wield  such  power.  But  neither 
do  I  wonder  that  power  lay  in  Count  Antonio 
to  bend  the  mind  of  the  Duke  to  his  will.  I 
warrant  you,  Ambrose,  that  the  wonderful  drug 
was  not  difficult  to  compound." 


156     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Then  I  understood  what  he  meant ;  for  he 
would  have  it  that  the  drug"  was  but  a  screen 
and  a  pretence,  and  that  the  power  la}^  not  in 
it,  but  in  the  man  that  gave  it.  Yet  surely  this 
is  to  explain  what  is  obscure  by  a  thing  more 
obscure,  and  falls  thus  into  a  fault  hated  of  the 
logicians.  For  Heaven  may  well  have  made  a 
drug  that  binds  the  senses  and  limbs  of  men. 
Has  not  the  poppy  some  such  effect?  And  the 
ancients  fabled  the  like  of  the  lotus  plant.  But 
can  we  conceive  that  one  man  should  by  the 
mere  glance  of  his  eye  have  such  power  over 
another  as  to  become  to  him,  by  these  means 
and  no  other,  a  lord  and  master?  In  truth  I 
find  that  hard  to  believe,  and  I  doubt  whether 
a  man  may  lawfully  believe  it.  Yet  I  know  not. 
Knowledge  spreads,  and  men  grow  wiser  in  hid- 
den things ;  and  although  I  who  write  may  not 
live  till  the  time  when  the  thing  shall  be  made 
clear,  yet  it  may  be  God's  will  to  send  such 
light  to  the  men  of  later  days  that,  reading  this 
story,  they  may  find  in  it  nothing  that  is  strange 
or  unknown  to  their  science  and  skill.  I  pray 
that  they  may  use  the  knowledge  God  sends  in 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE  WIZARD'S   DRUG.    157 

His    holy    service,  and    not  in  the  work   of   the 
devil,  as  did  the  Wizard  of  Baratesta. 

But  Count  Antonio  being,  by  his  guile  and 
adroitness,  and  by  that  strange  power  which  he 
had  from  the  drug  or  whence  I  know  not,  de- 
livered out  of  the  hands  of  Duke  Valentine, 
abode  with  his  company  on  the  hills  throughout 
the  cold  of  wijiter,  expecting  the  day  when  he 
might  win  the  hand  of  the  Lady  Lucia ;  and 
'ske  returned  to  her  house,  and  said  nothing  of 
'wHat  had  befallen  the  Duke.  Yet  the  Duke 
showed  her  no  tenderness,  but  rather  used  more 
severity  with  her.  It  is  an  evil  service  to  a 
proud  man  to  aid  him  in  his  day  of  humiliation. 


CHAPTER  V. 

COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES. 

There  is  one  tale  concerning-  Count  Antonio 
of  Monte  Velluto,  when  he  dwelt  an  outlaw  in 
the  hills,  which  men  tell  with  fear  and  doubt, 
marvelling  at  the  audacity  of  his  act,  and  some- 
times asking  themselves  whether  he  would  in 
very  truth  have  performed  what  he  swore  on 
the  faith  of  his  honour  he  would  do,  in  case  the 
Duke  did  not  accede  to  his  demands.  For  the 
thing-  he  threatened  was  such  as  no  man  of  Fir- 
mola  dares  think  on  without  a  shudder;  for  we 
of  Firmola  prize  and  reverence  the  bones  of  our 
saint,  the  holy  martyr  Frisian,  above  and  far  be- 
yond every  other  relic,  and  they  are  to  us  as  it 
were  the  sign  and  testimony  of  God's  enduring 
favour  to  our  country.     But  much  will    a    man 

do  for  love  of   a  woman,  and  Antonio's   temper 

158 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.   15^ 

brooked  no  obstacle :  so  that  I,  who  know  all 
the  truth  of  the  matter,  may  not  doubt  that  he 
would  have  done  even  as  he  said,  braving  the 
wrath  of  Heaven  and  making  naught  of  the  ter- 
ror and  consternation  that  had  fallen  on  the  city 
and  the  parts  round  about  it.  Whether  that 
thought  of  his  heart  was  such  as  would  gain 
pardon,  I  know  not:  had  the  thing  been  done, 
I  could  scarce  hope  even  in  Heaven's  infinite 
fn^cy.  Yet  this  story  also  I  must  tell,  lest  I  be 
chcirged  with  covering  up  what  shames  Antonio ; 
for  with  the  opinions  of  careless  and  faithless 
men  (who  are  too  many  in  this  later  age)  I  have 
no  communion,  and  I  tell  the  tale  not  to  move 
laughter  or  loose  jests,  but  rather  that  I  may 
show  to  what  extremity  a  man  in  nature  good 
may  be  driven  by  harshness  and  the  unmerited 
disfavour  of  his  Prince. 

In  the  third  year,  then,  of  Count  Antonio's 
outlawry,  His  Highness  the  Duke  looked  on  the 
Lady  Lucia  and  found  that  she  was  of  full  age 
for  marriage.  Therefore  he  resolved  that  she 
should  be  wed,  and,  since  Robert  de  Beauregard, 
to  whom  he  had  purposed  to  give  her,  was  dead, 


l6o     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

he  chose  from  among  his  lords  a  certain  gentle- 
man of  great  estate  and  a  favourite  of  his,  by 
name  Lorenzo,  and  sent  word  to  Lucia  that  she 
had  spent  too  much  of  her  youth  pining  for  what 
could  not  be  hers,  and  must  forthwith  receive 
Lorenzo  for  her  husband.  But  Lucia,  being  by 
now  a  woman  and  no  more  a  timid  girl,  returned 
to  His  Highness  a  message  that  she  would  look 
on  no  other  man  than  i\.ntonio.  On  this  the 
Duke,  greatly  incensed,  sent  and  took  her,  and 
set  her  in  a  convent  within  the  city  walls,  and 
made  her  know  that  there  she  should  abide  till 
her  life's  end,  or  until  she  should  obey  his  com- 
mand ;  and  he  charged  the  Abbess  to  treat  her 
harshly  and  to  break  down  her  pride :  and  he 
swore  that  she  should  wed  Lorenzo  ;  or,  if  she 
were  obstinate,  then  she  should  take  the  vows  of 
a  nun  in  the  convent.  Many  weeks  the  Lady 
Lucia  abode  in  the  convent,  resisting  all  that  was 
urged  upon  her.  But  at  last,  finding  no  help 
from  Antonio,  being  sore  beset  and  allowed  no 
rest,  she  broke  one  day  into  passionate  and  piti- 
ful weeping,  and  bade  the  Abbess  tell  His  High- 
ness that,  since  happiness  was  not  for  her  in  this 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    i6l 

world,  she  would  seek  to  find  it  in  Heaven,  and 
would  take  the  vows,  rendering  all  her  estate 
into  the  Duke's  hand,  that  he  might  have  it, 
and  give  it  to  Lorenzo  or  to  whom  he  would. 
Which  message  being  told  to  Duke  Valentine, 
weary  of  contending  with  her,  and  perchance 
secretly  fearing  that  Antonio  would  slay  Lorenzo 
as  he  had  slain  Robert,  he  cursed  her  for  an  ob- 
stinate wench,  and  bade  her  take  the  vows,  and 
'54t  a  day  for  her  to  take  them  :  but  her  estate  he 
'aS^iimed  into  his  own  hand,  and  made  from  out 
of  it  a  gift  of  great  value  to  Lorenzo.  And  Lo- 
renzo, they  say,  was  well  content  thus  to  be  quit 
of  the  matter.  "  For,"  said  he,  "  while  that  devil 
is  loose  in  the  hills,  no  peace  would  there  have 
been  for  the  lady's  husband." 

But  when  it  came  to  the  cars  of  Count  An- 
tonio that  the  Lady  Lucia  was  to  take  the  veil  on 
the  morrow  of  the  feast  of  St.  Frisian,  his  rage 
and  affliction  knew  no  bounds.  "  If  need  be,"  he 
cried,  "  I  will  attack  the  city  with  all  my  men, 
before  I  will  suffer  it." 

"Your  men  would  be-all  killed,  and  she 
would  take  the  veil  none  the  less,"  said  Tomma- 


l62      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

sino.  For  Antonio  had  but  fifty  men,  and  al- 
though they  were  stout  fellows  and  impossible  to 
subdue  so  long  as  they  stayed  in  the  hills,  yet 
their  strength  would  have  been  nothing  against 
a  fortress  and  the  Duke's  array. 

"  Then,"  said  Antonio,  "  I  will  go  alone  and 
die  alone." 

As  he  spoke,  he  perceived  Martolo  coming  to 
him,  and,  calling  him,  he  asked  him  what  he 
would.  Now  Martolo  was  a  devout  man  and  had 
been  much  grieved  when  Antonio  had  fallen 
under  a  sentence  of  excommunication  by  reason 
of  a  certain  quarrel  that  he  had  with  the  Abbot 
of  the  Abbey  of  St.  Frisian  in  the  hills,  wherein 
the  Count  had  incurred  the  condemnation  of  the 
Church,  refusing,  as  his  way  was,  to  admit  any 
rule  save  of  his  own  conscience.  Yet  Martolo 
abode  with  Antonio  from  love  of  him.  And  now 
he  bowed  and  answered,  "  My  lord,  in  three  days 
it  is  the  feast  of  St.  Frisian,  and  the  sacred  bones 
will  then  be  carried  from  the  shrine  in  the 
church  of  the  saint  at  Rilano  to  the  city."  For 
it  was  at  Rilano  that  Frisian  had  sufifered,  and  a 
rich  church  had  been  built  on  the  spot. 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    163 

"  I  remember  that  it  is  wont  to  be  so,  Mar- 
tolo,"  answered  the  Count. 

"  When  I  dwelt  with  my  father,"  said  Marto- 
lo,  "  I  was  accustomed  to  go  forth  with  all  the 
people  of  my  village  and  meet  the  sacred  bones, 
and  kneeling,  receive  the  benediction  from  the 
Lord  Archbishop  as  he  passed,  bearing  the  bones 
in  their  golden  casket.  And  the  like  I  would  do 
this  year,  my  lord." 

'.*.  "  But  are  you  not  excommunicated  in  com- 
paliy  with  Count  Antonio  and  me  ? "  asked  Tom- 
masino,  lightly  smiling ;  for  Tommasino  also 
stood  condemned. 

"  I  pray  not.  I  was  not  named  in  the  sen- 
tence," said  Martolo,  signing  the  cross. 

"  Go  in  peace,  Martolo  ;  but  see  that  you  are  not 
taken  by  the  Duke's  men,"  said  Count  Antonio. 

"  But  few  of  them  go  with  the  Archbishop, 
my  lord.  For  who  would  lay  hands  on  the 
sacred  bones?  The  guard  is  small,  and  I  shall 
easily  elude  them."  So  Martolo  departed,  and 
told  the  man  they  called  Bena  what  had  passed  ; 
but  Bena  was  a  graceless  fellow  and  would  not 
go  with  him. 


164     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Now  when  Martolo  was  gone,  Count  Antonio 
sat  down  on  a  great  stone  and  for  a  long  while 
he  said  nothing  to  Tommasino.  But  certain 
words  out  of  those  which  Martolo  had  spoken 
were  echoing  through  his  brain,  and  he  could  not 
put  them  aside ;  for  they  came  again  and  again 
and  again  ;  and  at  last,  looking  up  at  Tommasino 
who  stood  by  him,  he  said,  **  Tommasino,  who 
would  lay  hands  on  the  sacred  bones?" 

Tommasino  looked  down  into  his  eyes ;  then 
he  laid  a  hand  on  his  shoulder ;  and  Antonio  still 
looked  up  and  repeated,  "  Who  would  lay  hands 
on  the  sacred  bones?  " 

Tommasino's  eyes  grew  round  in  wonder:  he 
smiled,  but  his  smile  was  uneasy,  and  he  shifted 
his  feet.  "  Is  it  that  you  think  of,  Antonio?  "  he 
asked  in  a  low  voice.  "  Beside  it,  it  would  be  a 
light  thing  to  kill  the  Duke  in  his  own  palace." 

Then  Antonio  cried,  striking  his  fist  on  the 
palm  of  his  hand,  "Are  dead  bones  more  sacred 
than  that  living  soul  on  which  the  Duke  lays 
hands  to  force  it  to  his  will?" 

"  The  people  reverence  the  bones  as  God 
Himself,"  said  Tommasino,  troubled. 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.   165 

"  I  also  reverence  them,"  said  Antonio,  and 
fell  again  into  thought.  But  presently  he  rose 
and  took  Tommasino's  arm,  and  for  a  long  while 
they  walked  to  and  fro.  Then  they  went  and 
sought  out  certain  chosen  men  of  the  band  ;  for 
the  greater  part  they  dared  not  trust  in  such  a 
matter,  but  turned  only  to  them  that  were  bold- 
est and  recked  least  of  sacred  thinsfs.  To  ten  of 
such  Antonio  opened  his  counsel ;  and  by  great 
•-liewards  he  prevailed  on  them  to  come  into  the 
plan,  although  they  were,  for  all  their  boldness, 
very  sore  afraid  lest  they,  laying  hands  on  the 
bones,  should  be  smitten  as  was  he  who  touched 
the  Ark  of  the  Covenant.  Therefore  Antonio 
said,  "  I  alone  will  lay  hands  on  the  golden 
casket ;  the  rest  of  you  shall  but  hold  me  harm- 
less while  I  take  it." 

"  But  if  the  Lord  Archbishop  will  not  let  it  go  ?  " 
"The  Lord  Archbishop,"  said  Tommasino, 
"  will  let  it  go."  For  Tommasino  did  not  love 
the  Archbishop,  because  he  would  not  remove 
the  sentence  of  excommunication  which  he  had 
laid  upon  Antonio  and  Tommasino  on  the  prayer 
of  the  Abbot  of  St.  Frisian's. 


l66     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Now  when  the  feast  of  St.  Frisian  was  come, 
the  Lord  Archbishop,  who  had  ridden  from  the 
city  on  the  eve  of  the  feast,  and  had  lodged  in 
the  house  of  the  priests  that  served  the  church, 
went  with  all  his  train  into  the  church,  and,  the 
rest  standing  afar  off  and  veiling  their  eyes,  took 
from  the  wall  of  the  church,  near  by  the  High 
Altar,  the  golden  casket  that  held  the  bones  of 
the  blessed  St.  Frisian.  And  he  wrapped  the 
casket  in  a  rich  cloth  and  held  it  high  before  him 
in  his  two  hands.  And  when  the  people  had 
worshipped,  the  Archbishop  left  the  church  and 
entered  his  chair  and  passed  through  the  village 
of  Rilano,  the  priests  and  attendants  going  first, 
and  twelve  of  the  Duke's  Guard,  whom  the  Duke 
had  sent,  following  after.  Great  was  the  throng 
of  folk,  come  from  all  the  country  round  to  "gaze 
on  the  casket  and  on  the  procession  of  the  Lord 
Archbishop;  and  most  devout  of  them  all  was 
Martolo,  who  rested  on  his  knees  from  the  mo- 
ment the  procession  left  the  church  till  it  was 
clear  of  the  village.  And  Martolo  was  still  on 
his  knees  when  he  beheld  go  by  him  a  party  of 
peasants,  all,  save   one,  tall   and   powerful   men, 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   B»NES.    167 

wearing  peasants'  garb  and  having  their  faces 
overshadowed  by  large  hats.  These  men  also 
had  knelt  as  the  casket  passed,  but  they  had 
risen,  and  were  marching  shoulder  to  shoulder 
behind  the  men  of  the  Duke's  Guard,  a  peasant 
behind  every  pikeman.  Martolo  gazed  long  at 
them ;  then  he  moistened  his  lips  and  crossed 
himself,    murQiuring,    "  What    does    this    thing 

mean?     Now  God  forbid !"     And,  breaking 

'f^  thus,  he  also  rose  and  went  to  the  house  of 
his  father,  sore  vexed  and  troubled  to  know  what 
the  thing  might  mean.  But  he  spoke  of  it  to 
none,  no,  not  to  his  father,  observing  the  vow  of 
secrecy  in  all  matters  which  he  had  made  to 
Count  Antonio. 

At  the  bounds  of  the  village  the  greater  part 
of  the  people  ceased  to  follow  the  procession 
of  the  sacred  bones,  and,  having  received  the 
Archbishop's  blessing,  turned  back  to  their  own 
homes,  where  they  feasted  and  made  merry ; 
but  the  twelve  peasants  whom  Martolo  had 
seen  followed  the  procession  v/hen  it  set  forth 
for  the  next  village,  distant  three  miles  on  the 
road   to   Firmola.     Their    air    manifested    great 


lG8      TI^   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

devotion,  for  they  walked  with  heads  bent  on 
their  breasts  and  downcast  eyes,  and  they  spoke 
not  once  on  the  way ;  but  each  kept  close  behind 
a  pikeman.  When  the  procession  had  gone 
something  more  than  a  mile  from  the  village  of 
Rilano,  it  came  where  a  little  stream  crosses 
the  highway ;  and  the  rains  having  been  heavy 
for  a  week  before,  the  stream  was  swollen  and 
the  ford  deeper  than  it  was  wont  to  be.  There- 
fore the  ofihcer  of  the  Guard,  thinking  of  no 
danger,  bade  six  of  his  men  lay  down  their 
pikes  and  go  lift  the  Archbishop's  chair  over 
the  ford,  lest  the  Archbishop  sbould  be  wetted 
by  the  water.  And  on  hearing  this  order,  the 
tallest  among  the  peasants  put  his  hand  up  to 
his  hat  and  twisted  the  feather  of  it  between 
his  thumb  and  his  forefinger:  and  the  shortest 
of  them  whispered,  "  The  sign  !  The  sign  !  " 
while  every  man  of  them  drew  a  great  dagger 
from  under  his  habit  and  held  it  behind  his 
back.  Now  by  this  time  the  priests  and  attend- 
ants had  passed  the  ford ;  and  one-half  of  the 
Guard  had  laid  down  their  pikes  and  were  gone 
to  raise  the  Archbishop's   chair,  the   remainder 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   SACRED   BONES.    169 

standing  at  their  ease,  leaning  on  their  pikes 
and  talking  to  one  another.  Again  the  tallest 
peasant  twisted  the  feather  in  his  hat ;  and 
without  speech  or  cry  the  peasants  darted  for- 
ward. Six  of  them  seized  the  pikes  that  lay 
on  the  ground ;  the  remaining  six  sprang  like 
wild-cats  on  the  backs  of  the  pikemen,  circling 
the  necks  of  ^  the  pikemen  with  their  arms, 
pulling  them  back  and  coming  near  to  throt- 
tiiiig  them,  so  that  the  pikemen,  utterly  amazed 
and  taken  full  at  disadvantage,  staggered  and 
fell  backward,  while  the  peasants  got  on  the  top 
of  them  and  knelt  on  their  breasts  and  set  the 
great  daggers  at  their  hearts.  While  this  passed 
on  the  road,  the  remainder  of  Antonio's  band 
— for  such  were  the  peasants — rushed  into  the 
stream  and  compelled  the  unarmed  pikemen  to 
set  down  the  Archbishop's  chair  in  the  midst, 
so  that  the  water  came  in  at  the  windows  of 
the  chair;  and  the  pikemen,  held  at  bay  with 
their  own  pikes,  sought  to  draw  their  poniards, 
but  Antonio  cried,  "  Slay  any  that  draw  !  "  And 
he   came  to  the  chair  and  opened  the   door  of 

it,  and,  using  as  little  force  as  he  might,  he  laid 
12 


170 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


hands  on  the  casket  that  held  the  sacred  bones, 
and  wrested  it  from  the  feeble  hands  of  the 
Archbishop.  Then  he  and  his  men,  standing  in 
line,  stepped  backwards  with  the  pikes  levelled 
in  front  of  them  till  they  came  out  of  the  water 
and  on  to  the  dry  road  again ;  and  one  pikeman 
rushed  at  Antonio,  but  Tommasino,  sparing  to 
kill  him,  caught  him  a  buffet  on  the  side  of  the 
head  with  a  pike,  and  he  fell  like  a  log  in  the 
water,  and  had  been  drowned,  but  that  two  of 
his  comrades  lifted  him.  Then  all  twelve  of  the 
band  being  together — for  the  first  six  had  risen 
now  from  off  the  six  pikemen,  having  forced 
them,  on  pain  of  instant  death,  to  deliver  over 
their  pikes  to  them — Antonio,  with  the  casket  in 
his  hands,  spoke  in  a  loud  voice,  "  I  thank  God 
that  no  man  is  dead  over  this  business ;  but  if 
you  resist,  you  shall  die  one  and  all.  Go  to  the 
city ;  tell  the  Duke  that  I,  Antonio  of  Monte 
Velluto,  have  the  bones  of  the  blessed  St.  Frisian, 
and  carry  them  with  me  to  my  hiding-place  in 
the  highest  parts  of  the  hills.  But  if  he  will 
swear  by  these  bones  that  I  hold,  and  by  his 
princely  word,  that  he  will  not  suffer  the  Lady 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    171 

Lucia  to  take  the  vows,  nor  will  constrain 
her  to  wed  any  man,  but  will  restore  her  to 
her  own  house  and  to  her  estate,  then  let  him 
send  the  Archbishop  again,  and  I  will  deliver  up 
the  sacred  bones.  But  if  he  will  not  swear,  then, 
as  God  lives,  to-morrow,  at  midnight,  I  will  cause 
a  great  fire  to  be  kindled  on  the  top  of  the  hills — 
a  fire  whose  fUme  you  shall  see  from  the  walls  of 
the  city — and  in  that  fire  will  I  consume  the 
'•^sacred  bones,  and  I  will  scatter  the  ashes  of  them 
to  the  four  winds.  Go  and  bear  the  message 
that  I  give  you  to  the  Duke." 

And,  having  thus  said,  Antonio,  with  his  men, 
turned  and  went  back  at  a  run  along  the  road 
by  which  they  had  come ;  but  to  the  village  of 
Rilano  they  did  not  go,  but  turned  aside  before 
they  came  to  it,  and,  coming  to  the  farm  of  one 
who  knew  Antonio,  they  bought  of  him,  paying 
him  in  good  coin  of  the  Duchy,  three  horses, 
which  Antonio,  Tommasino,  and  Bena  mounted  ; 
and  they  three  rode  hard  for  the  hills,  the  rest 
following  as  quickly  as  they  might;  so  that  by 
nightfall  they  were  all  safely  assembled  in  their 
hiding-place,  and    with    them    the   bones   of   the 


1/2 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


blessed  St.  Frisian.  But  they  told  not  yet  to 
the  rest  of  the  band  what  it  was  that  Antonio 
carried  under  his  cloak ;  nor  did  Martolo,  when 
he  returned  from  Rilano,  ask  what  had  befallen, 
but  he  crossed  himself  many  times  and  wore  a 
fearful  look. 

But  Tommasino  came  to  Antonio  and  said  to 
him,  "  Why  did  you  not  ask  also  pardon  for  all 
of  us,  and  for  yourself  the  hand  of  Lucia?" 

"  A  great  thing,  and  a  thing  that  troubles 
me,  I  have  done  already,"  answered  Antonio. 
"  Therefore  I  will  ask  nothing  for  myself,  and 
nothing  may  I  ask  for  you  or  for  my  friends. 
But  if  I  ask  nothing  save  that  right  and  justice 
be  done,  it  may  be  that  my  sin  in  laying  hands 
on  the  sacred  bones  will  be  the  less." 

Now  after  Antonio  and  his  men  were  gone, 
the  Archbishop's  train  stayed  long  by  the  stream 
on  the  road,  lamenting  and  fearing  to  go  forward. 
Yet  at  last  they  went  forward,  and  being  come 
to  the  next  village  found  all  the  people  awaiting 
them  at  the  bounds.  And  when  the  people  saw 
the  disorder  of  the  procession,  and  that  the  pike- 
men   had    no   pikes,   they   ran   forward,   eagerly 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED  BONES.    173 

asking  what  had  befallen ;  and  learning  of  the 
calamity,  they  were  greatly  afraid  and  cursed 
Antonio ;  and  many  of  them  accompanied  the 
Archbishop  on  his  way  to  the  city,  whence  he 
came  towards  evening.  A  great  concourse  of 
people  awaited  his  coming  there,  and  the  Duke 
himself  sat  on  a  lofty  seat  in  the  great  square, 
prepared  to  jjeceive  the  sacred  bones,  and  go 
with  them  to  the  Cathedral,  where  they  were  to 
.  Be  exposed  to  the  gaze  of  the  people  at  High 
Mass.  And  they  set  the  Archbishop's  chair  down 
before  the  Duke's  seat,  and  the  Archbishop  came 
and  stood  before  the  Duke,  and  his  priests  and 
the  pikemen  with  him.  And  the  Duke  started 
up  from  his  seat,  crying,  "  What  ails  you  ? "  and 
sank  back  again,  and  sat  waiting  to  hear  what  the 
Archbishop  should  say. 

Then  the  Archbishop,  his  robes  still  damp  and 
greatly  disordered,  his  limbs  trembling  in  anger 
and  in  fear,  raised  his  voice ;  and  all  the  multitude 
in  the  square  was  silent  while  he  declared  to  His 
Highness  what  things  Count  Antonio  had  done, 
and  rehearsed  the  message  that  he  had  sent.  But 
when    the   Archbishop    told    how   Antonio    had 


174     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

sworn  that  as  God  lived  he  would  scatter  the 
ashes  of  the  sacred  bones  to  the  winds,  the  men 
caught  their  breath  with  a  gasp,  while  the  women 
murmured  affrightedly,  "  Christ  save  us  ;  "  and 
Duke  Valentine  dug  the  nails  of  his  hand,  where- 
on his  head  rested,  into  the  flesh  of  his  cheek. 
For  all  the  city  held  that,  according  to  the  words 
St.  Frisian  himself  had  uttered  before  he  suffered, 
the  power  and  prosperity  of  the  Duchy  and  the 
favour  of  Heaven  to  it  rested  on  the  presence 
among  them  and  the  faithful  preservation  and 
veneration  of  those  most  holy  relics.  And  the 
Archbishop,  having  ended  the  message,  cried, 
"  God  pardon  my  lips  that  repeat  such  words," 
and  fell  on  his  knees  before  Duke  Valentine,  cry- 
ing, "Justice  on  him,  my  lord,  justice!"  And 
many  in  the  throng  echoed  his  cry  ;  but  others, 
and  among  them  a  great  part  of  the  apprenticed 
lads  who  loved  Antonio,  muttered  low  one  to 
another,  "  But  the  Duke  has  taken  his  sweetheart 
from  him,"  and  they  looked  on  the  Duke  with  no 
favourable  eye. 

Then  Duke  Valentine  rose  from  his  seat  and 
stood  on  the  topmost  step  that  led  to  it,  and  he 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE  SACRED   BONES.    175 

called  sundry  of  his  lords  and  officers  round  him, 
and  then  he  beckoned  for  silence,  and  he  said, 
"  Before  the  sun  sets  to-morrow,  the  Lady  Lucia 
shall  take  the  vows ; "  and  he,  with  his  train,  took 
their  way  to  the  palace,  the  pikemen  clearing-  a 
path  for  them.  And  now  indeed  was  silence  ;  for 
all  marvelled  and  were  struck  dumb  that  the 
Duke  said  naught  concerning  the  bones  of  St. 
Frisian,  and  they  searched  one  another's  faces  for 
the  meaning  of  his  words.  But  the  Archbishop 
arose,  and,  speaking  to  no  man,  went  to  the 
Cathedral,  and  knelt  before  the  altar  in  the 
chapel  of  St.  Frisian,  and  there  abode  on  his 
knees. 

Surely  never,  from  that  day  until  this  hour, 
has  such  a  night  passed  in  the  city  of  Firmola. 
For  the  Duke  sent  orders  that  every  man  of  his 
Guard  should  be  ready  to  start  at  break  of  day  in 
pursuit  of  Antonio,  and  through  the  hours  of  the 
evening  they  were  busied  in  preparing  their  pro- 
visions and  accoutrements.  But  their  looks  were 
heavy  and  their  tongues  tied,  for  they  knew, 
every  man  of  them,  that  though  the  Duke  might 
at  the  end  take  Antonio,  yet  he  could  not  come 


1^6     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

at  him  before  the  time  that  Antonio  had  said. 
And  this  the  townsmen  knew  well  also ;  and  they 
gathered  themselves  in  groups  in  the  great 
square,  sajang,  "  Before  the  Duke  comes  at  him, 
the  sacred  bones  will  be  burnt,  and  what  will 
then  befall  the  Duchy  ?  "  And  those  who  were 
friendly  to  Antonio,  foremost  among  them  being 
the  apprenticed  lads,  spread  themselves  here 
and  there  among  the  people,  asking  cunningly 
whether  it  concerned  the  people  of  Firmola  more 
that  the  blessing  of  St.  Frisian  should  abide  with 
them,  or  that  a  reluctant  maiden  should  be  forced 
to  take  the  veil ;  and  some  grew  bold  to  whisper 
under  their  breath  that  the  business  was  a  foul 
one,  and  that  Heaven  did  not  send  beauty  and 
love  that  priests  should  bury  them  in  convent 
walls.  And  the  girls  of  the  city,  ever  most  bold 
by  reason  of  their  helplessness,  stirred  up  the 
young  men  who  courted  them,  leading  them  on 
and  saying,  "  He  is  a  true  lover  who  risks  his 
soul  for  his  love ;  "  or,  "  I  would  I  had  one  who 
would  steal  the  bones  of  St.  Frisian  for  my  sake, 
but  none  such  have  I : "  with  other  stirring  and 
inflaming  taunts,  recklessly  flung  from  pouting 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    177 

lips  and  from  under  eyes  that  challenged.  And 
all  the  while  Duke  Valentine  sat  alone  in  his 
cabinet,  listening  to  the  tumult  that  sounded  with 
muffled  din  through  the  walls  of  the  palace. 

Now  there  was  in  the  city  a  certain  furrier 
named  Peter,  a  turbulent  fellow  Vvho  had  been 
put  out  of  his  craft-guild  because  he  would  not 
abide  by  the  laws  of  the  craft,  and  lived  now  as 
he  best  could,  being  maintained  in  large  measure 
"(Ty  those  vvho  listened  to  his  empty  and  seditious 
conversation.  This  man,  loving  naught  that 
there  was  worthy  of  love  in  Count  Antonio,  yet 
loved  him  because  he  defied  the  Duke ;  and 
about  midnight,  having  drunk  much  wine,  he 
came  into  the  square  and  gathered  together  the 
apprentices,  saying,  "  I  have  a  matter  to  say  to 
you — and  to  you — and  to  you,"  till  there  were 
many  scores  of  them  round  him :  then  he 
harangued  them,  and  more  came  round ;  and 
when  at  last  Peter  cried,  "  Give  us  back  the 
sacred  bones ! "  a  thousand  voices  answered 
him,  "Aye,  give  us  back  the  bones!"  And 
when  the  pikcmen  would  have  seized  him,  men, 
and  women  also,  made  a  ring  round  him,  so  that 


1 78     THE  CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO. 

he  could  not  be  taken.  And  sober  men  also,  of 
age  and  substance,  hearkened  to  him,  saying, 
"  He  is  a  knave,  but  he  speaks  truth  now."  So 
that  a  very  great  throng  assembled,  every  man 
having  a  staff,  and  many  also  knives;  and  to 
those  that  had  not  knives,  the  women  and  girls 
brought  them,  thrusting  them  into  their  hands ; 
nay,  sundry  priests  also  w^ere  among  the  people, 
moaning  and  wringing  their  hands,  and  saying 
that  the  favour  of  St.  Frisian  would  be  lost  for 
ever  to  the  city.  And  the  square  was  thronged, 
so  that  a  man  could  not  move  unless  all  moved, 
nor  raise  his  hand  to  his  head  save  by  the  favour 
of  his  neighbour.  Yet  presently  the  whole  mass 
began  to  move,  like  a  great  wave  of  water, 
towards  the  Palace  of  the  Duke,  where  the 
pikemen  stood  in  ranks,  ready  now  to  go  against 
Antonio.  Suddenly  arose  a  cry,  "  The  Arch- 
bishop comes !  "  and  the  venerable  man  was  seen, 
led  through  the  crowd  by  Peter  and  some  more, 
who  brought  him  and  set  him  in  the  front  ranks 
of  the  people ;  and  Peter  cried  boldly,  "  Where 
is  the  Duke?"  But  the  Captain  of  the  Guard 
came  forward,  sword  in  hand,  and   bade  Peter 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    179 

be  still,  cursing  him  for  insolence,  and  shouted 
that  the  people  should  disperse  on  pain  of  His 
Highness's  displeasure.  "Where  is  the  Duke? 
Let  him  come  out  to  us!"  cried  Peter;  and  the 
captain,  despising  him,  struck  him  lightly  with 
the  flat  of  his  sword.  But  Peter  with  a  cry  of 
rage  struck  the  captain  a  great  blow  with  his 
staff,  and  the  captain  staggered  back,  blood 
^flowing  from  his  head.  Such  was  the  beginning 
.af-  the  fray;  for  in  an  instant  the  pikemen  and 
the  people  had  joined  battle :  men  cried  in 
anger  and  women  in  fright :  blood  flowed,  and 
sundry  on  both  sides  fell  and  rose  no  more ;  and 
the  Archbishop  came  near  to  being  trodden 
under  foot  till  his  friends  and  the  priests 
gathered  round  him ;  and  when  he  saw  that 
men  were  being  slain,  he  wept. 

Then  the  lord  Lorenzo  hastened  to  the  cab- 
inet of  the  Duke,  whom  he  found  pacing  up  and 
down,  gnawing  his  finger-nails,  and  told  him  of 
what  was  done  outside. 

"  I  care  not,"  said  the  Duke.  "  She  shall  take 
the  vows !     Let  the  pikemen  scatter  them." 

Lorenzo  then  besought  him,  telling  him  that 


l8o     THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

all  the  city  was  in  arms,  and  that  the  conflict 
would  be  great.  But  the  Duke  said  still,  "  She 
shall  take  the  vows ! "  Nevertheless  he  went 
with  Lorenzo,  and  came  forth  on  to  the  top- 
most step  of  the  portico.  And  when  the  people 
saw  him  they  ceased  for  a  moment  to  assail 
the  pikemen,  and  cried  out,  "  Give  us  back  the 
sacred  bones ! " 

"  Scatter  these  fellows !  "  said  the  Duke  to  the 
Captain  of  the  Guard. 

"  My  lord,  they  are  too  many.  And  if  we 
scatter  them  now,  yet  when  we  have  gone 
against  Count  Antonio,  they  may  do  what  they 
will  with  the  city." 

The  Duke  stood  still,  pale,  and  again  gnaw- 
ing his  nails ;  and  the  pikemen,  finding  the  fight 
hard,  gave  back  before  the  people ;  and  the 
people  pressed  on. 

Then  Peter  the  furrier  came  forward,  and 
the  hottest  with  him,  and  mocked  the  pikemen ; 
and  one  of  the  pikemen  suddenly  thrust  Peter 
through  with  his  pike,  and  the  fellow  fell  dead  ; 
on  which  a  great  cry  of  rage  rose  from  all  the 
people,  and  they  rushed  on  the  pikemen  again 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    i8l 

and  slew  and  were  slain ;  and  the  fight  rolled  up 
the  steps  even  to  the  very  feet  of  the  Duke 
himself.  And  at  last,  able  no  longer  to  contend 
with  all  the  city,  he  cried,  "  Hold !  I  will  restore 
the  sacred  bones ! "  But  the  people  would  not 
trust  him  and  one  cried,  "  Bring  out  the  lady 
here  before  us  and  set  her  free,  or  we  will  burn 
the  palace."  And  the  Archbishop  came  sudden- 
ly and  threw  himself  on  his  knees  before  the 
Duke,  beseeching  him  that  no  more  blood  might 
be  shed,  but  that  the  Lady  Lucia  should  be  set 
free.  And  the  Duke,  now  greatly  afraid,  sent 
hastily  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard  and  ten  men, 
who  came  to  the  convent  where  Lucia  was,  and, 
brooking  no  delay,  carried  her  with  them  in  her 
bedgown,  and  brought  and  set  her  beside  the 
Duke  in  the  portico  of  the  palace.  Then  the 
Duke  raised  his  hand  to  heaven,  and  before  all 
the  people  he  said,  "  Behold,  she  is  free !  Let 
her  go  to  her  own  house,  and  her  estate  shall  be 
hers  again.  And  by  my  princely  word  and  these 
same  holy  bones,  I  swear  that  she  shall  not  take 
the  vows,  neither  will  I  constrain  her  to  wed  any 
man."     And   when   he  had  said   this,  he    turned 


1 82      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

sharply  round  on  his  heel,  and,  looking  neither 
to  the  right  nor  to  the  left,  went  through  the 
great  hall  to  his  cabinet  and  shut  the  door.  For 
his  heart  was  very  sore  that  he  must  yield  to 
Antonio's  demand,  and  for  himself  he  had  rather 
a  thousand  times  that  the  bones  of  St.  Frisian 
had  been  burnt. 

Now  when  the  Duke  was  gone,  the  people 
brought  the  Lady  Lucia  to  her  own  house, 
driving  out  the  steward  whom  the  Duke  had 
set  there,  and,  this  done,  they  came  to  the  Arch- 
bishop, and  would  not  suffer  him  to  rest  or  to 
delay  one  hour  before  he  set  forth  to  carry  the 
Duke's  promise  to  Antonio.  This  the  Arch- 
bishop was  ready  to  do,  for  all  that  he  was 
weary.  But  first  he  sent  Lorenzo  to  ask  the 
Duke's  pleasure ;  and  Lorenzo,  coming  to  the 
Duke,  prayed  him  to  send  two  hundred  pikes 
with  the  Archbishop.  "For,"  said  he,  "your 
Highness  has  sworn  nothing  concerning  what 
shall  befall  Antonio ;  and  so  soon  as  he  has 
delivered  up  the  bones,  I  will  set  on  him  and 
bring  him  alive  or  dead  to  your  Highness." 

But    the    Duke    would    not    hearken.     "  The 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.   183 

fellow's  name  is  like  stale  lees  of  wine  in  my 
mouth,"  said  he.  "  Ten  of  my  pikemen  lie  dead 
in  the  square,  and  more  of  the  citizens.  1  will 
lose  no  more  men  over  it." 

"  Yet  how  great  a  thing  if  we  could  take 
him!" 

"  I  will  take  him  at  my  own  time  and  in  my 
own  way,"  said  the  Duke.  "  In  God's  name, 
leave  me  now." 

***  Lorenzo  therefore  got  from  the  Duke  leave 
for  but  ten  men  to  go  with  the  Archbishop,  and 
to  go  himself  if  he  would.  And  thus  they  set 
out,  exhorted  by  the  people,  who  followed  them 
beyond  the  bounds  of  the  city,  to  make  all  speed. 
And  when  they  were  gone,  the  people  came  back 
and  took  up  the  bodies  of  the  dead ;  while  the 
pikemen  also  took  up  the  bodies  of  such  of  their 
comrades  as  were  slain. 

Yet  had  Duke  Valentine  known  what  passed 
on  the  hills  while  the  city  was  in  tumult,  it  may 
not  be  doubted,  for  all  his  vexation,  that  he 
would  have  sent  the  two  hundred  whom  Lorenzo 
asked  :  never  had  he  a  fairer  chance  to  take  An- 
tonio.    For  when  the  Count  and  those  who  had 


1 84     THE   CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

been  with  him  to  Rilano  were  asleep,  Antonio's 
head  resting  on  the  golden  casket,  a  shepherd 
came  to  the  rest  of  the  band  and  told  them  what 
had  been  done  and  how  all  the  country  was  in  an 
uproar.  Then  a  debate  arose  amongst  the  band, 
for,  though  they  were  lawless  men,  yet  they 
feared  God,  and  thought  with  great  dread  on 
what  Antonio  had  sworn ;  so  that  presently  they 
came  altogether,  and  aroused  Antonio,  and  said 
to  him,  "  My  lord,  you  have  done  much  for  us, 
and  it  may  be  that  we  have  done  somewhat  for 
you.  But  we  will  not  suffer  the  sacred  bones  to 
be  burnt  and  scattered  to  the  winds." 

"  Except  the  Duke  yields,  I  have  sworn  it, 
as  God  lives,"  answered  Antonio. 

"  We  care  not.  It  shall  not  be,  no,  not  though 
you  and  we  die,"  said  they. 

"  It  is  well ;  I  hear,"  said  Antonio,  bowing  his 
head. 

"  In  an  hour,"  said  they,  "  we  will  take  the 
bones,  if  you  will  not  yourself,  my  lord,  send 
them  back." 

"  Again  I  hear,"  said  Antonio,  bowing  his 
head ;  and  the  band  went  back  to  the  fire  round 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.   185 

which   they  had    been  sitting,  all   save  Martolo, 
who  came  and  put  his  hand  in  Antonio's  hand. 
"How  now,  Martolo?"  asked  Antonio. 
"  What  you  will,  I  will,  my  lord,"  said  Mar- 
tolo.    For  though  he  trembled  when  he  thought 
of  the  bones  of  St.  Frisian,  yet  he  clung  always 
to  Antonio.     As  for  Bena  and  the  others  of  the 
ten   who  had"^gone    to  Rilano,  they  would  now 
•^-have  burnt  not  the    bones  only,  but  the  blessed 
'  Jskint  himself,  had  Antonio  bidden  them.     Hard 
men,  in  truth,  were  they,  and  the  more  reckless 
now,  because  no  harm  had    come  to  them  from 
the  seizing  of  the  bones ;  moreover  Antonio  had 
given    them    good    wine    for    supper,    and    they 
drank  well. 

Now  the  rest  of  the  band  being  gone  back 
to  their  fire  and  the  night  being  very  dark,  in 
great  silence  and  caution  Antonio,  Tommasino, 
Martolo,  Bena,  and  their  fellows — being  thirteen 
in  all — rose  from  their  places,  and  taking  naught 
with  them  but  their  swords  (save  that  Antonio 
carried  the  golden  casket),  they  stole  forth  from 
the  camp,  and  set  their  faces  to  climb  yet  higher 

into  the  heights  of  the  hills.     None  spoke ;   one 
13 


l86     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

following  another,  they  climbed  the  steep  path 
that  led  up  the  mountain  side;  and  when  they 
had  been  going  for  the  space  of  an  hour,  they 
heard  a  shout  from  far  below  them. 

"  Our  fiight  is  known,"  said  Tommasino. 

"  Shall  we  stand  and  meet  them,  my  lord  ?  " 
asked  Bena. 

"  Nay,  not  yet,"  said  Antonio  ;  and  the  thir- 
teen went  forward  again  at  the  best  speed  they 
could. 

Now  they  were  in  a  deep  gorge  between 
lofty  cliffs ;  and  the  gorge  still  tended  upwards ; 
and  at  length  they  came  to  the  place  which  is 
now  named  "  Antonio's  Neck."  There  the  rocks 
came  nigh  to  meeting  and  utterly  barring  the 
path ;  yet  there  is  a  way  that  one  man,  or  at 
most  two,  may  pass  through  at  one  time.  Along 
this  narrow  tongue  they  passed,  and,  coming  to 
the  other  side,  found  a  level  space  on  the  edge 
of  a  great  precipice,  and  Antonio  pointing  over 
the  precipice,  they  saw  in  the  light  of  the  day, 
which  now  was  dawning,  the  towers  and  spires 
of  Firmola  very  far  away  in  the  plain  below. 

"  It   is   a    better   place  for   the  fire  than  the 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   SACRED   BONES.    187 

other,"  said  Antonio ;  and  Bena  laughed,  while 
Martolo  shivered. 

"  Yet  we  risk  being  hindered  by  these  fellows 
behind,"  said  Tommasino. 

"  Nay,  I  think  not,"  said  Antonio. 

Then  he  charged  Tommasino  and  all  of  them 
to  busy  themselves  in  collecting  such  dry  sticks 
and  brushwood  as  they  could  ;  and  there  was 
'.^bundance  near,  for  the  fir-trees  grew  even  so 
fri^h.  And  one  of  the  men  also  went  and  set  a 
snare,  and  presently  caught  a  wild  goat,  so  that 
they  had  meat.  But  Antonio  took  Bena  and  set 
him  on  one  side  of  the  way  where  the  neck 
opened  out  into  the  level  space;  and  he  stood  on 
the  other  side  of  the  way  himself.  And  when 
they  stretched  out  their  arms,  the  point  of  Bena's 
sword  reached  the  hilt  of  Antonio's.  And  An- 
tonio smiled,  saying  to  Bena,  "  He  had  need  to 
be  a  thin  man,  Bena,  that  passes  between  you 
and  me." 

And  Bena  nodded  his  head  at  Count  Anto- 
nio, answering,  "  Indeed  this  is  as  strait  as  the 
way  to  heaven,  my  lord,  and  leads,  as  it  seems 
to  me,  in  much  the  same  direction." 


l88      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Thus  Antonio  and  Bena  waited  in  the  shelter 
of  the  rocks  at  the  opening  of  the  neck,  while 
the  rest  built  up  a  great  pile  of  wood.  Then, 
having  roasted  the  meat,  they  made  their  break- 
fast, Martolo  carrying  portions  to  Antonio  and 
to  Bena.  And,  their  pursuers  not  knowing  the 
path  so  well  and  therefore  moving  less  quickly, 
it  was  but  three  hours  short  of  noon  when  they 
heard  the  voices  of  men  from  the  other  side  of 
the  neck.  And  Antonio  cried  straightway, 
"  Come  not  through  at  your  peril !  Yet  one 
may  come  and  speak  with  me." 

Then  a  great  fellow,  whose  name  is  variously 
given,  though  most  of  those  whom  I  have  ques- 
tioned call  him  Sancho,  came  through  the  neck, 
and,  reaching  the  end  of  it,  found  the  crossed 
swords  of  Antonio  and  Bena  like  a  fence  against 
his  breast.  And  he  saw  also  the  great  pile  of 
wood,  and  resting  now  on  the  top  of  it  the 
golden  casket  that  held  the  sacred  bones.  And 
he  said  to  Antonio,  "  My  lord,  we  love  you  ;  but 
sooner  than  that  the  bones  should  be  burnt,  we 
will  kill  you  and  all  that  are  with  you." 

But  Antonio    answered,   "  I    also   love    you, 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   SACRED   BONES.    189 

Sancho ;  yet  you  and  all  your  company  shall  die 
sooner  than  my  oath  shall  be  broken." 

"  Your  soul  shall  answer  for  it,  my  lord,"  said 
Sancho. 

"  You  speak  truly,"  answered  Antonio. 

Then  Sancho  went  back  through  the  neck  and 
took  counsel  ,,with  his  fellows ;  and  they  made 
him  their  chief,  and  promised  to  be  obedient  to 
•'all  that  he  ordered.  And  he  said,  "  Let  two  run 
at  their  highest  speed  through  the  neck :  it  may 
be  they  will  die,  but  the  bones  must  be  saved. 
And  after  them,  two  more,  and  again  two.  And 
I  will  be  of  the  first  two." 

But  they  would  not  suffer  him  to  be  of  the 
first  two,  although  he  prevailed  that  he  should 
be  of  the  last  two.  And  the  six,  being  chosen, 
drew  their  swords  and  with  a  cry  rushed  into  the 
neck.  Antonio,  hearing  their  feet,  said  to  Bena, 
"  A  quick  blow  is  as  good  as  a  slow,  Bena."  And 
even  as  he  spoke  the  first  two  came  to  the  open- 
ing of  the  neck.  But  Antonio  and  Bena  struck 
at  them  before  they  came  out  of  the  narrowest 
part  or  could  wield  their  swords  freely ;  and  the 
second  two  coming  on,  Bena  struck  at  one  and 


190 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


wounded  him  in  the  breast,  and  he  wounded 
Bena  in  the  face  over  the  right  eye,  and  then 
Bena  slew  him  ;  while  Antonio  slew  his  man  at 
his  first  stroke.  And  the  fifth  man  and  Sancho, 
the  sixth,  coming  on,  Antonio  cried  loudly,  "  Are 
you  mad,  are  you  mad  ?  We  could  hold  the 
neck  against  a  hundred." 

But  they  would  not  stop,  and  Antonio  slew 
the  fifth,  and  Bena  was  in  the  act  to  strike  at 
Sancho,  but  Antonio  suddenly  dashed  Sancho's 
sword  from  his  hand,  and  caught  him  a  mighty 
buffet,  so  that  he  fell  sprawling  on  the  bodies  of 
the  five  that  were  dead. 

"  Go  back,  fool,  go  back  !  "  cried  Antonio. 

And  Sancho,  answering  nothing,  gathered 
himself  up  and  went  back ;  for  he  perceived  now 
that  not  with  the  loss  of  half  of  his  men  would  he 
get  by  Antonio  and  Bena ;  and  beyond  them 
stood  Tommasino  with  ten  whom  he  knew  to  be 
of  the  stoutest  of  the  band. 

"  It  is  a  sore  day's  work,  Bena,"  cried  An- 
tonio, looking  at  the  dead  bodies. 

"  If  a  man  be  too  great  a  fool  to  keep  himself 
alive,  my  lord,  he  must  die,"  answered  Bena ;  and 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   SACRED   BONES,    igi 

he  pushed  the  bodies  a  little  further  back  into  the 
neck  with  his  foot. 

Then  Sancho's  company  took  counsel  again ; 
for,  much  as  they  reverenced  the  sacred  bones, 
there  was  none  of  them  eager  to  enter  the  neck. 
Thus  they  were  at  a  loss,  till  the  shepherd  who 
had  come  along  with  them  spoke  to  Sancho,  say- 
ing,  "  At  the  cost  of  a  long  journey  you  may 
"'-^lome  at  him  ;  for  there  is  a  way  round  that  I  can 
i^ad  you  by.  But  you  will  not  traverse  it  in  less 
than  twelve  or  thirteen  hours,  taking  necessary 
rest  by  the  way." 

But  Sancho,  counting  the  time,  cried,  "  It  will 
serve !  For  although  a  thousand  came  against 
him,  yet  the  Count  will  not  burn  the  bones  before 
the  time  of  his  oath." 

Therefore  he  left  fifteen  men  to  hold  the  neck, 
in  case  Antonio  should  offer  to  return  back 
through  it,  and  with  the  rest  he  followed  the 
shepherd  in  great  stealth  and  quiet ;  by  reason 
of  which,  and  of  the  rock  between  them,  Antonio 
knew  not  what  was  done,  but  thought  that  the 
whole  company  lay  still  on  the  other  side  of  the 
neck. 


1^2      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Thus  the  day  wore  to  evening  as  the  Arch- 
bishop with  the  Lord  Lorenzo  and  the  guards 
came  to  the  spur  of  the  hills ;  and  here  they 
found  a  man  waiting,  who  cried  to  them,  "  Do 
you  bring  the  Duke's  promise  to  the  Count  An- 
tonio ?  " 

"  Yes,  we  bring  it,"  said  they. 

"  I  am  charged,"  said  he,  "  to  lead  the  Arch- 
bishop and  one  other  after  the  Count."  But 
since  the  Archbishop  could  not  climb  the  hills, 
being  old  and  weary,  Lorenzo  constrained  the 
man  to  take  with  him  four  of  the  Guards  be- 
sides ;  and  the  four  bore  the  Archbishop  along. 
Thus  they  were  led  through  the  secret  tracks 
in  the  hills,  and  these  Lorenzo  tried  to  engrave 
on  his  memory,  that  he  might  come  again. 
But  the  way  was  long  and  devious,  and  it  was 
hard  to  mark  it.  Thus  going,  they  came  to  the 
huts,  and  passing  the  huts,  still  climbed  wearily 
till  they  arrived  near  to  the  neck.  It  was  then 
night,  and,  as  they  guessed,  hard  on  the  time 
when  Antonio  had  sworn  to  burn  the  sacred 
bones ;  therefore  they  pressed  on  more  and 
more,  and   came   at  last  to   the   entrance   of  the 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    193 

neck.  Here  they  found  the  fifteen,  and  Lorenzo, 
running  up,  cried  aloud,  "  We  bring  the  prom- 
ise, we  bring  the  promise  !  " 

But  scarcely  had  he  spoken  these  words, 
when  a  sudden  great  shout  came  from  the  other 
side  of  the  neck ;  and  Lorenzo,  drawing  his 
sword,  rushed  into  the  neck,  the  fifteen  follow- 
ing, yet  leaving  a  space  between  him  and  them, 
'.J^st  they  should  see  him  fall,  pierced  by  Antonio 
atid  Bena.  And  Lorenzo  stumbled  and  fell  over 
the  five  dead  bodies  which  lay  in  the  way  of 
the  neck.  Uttering  a  cry,  "  What  are  these  ? " 
he  scrambled  again  to  his  feet,  and  passed  un- 
hurt through  the  mouth  of  the  neck,  and  the 
fifteen  followed  after  him,  while  the  Guards  sup- 
ported the  Archbishop  in  their  hands,  his  chair 
being  too  wide  to  pass  through  the  neck.  And 
when  thus  they  all  came  through,  wild  and 
strange  was  the  sight  they  saw.  For  it  chanced 
that  at  the  same  time  Sancho's  company  had 
completed  their  circuit,  and  had  burst  from  be- 
hind upon  Antonio  and  the  twelve.  And  when 
the  twelve  saw  them,  they  retreated  to  the  great 
pile  and  made  a  ring  round  it,  and  stood   there 


194 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


ready  to  die  rather  than  allow  Sancho's  men  to 
reach  the  pile.  It  was  then  midnight  and  the 
time  of  Count  Antonio's  oath.  Count  Antonio 
stood  on  the  top  of  the  great  pile ;  at  his  feet 
lay  the  golden  casket  containing  the  sacred 
bones,  and  in  his  hand  was  a  torch.  And  he 
cried  aloud,  "  Hold  them,  while  I  fire  the  pile ! " 
and  he  leapt  down  and  came  to  the  side  of  the 
pile  and  laid  his  torch  to  the  pile.  And  in 
an  instant  the  flames  shot  up,  for  the  pile  was 
dry. 

Now  when  Sancho's  men  saw  the  pile  alight, 
with  shouts  of  horror  and  of  terror  they  charged 
at  the  top  of  their  speed  against  the  twelve  who 
guarded  the  pile.  And  Lorenzo  and  his  men 
also  rushed  ;  but  the  cries  of  Sancho's  company, 
together  with  the  answering  defiance  of  the 
twelve,  drowned  the  cries  of  Lorenzo ;  and  An- 
tonio and  the  twelve  knew  not  that  Lorenzo 
was  come.  And  the  flames  of  the  pile  grew, 
and  the  highest  tongue  of  flame  licked  the  side 
of  the  golden  casket.  But  Antonio's  voice  rose 
above  all,  as  he  stood,  aye,  almost  within  the 
ambit  of  the  fire,  and  cried,  "  Hold  them  a  mo- 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.    105 

ment,  Tommasino — a  moment,  Bena — and  the 
thing  is  done  ! "  Then  Lorenzo  tore  his  casque 
from  his  head  and  flung  down  his  sword,  and 
rushed  unarmed  between  Antonio's  men  and 
Sancho's  men,  shouting  louder  than  he  had 
thought  ever  to  shout,  "  The  promise !  the 
promise  ! "  And  at  the  same  moment  (so  it  is 
told,  I  but  tell  it  as  it  is  told)  there  came  from 
'-Jieaven  a  great  flash  of  lightning,  which,  aiding 
the'  glare  of  the  flames,  fully  revealed  the  features 
of  Lorenzo.  Back  fell  Sancho's  men,  and  An- 
tonio's arrested  their  swords.  And  then  they 
all  cried  as  men  cry  in  great  joy,  "  The  prom- 
ise !  the  promise  !  "  And  for  a  moment  all  stood 
still  where  they  were.  But  the  flames  leapt 
higher ;  and,  as  Antonio  had  said,  they  were  seen 
by  the  great  throng  that  gazed  from  the  city 
walls;  and  they  were  seen  by  Duke  Valentine 
as  he  watched  from  the  wall  of  his  garden  by 
the  river ;  and  he  went  pale,  gnawing  his  nails. 
Then  the  Count  Antonio  sprang  on  the  burn- 
ing pile,  though  it  seemed  that  no  man  could 
pass  alive  through  it.  Yet  God  was  with  him, 
and  he  gained  the  top  of  it,  and,  stooping,  seized 


196     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  golden  casket  and  flung  it  down,  clear  of  the 
pile,  even  at  the  Lord  Lorenzo's  feet ;  and  when 
Lorenzo  sought  to  lift  it,  the  heat  of  it  blistered 
his  hands,  and  he  cried  out  with  pain.  But 
Count  Antonio,  choked  by  the  smoke,  his  hair 
and  his  eyebrows  scorched  by  the  fire,  stag- 
gered half-way  down  the  pile  and  there  sank  on 
his  knees.  And  there  he  had  died,  but  that 
Tommasino,  Bena,  and  Sancho,  each  eager  to 
outstrip  the  other,  rushed  in  and  drew  him 
forth,  and  fetched  water  and  gave  it  to  him,  so 
that  he  breathed  again  and  lived.  But  the  flames 
leapt  higher  and  higher ;  and  they  said  on  the 
city  walls,  "God  help  us!  God  help  us!  The 
sacred  bones  are  burnt !  "  And  women,  aye,  and 
men  too,  fell  to  weeping,  and  there  was  great 
sorrow,  fear,  and  desolation.  And  the  Duke 
gnawed  his  nails  even  to  the  quick,  and  spat  the 
blood  from  his  mouth,  cursing  Antonio. 

But  Lorenzo,  having  perceived  that  the 
greater  number  was  against  Antonio,  cried  out 
to  Sancho's  men,  "  Seize  him  and  bring  him 
here ! "  For  the  Duke's  promise  carried  no 
safety  to  Antonio. 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE   SACRED   BONES.    197 

But  Sancho  answered  him,  "  Now  that  the 
sacred  bones  are  safe,  we  have  no  quarrel  with 
my  lord  Antonio  ;  "  and  he  and  his  men  went 
and  laid  down  their  swords  by  the  feet  of  i\.n- 
tonio,  where  he  lay  on  the  ground,  his  head  on 
Tommasino's  lap.  So  that  the  whole  band  were 
now  round  Antonio,  and  Lorenzo  had  but  four 
with  him. 

.;^     "  He   asks    war ! "    growled    Bena    to    Tom- 
t^asino.     "  Shall  he  not  have  war,  my  lord  ?  " 

And  Tommasino  laughed,  answering,  "  Here 
is  a  drunkard  of  blood  !  " 

But  Count  Antonio,  raising  himself,  said,  "  Is 
the  Archbishop  here  ?  " 

Then  Lorenzo  went  and  brought  the  Arch- 
bishop, who,  coming,  stood  before  Antonio,  and 
rehearsed  to  him  the  oath  that  Duke  Valentine 
had  taken,  and  told  him  how  the  Lady  Lucia 
was  already  free  and  in  her  own  house,  and 
made  him  aware  also  of  the  great  tumult  that 
had  happened  in  the  city.  And  Antonio  lis- 
tened to  his  tale  in  silence. 

Then  the  Archbishop  raised  a  hand  towards 
heaven  and    spoke   in   a  solemn   and   sad    voice, 


1^8      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Behold,  there  are  ten  of  the  Duke's  Guard 
dead  in  the  city,  and  there  are  twelve  of  the 
townsmen  dead  ;  and  here,  in  the  opening  of  the 
neck,  there  lie  dead  five  men  of  those  who  fol- 
lowed you,  my  lord.  Twenty-and-seven  men  are 
there  that  have  died  over  this  business.  I  pray 
more  have  not  died  in  the  city  since  I  set  forth. 
And  for  what  has  this  been  done,  my  lord  ? 
And  more  than  the  death  of  all  these  is  there. 
For  these  sacred  bones  have  been  foully  and 
irreligiously  stolen  and  carried  away,  used  with 
vile  irreverence  and  brought  into  imminent  haz- 
ard of  utter  destruction  :  and  had  they  been  de- 
stroyed and  their  ashes  scattered  to  the  four 
winds,  according  to  your  blasphemous  oath,  I 
know  not  what  would  have  befallen  the  country 
where  such  an  act  was  done.  And  for  what 
has  this  been  done,  my  lord  ?  It  has  been  done 
that  a  proud  and  violent  man  may  have  his  will, 
and  that  his  passion  may  be  satisfied.  Heavy 
indeed  is  the  burden  on  your  soul  my  lord  ; 
yes,  on  your  soul  is  the  weight  of  sacrilege  and 
of  much  blood." 

The  Archbishop  ceased,  and  his  hand  dropped 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   SACRED   BONES,    igg 

to  his  side.  The  flames  on  the  pile  were  burning 
low,  and  a  stillness  fell  on  all  the  company. 
But  at  last  Count  Antonio  rose  to  his  feet  and 
stood  with  his  elbow  on  Tommasino's  shoulder, 
leaning  on  Tommasino.  His  face  was  weary  and 
sad,  and  he  was  very  pale,  save  where  in  one 
spot  the  flame  had  scorched  his  cheek  to  an 
angry  red.  And  looking  round  on  the  Arch- 
»  bishop,  and  on  the  Lord  Lorenzo,  and  on  them 
'  ail,  he  answered  sadly,  "  In  truth,  my  Lord  Arch- 
bishop, my  burden  is  heavy.  For  I  am  an  out- 
law, and  excommunicated.  Twenty-and-seven 
men  have  died  through  my  act,  and  I  have  used 
the  sacred  bones  foully,  and  brought  them  into 
imminent  peril  of  total  destruction,  according  to 
my  oath.  All  this  is  true,  my  lord.  And  yet  I 
know  not.  For  Almighty  God,  whom  all  we, 
whether  honest  men  or  knaves,  men  of  law  or 
lawless,  humbly  worship — Almighty  God  has 
His  own  scales,  my  lord.  And  I  know  not 
which  thing  be  in  those  scales  the  heavier  ;  that 
twenty-and-seven  men  should  die,  and  that  the 
bones  of  the  blessed  St.  Frisian  should  be 
brought   in  peril,  aye,  or  should    be  utterly  de- 


200     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

stroyed  ;  or  again  that  one  weak  girl,  who  has 
no  protection  save  in  the  justice  and  pity  of 
men,  should  be  denied  justice  and  bereft  of  pity, 
and  that  no  man  should  hearken  to  her  weeping. 
Say,  my  lord — for  it  is  yours  to  teach  and  mine 
to  learn — which  of  these  things  should  God 
count  the  greater  sin  ?  And  for  myself  I  have 
asked  nothing  ;  and  for  my  friends  here,  whom 
I  love — yes,  even  those  I  have  killed  for  my 
oath's  sake,  I  loved — I  have  dared  to  ask  nothing. 
But  I  asked  only  that  justice  should  be  done  and 
mercy  regarded.  Where,  my  lord,  is  the  greater 
sin  ?  " 

But  the  Archbishop  answered  not  a  word  to 
Count  Antonio ;  but  he  and  the  Lord  Lorenzo 
came  and  lifted  the  golden  casket,  and,  no  man 
of  Antonio's  company  seeking  to  hinder  them, 
they  went  back  with  it  to  the  city  and  showed 
it  to  the  people ;  and  after  that  the  people  had 
rejoiced  greatly  that  the  sacred  bones,  which 
they  had  thought  to  be  destroyed,  were  safe, 
the  Archbishop  carried  the  golden  casket  back 
to  the  shrine  in  the  village  of  Rilano,  where  it 
rests   till   this   day.     But  Count  Antonio  buried 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   SACRED   BONES.   2OI 

the  five  men  of  his  band  whom  he  and  Bena 
had  slain,  and  with  the  rest  he  abode  still  in 
the  hills,  while  the  Lady  Lucia  dwelt  in  her 
own  house  in  the  city  ;  and  the  Duke,  honouring 
the  oath  which  he  had  sworn  before  all  the 
people,  did  not  seek  to  constrain  her  to  wed 
any  man,  and  restored  to  her  the  estate  that  he 
had  taken  from  her.  Yet  the  Duke  hated  Count 
•♦-Antonio  the  more  for  what  he  had  done,  and 
sought  the  more  eagerly  how  he  might  take  him 
and  put  him  to  death. 


14 


CHAPTER  VI. 

COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   HERMIT  OF  THE 
VAULT. 

Among  the  stories  concerning  the  Count  An- 
tonio which  were  told  to  me  in  answer  to  my 
questioning  (whereof  I  have  rejected  many  as 
being  no  better  than  idle  tales),  there  was  one 
that  met  me  often  and  yet  seemed  strange  and 
impossible  to  believe ;  for  it  was  said  that  he  had 
during  the  time  of  his  outlawry  once  spent 
several  days  in  the  vault  of  the  Peschetti,  and 
there  suffered  things  that  pass  human  under- 
standing. 

This  vault  lies  near  to  the  church  of  St.  John 
the  Theologian,  in  the  suburb  of  Baratesta,  on 
the  banks  of  the  river ;  and  the  Peschetti  had  a 
palace  hard  by,  and  were  a  family  of  high  no- 
bility, and  allied  by  blood  to  the  house  of  Monte 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE    HERMIT.         203 

Velluto.  But  I  could  find  no  warrant  for  the 
story  of  Antonio's  sojourn  in  the  vault,  and 
although  many  insisted  that  the  tale  was  true, 
yet  they  could  not  tell  how  nor  why  the  Count 
came  to  be  in  the  vault ;  until  at  length  I  chanced 
on  an  aged  woman  who  had  heard  the  truth  of 
the  matter  frsjn  her  grandmother,  and  she  made 
me  acquainted  with  the  story,  pouring  on  me  a 
""flood  of  garrulous  gossip,  from  which  I  have 
chosen  as  much  as  concerns  the  purpose.  And 
here  I  set  it  down ;  for  I  believe  it  to  be  true, 
and  I  would  omit  nothing  that  touches  the 
Count,  so  I  can  be  sure  that  what  I  write  is 
based  on  truth. 

When  Count  Antonio  had  dwelt  in  the  hills 
for  the  space  of  three  years  and  nine  months, 
it  chanced  that  Cesare,  last  of  the  Peschetti, 
died ;  and  he  made  a  will  on  his  death-bed 
whereby  he  bequeathed  to  Count  Antonio  his 
lands  and  also  a  store  of  money,  and  many 
ornaments  of  gold,  and  jewels ;  for  Antonio's 
mother  had  been  of  the  house  of  the  Peschetti, 
and  Cesare  loved  Antonio,  although  he  had  not 
dared  to  give  him  countenance  for  fear  of  the 


204 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


Duke's  anger;  yet,  knowing  himself  to  be  dying, 
he  bequeathed  everything  to  him,  for  the  Duke's 
wrath  could  not  hurt  a  dead  man.  And  so  soon 
as  he  was  dead,  his  steward  Giuseppe  sent 
secretly  and  in  haste  to  Antonio,  saying,  "  My 
lord,  you  cannot  take  the  lands  or  the  house ; 
but,  if  you  will  be  wise,  come  quickly  and  take 
the  money  and  the  jewels ;  for  I  hear  that  His 
Highness  the  Duke,  declaring  that  an  outlaw 
has  no  right  and  can  inherit  nothing,  will  send 
and  seize  the  treasure."  Now  Antonio,  though 
grieved  at  the  death  of  Cesare,  was  glad  to  hear 
of  the  treasure ;  for  he  was  often  hard  put  to 
it  to  maintain  his  company  and  those  who 
depended  on  him  for  bread.  So  he  pondered 
anxiously  how  he  might  reach  the  palace  of  the 
Peschetti  and  lay  hands  on  the  treasure  and 
return  safely;  for  at  this  time  Duke  Valentine 
had  posted  above  a  hundred  of  his  Guard  in  the 
plain,  and  this  troop  watched  all  the  approaches 
to  the  hills,  so  that  the  band  could  not  ride  forth 
in  a  body  unless  it  were  prepared  to  do  battle 
with  the  guards.  Nor  did  Antonio  desire  to 
weaken  the  band,  lest  the  guards,  learning  that 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  HERMIT 


loS 


the  bravest  were  away,  should  venture  an  attack. 
Therefore  he  would  not  take  Tommasino  or 
Bena  or  any  of  the  stoutest  with  him  ;  but  he 
took  four  young  men  who  had  come  to  him 
from  Firmola,  having  fallen  into  the  Duke's 
displeasure  through  brawling  with  his  guards. 
These  he  mojunted  on  good  horses,  and,  having 
made  a  circuit  to  avoid  the  encampment  in  the 
'—plain,  he  came  to  Cesare's  house  on  the  day 
Before  that  appointed  for  the  funeral.  Giuseppe 
came  to  meet  him,  and  led  him  where  the  dead 
man  lay,  and,  after  the  Count  had  gazed  on  his 
face  and  kissed  his  forehead,  they  two  went  to 
the  treasury,  and  Giuseppe  delivered  the  treasure 
to  Antonio ;  and  Antonio  made  him  a  present  of 
value  and  confirmed  him  in  his  stewardship, 
although  it  was  not  likely  that  the  Duke  would 
suffer  him  to  exercise  any  power,  inasmuch  as 
His  Highness  had  declared  his  intention  of  for- 
feiting the  estate  into  his  own  hand. 

Now  it  chanced  that  one  of  the  young  men,  ' 
being  regaled  with  wine,  drank  very  freely,  and 
began  to  talk  loud  and  boastfully  of  his  master's 
achievements  as  the  servants  sat  under  the  trees 


2o6     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

in  front  of  the  house;  and  there  was  with  them 
a  certain  tailor,  a  lame  man,  who  had  furnished 
mourning  garments  for  the  funeral.  The  tailor, 
learning  that  Antonio  was  come,  said  nothing, 
and  seemed  not  to  hear  nor  understand  the 
drunken  youth's  talk ;  but  at  an  early  moment  he 
took  his  departure  and  straightway  hobbled  as 
fast  as  his  lame  leg  would  let  him  to  the  Syndic 
of  Baratesta,  a  very  busy  and  ambitious  fellow, 
who  longed  greatly  to  win  the  Duke's  favour. 
And  the  tailor  set  the  price  of  five  pieces  of  gold 
and  the  ordering  of  a  new  gown  on  the  news 
he  brought ;  and  the  Syndic  having  agreed,  the 
tailor  cried,  "  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto  is  at  the 
house  of  the  Peschetti,  and  his  band  is  not  with 
him.  If  you  hasten,  you  may  catch  him."  At 
this  the  Syndic  exulted  very  greatly  ;  for  the 
Duke's  Commissaries  would  not  arrive  to  assume 
possession  of  the  house  in  his  name  till  the  mor- 
row, by  which  time  Antonio  would  be  gone ;  and 
the  Syndic  rubbed  his  hands,  saying,  "  If  I  can 
take  him  my  glory  will  be  great,  and  the  grati- 
tude of  His  Highness  also."  And  he  gathered 
together  all  his  constables,  and  hard  upon  twenty 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE    HERMIT.         20/ 

discharged  soldiers  who  dwelt  in  the  town,  and 
the  fifteen  men  of  the  Duke's  who  were  stationed 
at  Baratesta  to  gather  His  Highness's  dues ;  and 
thus,  with  a  force  of  about  fifty  men,  he  set  out 
in  great  haste  for  the  house  of  the  Peschetti,  and 
w^as  almost  come  there,  before  a  little  boy  ran  to 
Giuseppe  crying  that  the  Syndic  and  all  the  con- 
stables and  many  besides  were  coming  to  the 
""house.  And  Giuseppe,  who  had  but  three  men- 
servants  of  an  age  to  fight,  the  other  five  being 
old  (for  Cesare  had  loved  to  keep  those  who 
served  him  well,  even  when  their  power  grew 
less  than  their  will),  and  moreover  perceived  that 
Antonio's  four  were  young  and  untried,  wrung 
his  hands  and  hastened  to  the  Count  with  the 
news,  saying,  "  Yet  weak  as  we  are,  we  can  die 
for  you,  my  lord." 

"Heaven  forbid!"  said  Antonio,  looking  out 
of  the  window.  "Are  they  all  townsmen  that 
come  with  this  Syndic?" 

"Alas,  no,  my  lord.  There  are  certain  of  the 
Duke's  men,  and  I  see  among  the  rest  men  who 
have  spent  their  days  under  arms,  either  in  His 
Highness's  service  or  in  Free  Companies." 


2o8      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"Then,"  said  Antonio,  smiling,  " unless  I  am 
to  share  Cesare's  funeral,  I  had  best  be  gone. 
For  I  have  seen  too  much  fighting  to  be  ashamed 
to  run  away  from  it." 

"  But,  my  lord,  they  are  at  the  gates." 

"  And  is  there  no  other  gate  ?  " 

"  None,  my  lord,  save  the  little  gate  in  the 
wall  there  ;  and  see,  the  Sj^ndic  has  posted  ten 
men  there." 

"  And  he  will  search  the  house?" 

"  I  fear  that  he  will,  my  lord.  For  he  must 
have  tidings  of  your  coming." 

"  Then  where  is  my  horse?"  said  Count  An- 
tonio ;  and  Giuseppe  showed  him  where  the 
horse  stood  in  the  shadow  of  the  portico.  "  Do 
not  let  the  Syndic  know,"  added  Antonio,  "  that 
the  young  men  are  of  my  company,  and  send 
them  away  in  safety," 

"  But  what  do  you,  my  lord  ?"  cried  Giuseppe. 

"  What  I  have  done  before,  Giuseppe.  I  ride 
for  life,"  answered  the  Count. 

Then  the  Count,  delaying  no  more,  ran  lightly 
down  the  stairs,  leapt  on  his  horse,  and,  drawing 
his  sword,  rode  forth  from  the  portico ;    and  he 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   HERMIT.         209 

was  among  the  Syndic's  company  before  they 
thought  to  see  him  ;  and  he  struck  right  and  left 
with  his  sword  ;  and  they  fell  back  before  him 
in  fear,  yet  striking  at  him  as  they  shrank  away ; 
and  he  had  come  clean  off,  but  for  one  grizzly- 
haired  fellow  who  had  served  much  in  Free 
Companies  and  learnt  cunning;  for  he  stooped 
low,  avoiding  the  sweep  of  Antonio's  sword,  and 
'.-Sktabbed  the  horse  in  its  belly,  and  stood  wiping 
'  Ms'  knife  and  saying,  "  My  legs  are  old.  I  have 
done  my  part.  Do  yours ;  the  horse  will  not  go 
far."  In  truth  the  horse  was  wounded  to  death, 
and  its  bowels  protruded  from  the  wound ;  and 
Antonio  felt  it  falter  and  stumble.  Yet  the  gal- 
lant beast  carried  him  for  half  a  mile,  and  then 
he  sprang  off,  fearing  it  would  fall  under  him 
as  he  sat  and  he  be  crushed  by  it ;  and  he  drew 
his  sword  across  its  throat  that  it  might  not 
linger  in  pain,  and  then  ran  on  foot,  hearing  the 
cries  of  the  Syndic's  company  as  it  pressed  on 
behind  him.  And  thus,  running,  he  came  to  the 
church  of  St.  John  and  to  the  vault  of  the 
Peschetti  by  it;  two  men  were  at  work  preparing 
for   Cesare's  funeral,  and  the  door  of   the  vault 


2IO     THE   CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

was  open.  Antonio  hurled  one  man  to  the  right 
and  the  other  to  the  left,  and  rushed  into  the 
vault ;  for  his  breath  failed,  and  there  was  no 
chance  for  his  life  were  he  overtaken  in  the  open; 
and  before  the  men  regained  their  feet,  he  pulled 
the  door  of  the  vault  close  and  sank  on  his  knee 
inside,  panting,  and  holding  his  sword  in  readi- 
ness to  slay  any  who  entered.  Then  the  Syndic 
and  his  company  came  and  called  on  him  to 
surrender.  And  Antonio  cried,  "  Come  and  take 
me."  Then  the  Syndic  bade  the  workmen  pull 
open  the  door ;  but  Antonio  held  it  with  one 
hand  against  them  both.  Yet  at  last  they  drew 
it  a  little  open ;  and  Antonio  lunged  with  his 
sword  through  the  aperture  and  wounded  the 
Syndic  in  the  leg,  so  that  he  stumbled  backwards 
with  an  oath.  And  after  that  none  was  willing 
to  enter  first,  until  the  grizzly-haired  fellow  came 
up ;  but  he,  seeing  the  aperture,  rushed  at  it 
sword  in  hand,  fearing  no  man,  not  even  Count 
Antonio.  But  he  could  not  touch  Antonio,  and 
he  also  fell  back  with  a  sore  gash  in  his  cheek ; 
and  Antonio  laughed,  saying,  "  Shall  I  surrender, 
Syndic?" 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   HERMIT.         2 II 

Now  the  Syndic  was  very  urgent  in  his  desire 
to  take  Antonio,  but  his  men  shook  their  heads, 
and  he  himself  could  not  stand  because  of  the 
sword-thrust  in  his  leg ;  and,  instead  of  fighting, 
his  company  began  to  tell  of  the  wonderful  deeds 
Antonio  had  done,  and  they  grew  no  bolder  by 
this ;  and  the  grizzly-haired  fellow  mocked  them, 
saying  that  he  would  go  again  at  the  aperture  if 
•-two  more  would  attempt  it  with  him  ;  but  none 
onered.  And  the  Syndic  raged  and  rebuked 
them,  but  he  could  not  hurt  them,  being  unable 
to  stand  on  his  feet;  so  that  one  said  boldly, 
"  Why  should  we  die  ?  The  Duke's  Commis- 
saries will  be  here  to-morrow  with  a  company  of 
the  Guard.  Let  the  Count  stay  in  the  vault  till 
then.  He  is  in  safe  keeping ;  and  when  he  sees 
the  Guard  he  will  surrender.  It  is  likely  enough 
that  a  great  lord  like  the  Count  would  rather  die 
than  give  up  his  sword  to  the  Syndic."  Whereat 
the  Syndic  was  very  ill  pleased,  but  all  the  rest 
mighty  well  pleased  ;  and,  having  heard  this 
counsel,  they  could  by  no  means  be  persuaded  to 
attack  afresh,  but  they  let  Antonio  draw  the  door 
close  again,  being  in  truth  glad  to  see  the  last  of 


212      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

his  sword.  Therefore  the  Syndic,  having  no 
choice,  set  twenty  to  guard  the  entrance  of  the 
vault  and  prepared  to  depart.  But  he  cried  to 
Antonio,  again  bidding  him  to  surrender,  for  the 
Guard  would  come  to-morrow,  and  then  at  least 
he  could  not  hope  to  resist. 

"  Aj^e,  but  to-morrow  is  to-morrow,  Master 
Syndic,"  laughed  Antonio.  "  Go,  get  your  leg 
dressed,  and  leave  to-morrow  till  it  dawn." 

So  the  Syndic  went  home  and  the  rest  with 
him,  leaving  the  twenty  on  guard.  And  to  this 
day,  if  a  man  hath  more  love  for  fighting  than 
skill  in  it,  folk  call  him  a  Syndic  of  Baratesta. 

Count  Antonio,  being  thus  left  in  the  vault, 
and  perceiving  that  he  would  not  be  further 
molested  that  day,  looked  round ;  and  though  no 
daylight  reached  the  vault,  he  could  see,  for  the 
workmen  had  set  a  lamp  there  and  it  still  burnt. 
Around  him  were  the  coffins  of  all  the  Peschetti 
who  had  died  in  five  hundred  years ;  and  the  air 
was  heavy  and  stifling.  Antonio  took  the  lamp 
and  walked  round  the  vault,  which  was  of  cir- 
cular form  ;  and  he  perceived  one  coffin  standing 
upright  against  the  wall  of  the  vault,  as  though 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE    HERMIT. 


213 


there  had  been  no  room  for  it  on  the  shelves. 
Then  he  sat  down  again,  and,  being  weary,  leant 
his  head  against  the  wall  and  soon  slept ;  for  a 
man  whose  conscience  is  easy  and  whose  head 
has  sense  in  it  may  sleep  as  well  in  a  vault  as  in  a 
bedchamber.  Yet  the  air  of  the  vault  oppressed 
him,  and  he  slept  but  lightly  and  uneasily.  And, 
if  a  proof  be  needed  how  legends  gather  round 
"ttie  Count's  name,  I  have  heard  many  wonderful 
stories  of  what  happened  to  him  in  the  vault; 
how  he  held  converse  with  dead  Peschetti,  how 
they  told  him  things  which  it  is  not  given  to  men 
to  know,  and  how  a  certain  beautiful  lady,  who 
had  been  dead  two  hundred  years,  having  been 
slain  by  her  lover  in  a  jealous  rage,  came  forth 
from  the  coffin,  with  her  hair  all  dishevelled  and 
a  great  wound  yet  bleeding  in  her  bosom,  and 
sang  a  low  sweet  wild  love-song  to  him  as  he  lay, 
and  would  not  leave  him  though  he  bade  her 
soul  rest  in  the  name  of  Christ  and  the  Saints. 
But  that  any  of  these  things  happened  I  do  not 
believe. 

It  was  late  when  the  Count  awoke,  and  the 
lamp  had  burnt  out,  so  that  the  vault  was  utterly 


214 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


dark.  And  as  the  Count  roused  himself,  a  sound 
strange  in  the  place  fell  on  his  ear ;  for  a  man 
talked,  and  his  talk  was  not  such  as  one  uses  who 
speaks  aloud  his  own  musings  to  himself  when  he 
is  alone  (a  trick  men  come  by  who  live  solitary), 
but  he  seemed  to  question  others  and  to  answer 
them,  saying,  "Aye,"  and  "No,"  and  "Alas, 
sweet  friend ! "  and  so  forth,  all  in  a  low  even 
voice ;  and  now  and  again  he  would  sigh,  and 
once  he  laughed  bitterly.  Then  the  Count  raised 
his  voice,  "  Who  is  there?"  And  the  other  voice 
answered,  "Which  of  you  speaks?  The  tones 
are  not  known  to  me.  Yet  I  know  all  the  Pe- 
schetti  who  are  here."  And  Antonio  answered, 
"  I  am  not  of  the  Peschetti  save  by  my  mother ; 
my  name  is  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto."  On  this 
a  cry  came  from  the  darkness,  as  of  a  man  greatly 
troubled  and  alarmed  ;  and  after  that  there  was 
silence  for  a  space.  And  Antonio  said,  "  There 
is  naught  to  fear ;  I  seek  to  save  myself,  not  to 
hurt  another.  But  how  do  you,  a  living  man, 
come  to  be  in  this  vault,  and  with  whom  do  you 
speak?"-  Then  came  the  sound  of  steel  striking 
on  a  flint,  and  presently  a  spark,  and  a  torch  was 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE    HERMIT  21$ 

lighted  ;  and  Antonio  beheld  before  him,  in  the 
glow  of  the  torch,  the  figure  of  a  man  who 
crouched  on  the  floor  of  the  vault  over  against 
him;  his  hair  was  long  and  tangled,  his  beard 
grew  to  his  waist,  and  he  was  naked  save  for  a 
cloth  about  his  loins ;  and  his  eyes  gleamed  dark 
and  wild  as  he  gazed  on  Antonio  in  seeming 
fright  and  bewilderment.  Then  the  Count, 
'••fenowing  that  a  man  collects  his  thoughts  while 
another  speaks,  told  the  man  who  he  was  and 
how  he  came  there,  and  (because  the  man's  eyes 
still  wondered)  how  that  he  was  an  outlaw  these 
three  years  and  more  because  he  would  not  bow 
to  the  Duke's  will :  and  when  he  had  told  all,  he 
ceased.  Then  the  man  came  crawling  closer  to 
him,  and,  holding  the  torch  to  his  face,  scanned 
his  face,  saying,  "  Surely  he  is  alive ! "  And 
again  he  was  silent,  but  after  a  while  he  spoke. 

"  For  twenty-and-three  years,"  he  said,  "  I 
have  dwelt  here  among  the  dead  ;  and  to  the 
dead  I  talk,  and  they  are  my  friends  and  com- 
panions. For  I  hear  their  voices,  and  they  come 
out  of  their  coffins  and  greet  me ;  yet  now  they 
are  silent  and  still  because  you  are  here." 


2l6     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"But  how  can  you  live  here?"  cried  Anto= 
nio.  "  For  you  must  starve  for  lack  of  food,  and 
come  near  to  suffocation  in  the  air  of  this  vault." 

The  man  set  his  hand  to  his  brow  and 
frowned,  and  said  sadly,  "  Indeed  I  have  for- 
gotten much,  yet  I  remember  a  certain  night 
when  the  Devil  came  into  me,  and  in  black  fury 
and  jealousy  I  laid  wait  by  the  door  of  the  room 
where  my  wife  was ;  and  we  had  been  wedded 
but  a  few  months.  There  was  a  man  who  was 
my  friend,  and  he  came  to  my  wife  secretly,  seek- 
ing to  warn  her  that  I  was  suspected  of  treason 
to  the  Prince :  yes,  in  all  things  he  was  my 
friend ;  for  when  I  stabbed  him  as  he  came 
to  the  door,  and,  rushing  in,  stabbed  her  also, 
she  did  not  die  till  she  had  told  me  all ;  and 
then  she  smiled  sweetly  at  me,  saying,  "  Our 
friend  will  forgive,  dear  husband,  for  you  did 
not  know ;  and  I  forgive  the  blow  your  love 
dealt  me :  kiss  me  and  let  me  die  here  in  your 
arms.'^  And  I  kissed  her,  and  she  died.  Then 
I  laid  her  on  her  bed,  and  I  went  forth  from 
my  home  ;  and  I  wandered  many  days.  Then  I 
sought  to  kill  myself,  but  I  could  not,  for  a  voice 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   HERMIT.         217 

seemed  to  say,  *  What  penitence  is  there  in 
death  ?  Lo,  it  is  sweet,  Paolo !  '  So  I  did  not 
kill  myself ;  but  I  took  an  oath  to  live  apart 
from  men  till  God  should  in  His  mercy  send  me 
death.  And  coming-  in  my  wanderings  to  the 
river  that  runs  by  Baratesta,  I  found  a  little 
hollow  in  thQ  bank  of  the  river,  and  I  lay 
down  there ;  and  none  pursued  me,  for  the 
'•Duke  of  Firmola  cared  not  for  a  crime  done 
in  Mantivoglia.  And  for  a  year  I  dwelt  in  my 
little  cave :  then  it  was  noised  about  that  I 
dwelt  there,  and  fools  began  to  call  me,  who 
was  the  vilest  sinner  born,  a  holy  hermit,  and 
they  came  to  me  to  ask  prayers.  So  I  begged 
from  one  a  pick,  and  I  worked  on  the  face  of 
the  rock,  and  made  a  passage  through  it.  And 
I  swore  to  look  no  more  on  the  light  of  the  sun, 
but  abode  in  the  recesses  that  I  had  hollowed 
out.  And  I  go  no  more  to  the  mouth  of  the 
cave,  save  once  a  day  at  nightfall,  when  I  drink 
of  the  water  of  the  river  and  take  the  broken 
meats  they  leave  for  me." 

"But  here — how  came  you  here?"  cried  An- 
tonio. 

15 


2i8      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  I  broke  through  one  day  by  chance,  as  I 
worked  on  the  rock ;  and,  seeing  the  vault,  I 
made  a  passage  with  much  labour ;  and  having 
done  this,  I  hid  it  with  a  coffin ;  and  now  I  dwell 
here  with  the  dead,  expecting  the  time  when  in 
God's  mercy  I  also  shall  be  allowed  to  die.  But 
to-day  I  fled  back  through  the  passage,  for  men 
came  and  opened  the  vault  and  let  in  the  sun- 
shine, which  I  might  not  see.  Pray  for  me,  sir ; 
I  have  need  of  prayers." 

"  Now  God  comfort  you,"  said  Count  Anto- 
nio softly.  "  Of  a  truth,  sir,  a  man  who  knows 
his  sin  and  grieves  for  it  in  his  heart  hath  in 
God's  eyes  no  longer  any  sin.  So  is  it  sweetly 
taught  in  the  most  Holy  Scriptures.  Therefore 
take  comfort ;  for  your  friend  will  forgive  even 
as  the  gentle  lady  who  loved  you  forgave  ;  and 
Christ  has  no  less  forgiveness  than  they." 

"  I  know  not,"  said  the  hermit,  groaning 
heavily.  "  I  question  the  dead  who  lie  here 
concerning  these  things,  but  they  may  not  tell 
me." 

"  Indeed,  poor  man,  they  can  tell  nothing," 
said  Antonio  gently  ;   for   he  perceived  that  the 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE    HERMIT. 


219 


man  was  subject  to  a  madness  and  deluded  by- 
fancied  visions  and  voices. 

"  Yet  I  love  to  talk  to  them  of  the  time  when 
I  also  shall  be  dead." 

"  God  comfort  you,"  said  Count  Antonio 
again. 

Now  while.  Antonio  and  the  hermit  talked, 
one  of  those  who  guarded  the  vault  chanced  to 
lay  his  ear  against  the  door,  listening  whether 
Antonio  moved,  and  he  heard,  to  his  great 
dread  and  consternation,  the  voice  of  another 
who  talked  with  Antonio:  most  of  what  was 
said  he  did  not  hear,  but  he  heard  Antonio 
say,  "  God  comfort  you,"  and  the  hermit  answer 
something  and  groan  heavily.  And  the  legs  of 
the  listener  shook  under  him,  and  he  cried  to 
his  comrades  that  the  dead  talked  with  Antonio, 
he  himself  being  from  fright  more  dead  than 
alive.  Then  all  came  and  listened  ;  and  still  the 
voice  of  another  talked  with  Antonio ;  so  that 
the  guards  were  struck  with  terror  and  looked 
in  one  another's  faces,  saying,  "  The  dead  speak ! 
The  Count  speaks  with  the  dead  !  Christ  and 
the    Blessed    Mother   of   Christ    and    the   Saints 


220     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT    ANTONIO. 

protect  us  !  "  And  they  looked  neither  to  right 
nor  left,  but  sat  quaking  on  the  ground  about 
the  door  of  the  vault ;  and  presently  one  ran 
and  told  the  Syndic,  and  he  caused  himself  to 
be  carried  thither  in  his  chair;  and  he  also 
heard,  and  was  very  greatly  afraid,  saying, 
"  This  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto  is  a  fearful 
man."  And  the  report  spread  throughout  Bara- 
testa  that  Count  Antonio  talked  with  the  dead 
in  the  vault  of  the  Peschetti ;  whence  came,  I 
doubt  not,  the  foolish  tales  of  which  I  have 
made  mention.  A  seed  is  enough :  men's 
tongues  water  it  and  it  grows  to  a  great  plant. 
Nor  did  any  man  think  that  it  was  the  hermit 
who  talked  ;  for  although  they  knew  of  his  cave, 
they  did  not  know  nor  imagine  of  the  passage  he 
had  made,  and  his  voice  was  utterly  strange, 
seeing  that  he  had  spoken  no  word  to  any 
living  man  for  twenty  years,  till  he  spoke  with 
the  Count  that  night.  Therefore  the  whole  of 
Baratesta  was  in  great  fear ;  and  they  came  to 
a  certain  learned  priest,  who  was  priest  of  the 
church  of  St.  John,  and  told  him.  And  he 
arose    and    came    in    great    haste,    and    offered 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   HERMIT.         221 

pra3'ers  outside  the  vault,  and  bade  the  unquiet 
spirits  rest ;  but  he  did  not  offer  to  enter,  nor 
did  any  one  of  them ;  but  they  all  said,  "  We 
had  determined  even  before  to  await  the  Duke's 
Guard,  and  that  is  still  the  wiser  thing." 

For  a  great  while  the  hermit  could  not  under- 
stand what  ^ntonio  wanted  of  him ;  for  his 
thoughts  were  on  his  own  state  and  with  the 
^-4ead ;  but  at  length  having  understood  that 
Antonio  would  be  guided  through  the  passage 
and  brought  to  the  mouth  of  the  cave,  in  the 
hope  of  finding  means  to  escape  before  the 
Duke's  Commissaries  came  with  the  Guard,  he 
murmured  wonderingly,  "  Do  you  then  desire  to 
live?"  and  rose,  and  led  Antonio  where  the 
coffin  stood  upright  against  the  wall  as  Antonio 
had  seen  it ;  but  it  was  now  moved  a  little  to 
one  side,  and  there  was  a  narrow  opening, 
through  which  the  Count  had  much  ado  to  pass; 
and  in  his  struggles  he  upset  the  coffin,  and  it 
fell  with  a  great  crash  ;  whereat  all  who  were 
outside  the  vault  fled  suddenly  to  a  distance  of 
a  hundred  yards  or  more  in  panic,  expecting 
now  to  see  the  door  of  the  vault  open  and  the 


222      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

dead  walk  forth :  nor  could  they  be  persuaded 
to  come  nearer  again.  But  Antonio,  with  a 
great  effort,  made  his  way  through  the  opening, 
and  followed  the  hermit  along  a  narrow  rough- 
hewn  way,  Antonio's  shoulders  grazing  the  rock 
on  either  side  as  he  went ;  and  having  pursued 
this  way  for  fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  they  turned 
to  the  right  sharply,  and  went  on  another  ten 
paces,  and,  having  passed  through  another 
narrow  opening,  were  in  the  cave ;  and  the 
river  glistened  before  their  eyes,  for  it  was  now 
dawn.  And  the  hermit,  perceiving  that  it  was 
dawn,  and  fearing  to  see  the  sun,  turned  to  fiee 
back  to  the  vault ;  but  Antonio,  being  full  of 
pity  for  him,  detained  him,  and  besought  him 
to  abandon  his  manner  of  life,  assuring  him 
that  certainly  by  now  his  sin  was  purged  :  and 
when  the  hermit  would  not  listen,  Antonio 
followed  him  back  to  the  opening  that  led  into 
the  vault,  and,  forgetting  his  own  peril,  reasoned 
with  him  for  the  space  of  an  hour  or  more,  but 
could  not  prevail.  So  at  last  he  bade  him  fare- 
well very  sorrowfully,  telling  him  that  God  had 
made   him  that  day  the  instrument  of  saving  a 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE    HERMIT.         223 

man's  life,  which  should  be  to  him  a  sign  of 
favour  and  forgiveness ;  but  the  hermit  shook 
his  head  and  passed  into  the  vault,  and  Antonio 
heard  him  again  talking  to  the  dead  Peschetti, 
and  answering  questions  that  his  own  disordered 
brain  invented. 

Thus  it  wa§  full  morning  when  Antonio  came 
again  to  the  little  cave  by  the  river,  and  be- 
•ifeought  him  what  he  should  do  for  his  own 
safety.  And  suddenly,  looking  across  the  river, 
he  beheld  a  gentleman  whom  he  knew,  one 
Lepardo,  a  Commissary  of  the  Duke's,  and  with 
him  thirty  of  the  Duke's  Guard ;  and  they  were 
riding  very  fast ;  for,  having  started  at  mid- 
mg4it  to  avoid  the  heat  of  the  sun  (it  being 
high  summer),  so  soon  as  they  reached  the  out- 
skirts of  Baratesta,  they  had  heard  that  Antonio 
was  in  the  vault,  and  were  now  pressing  on  to 
cross  the  bridge  and  come  upon  him.  And 
Antonio  knew  that  Lepardo  was  a  man  of 
courage  and  hardihood,  and  would  be  prevented 
by  nothing  from  entering  the  vault.  But  on  a 
sudden  Lepardo  checked  his  horse,  uttering  a 
loud    cry  ;    for   to  his   great   amazement  he  had 


224 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 


seen  Antonio  as  Antonio  looked  forth  from  the 
cave,  and  he  could  not  tell  how  he  came  to  be 
there :  and  Antonio  at  once  withdrew  himself 
into  the  shadow  of  the  cave.  Now  the  banks 
of  the  stream  on  the  side  on  which  Lepardo 
rode  were  high  and  precipitous,  and,  although  it 
was  summer,  yet  the  stream  was  too  deep  for 
him  to  wade,  and  flowed  quickly ;  yet  at  Le- 
pardo's  bidding,  six  of  his  stoutest  men  pre- 
pared to  leap  down  the  bank  and  go  in  search 
of  Antonio  ;  and  Antonio,  discerning  that  they 
would  do  this,  and  blaming  himself  for  his  rash- 
ness in  looking  out  so  incautiously,  was  greatly 
at  a  loss  what  to  do  ;  for  now  he  was  hemmed 
in  on  either  side  ;  and  he  saw  nothing  but-  to 
sell  his  life  dearly  and  do  some  deed  that 
should  ornament  his  death.  So  he  retreated 
again  along  the  passage  and  passed  through  the 
opening  into  the  vault ;  and  he  summoned  the 
hermit  to  aid  him,  and  between  them  they  set 
not  one  only,  but  a  dozen  of  the  coffins  of  the 
Peschetti  against  the  opening,  laying  them 
lengthwise  and  piling  one  on  the  top  of  the  other 
hoping  that  Lepardo's  men  would  not  discover 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   HERMIT.         225 

the  opening,  or  would  at  least  be  delayed  some 
time  before  they  could  thrust  away  the  coffins 
and  come  through.  Then  Antonio  took  his 
place  by  the  gate  of  the  vault  again,  sword  in 
hand,  saying  grimly  to  the  hermit,  "  If  you  seek 
Death,  sir,  he  will  be  hereabouts  before  long." 

But  the  Cqunt  Antonio  was  not  a  man  whom 
his  friends  would  abandon  to  death  unaided ; 
'•-and  while  the  Syndic  was  watching  Antonio,  the 
four  young  men  who  were  with  the  Count 
made  their  escape  from  Cesare's  house ;  and, 
having  separated  from  one  another,  rode  by 
four  different  ways  towards  the  hills,  using 
much  wariness.  Yet  three  of  them  were  caught 
by  the  Duke's  company  that  watched  in  the 
plain,  and,  having  been  soundly  flogged,  were 
set  to  work  as  servants  in  the  camp.  But  the 
fourth  came  safe  to  the  hills,  and  found  there 
Tommasino  and  Bena ;  and  Tommasino,  hearing 
of  Antonio's  state,  started  with  Bena  and  eight- 
een more  to  rescue  him  or  die  with  him.  And 
they  fell  in  with  a  scouting  party  of  the  Duke's, 
and  slew  every  man  of  them  to  the  number  of 
five,  losing  two  of  their  own  number;  but  thus 


226     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

they  escaped,  there  being  none  left  to  carry 
news  to  the  camp ;  and  they  rode  furiously,  and, 
by  the  time  they  came  near  Baratesta,  they  were 
not  more  than  a  mile  behind  Lepardo's  company. 
But  Lepardo,  when  he  had  detached  the  six  men 
to  watch  Antonio,  rode  on  hastily  to  find  the 
Syndic,  and  learn  from  him  the  meaning  of 
what  he  had  seen  ;  and  thus  Tommasino,  com- 
ing opposite  to  the  mouth  of  the  hermit's  cave, 
saw  no  more  than  six  horses  tethered  on  the 
river  bank,  having  the  Duke's  escutcheon 
wrought  on  their  saddle-cloths.  Then  he  leapt 
down,  and,  running  to  the  edge  of  the  bank,  saw 
a  man  disappearing  into  the  mouth  of  the  cave, 
dripping  wet ;  and  this  man  was  the  last  of  the 
six  who  had  swum  the  river,  and  were  now 
groping  their  way  with  great  caution  along  the 
narrow  track  that  the  hermit  had  made.  Now 
Tommasino  understood  no  more  than  Lepardo 
that  there  was  any  opening  from  the  cave  to  the 
vault,  but  he  thought  that  the  Duke's  men  did 
not  swim  the  river  for  their  pleasure,  and  he 
bade  Bena  take  five  and  watch  what  should 
happen,  while  he  rode  on  with  the  rest. 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE    HERMIT.         227 

"If  they  come  out  again  immediately,"  he 
said,  "  you  will  have  them  at  a  disadvantage ; 
but  if  they  do  not  come  out,  go  in  after  them ; 
for  I  know  not  what  they  are  doing  unless 
they  are  seeking  my  cousin  or  laying  some  trap 
for  him." 

Then  Tommasino  rode  after  Lepardo ;  and 
Bena,  having  given  the  Duke's  men  but  the 
'i^iefest  space  in  which  to  come  out  again  from 
'tife'cave,  prepared  to  go  after  them.  And  the 
Duke's  men  were  now  much  alarmed  ;  for  the 
last  man  told  them  of  the  armed  men  on  the 
bank  opposite,  and  that  they  did  not  wear  the 
Duke's  badge;  so  the  six  retreated  up  the  pas- 
sage very  silently,  but  they  could  not  find  any 
opening,  for  it  grew  darker  at  every  step,  and 
they  became  much  out  of  heart.  Then  Bena's 
men  crossed  the  river  and  entered  the  mouth  of 
the  cave  after  them.  Thus  there  was  fair  likeli- 
hood of  good  fighting  both  in  the  passage  and 
by  the  gate  of  the  vault. 

But  the  Count  Antonio,  not  knowing  that 
any  of  his  band  were  near,  had  ceased  to  hope 
for  his  life,  and    he  sat  calm    and   ready,  sword 


228      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

in  hand,  while  the  hermit  withdrew  to  a  corner 
of  the  vault,  and  crouched  there  muttering  his 
mad  answers  and  questions,  and  ever  and  again 
hailing  some  one  of  the  dead  Peschetti  by  name 
as  though  he  saw  him.  Then  suddenly  a  coffin 
fell  with  a  loud  crash  from  the  top  of  the  heap 
on  to  the  floor ;  for  the  Duke's  men  had  found 
the  opening  and  were  pushing  at  it  with  hand 
and  shoulder.  Antonio  sprang  to  his  feet  and 
left  the  gate  and  went  and  stood  ready  by  the 
pile  of  coffins.  But  again  on  a  sudden  came  a 
tumult  from  beyond  the  opening ;  for  Bena  and 
his  five  also  were  now  in  the  passage,  and  the 
foremost  of  them — who  indeed  was  Bena  him- 
self— had  come  upon  the  hindmost  of  the  Duke's 
men,  and  the  six,  finding  an  enemy  behind  them, 
pushed  yet  more  fiercely  and  strenuously  against 
the  coffins.  And  no  man  in  the  passage  saw 
any  man,  it  being  utterly  dark  ;  and  they  could 
not  use  their  swords  for  lack  of  space,  but  drew 
their  daggers  and  thrust  fiercely  when  they  felt 
a  man's  body  near.  So  in  the  dark  they  pushed 
and  wrestled  and  struggled  and  stabbed,  and 
the   sound   of   their  tumult   filled   all  the    vault 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE    HERMIT.         229 

and  spread  beyond,  being  heard  outside ;  and 
many  outside  crossed  themselves  for  fear,  saying, 
"Hell  is  broke  loose!  God  save  us!"  But  at 
that  moment  came  Lepardo  and  his  company ; 
and  he,  having  leapt  from  his  horse  and  heard 
from  the  Syndic  that  Antonio  was  in  very  truth 
in  the  vault,  d^ew  his  sword  and  came  at  the 
head  of  his  men  to  the  door ;  and  hearing  the 
"t«mult  from  within,  he  cried  in  scorn,  "  These 
are  no  ghosts!"  and  himself  with  his  boldest 
rushed  at  the  door,  and  they  laid  hold  on  the 
handles  of  it  and  wrenched  it  open.  But  An- 
tonio, perceiving  that  the  door  was  wrenched 
open,  and  not  yet  understanding  that  any  of  his 
friends  were  near,  suddenly  flung  himself  prone 
on  the  floor  by  the  wall  of  the  vault,  behind  two 
of  the  coffins  which  the  efforts  of  the  Duke's 
men  had  dislodged ;  and  there  he  lay  hidden ;  so 
that  Lepardo,  when  he  rushed  in,  saw  no  man, 
for  the  corner  where  the  hermit  crouched  was 
dark ;  but  the  voice  of  the  madman  came,  saying, 
"  Welcome !  Do  you  bring  me  another  of  the 
Peschetti  ?  He  is  welcome!"  Then  the  Duke's 
men,  having   pushed    aside   all   the   coffins  save 


230 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


one,  came  tumbling  and  scrambling  over  into  the 
vault,  where  they  found  Lepardo  and  his  fol- 
lowers; and  hot  on  their  heels  came  Bena  and 
his  five,  so  that  the  vault  was  full  of  men.  And 
now  from  outside  also  came  the  clatter  of  hoofs 
and  hoarse  cries  and  the  clash  of  steel ;  for  Tom- 
masino  had  come,  and  had  fallen  with  great  fury 
on  those  of  Lepardo's  men  who  were  outside 
and  on  the  Syndic's  levies  that  watched  from 
afar  off.  And  fierce  was  the  battle  outside ;  yet 
it  was  fiercer  inside,  where  men  fought  in  a 
half-light,  scarcely  knowing  with  whom  they 
fought,  and  tripping  hither  and  thither  over  the 
coffins  of  the  Peschetti  that  were  strewn  about 
the  floor. 

Then  the  Count  Antonio  arose  from  where 
he  lay  and  he  cried  aloud,  "  To  me,  to  me ! 
To  me,  Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto ! "  and  he 
rushed  to  the  entrance  of  the  vault.  Bena,  hail- 
ing the  Count's  voice,  and  cutting  down  one  who 
barred  the  way,  ran  to  Antonio  in  great  joy  to 
find  him  alive  and  whole.  And  Antonio  came 
at  Lepardo,  who  stood  his  onset  bravely,  al- 
though   greatly    bewildered    to   find   a   party  of 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND  THE  HERMIT.    23 1 

Antonio's  men  where  he  had  looked  for  Antonio 
alone.  And  he  cried  to  his  men  to  rally  round 
him,  and,  keeping  his  face  and  his  blade  towards 
the  Count,  began  to  fall  back  towards  the  mouth 
of  the  vault,  in  order  to  rejoin  his  men  outside ; 
for  there  also  he  perceived  that  there  was  an 
enemy.  Thu^  Lepardo  fell  back,  and  Antonio 
pressed  on.  But,  unnoticed  by  any,  the  mad 
'kermit  now  sprang  forth  from  the  corner  where 
he  had  been ;  and,  as  Antonio  was  about  to 
thrust  at  Lepardo,  the  hermit  caught  him  by 
the  arm,  and  with  the  strength  of  frenzy  drew 
him  back,  and  thrust  himself  forward,  running 
even  on  the  point  of  Lepardo's  sword  that  was 
ready  for  Count  Antonio ;  and  the  sword  of 
Lepardo  passed  through  the  breast  of  the  hermit 
of  the  vault,  and  protruded  behind  his  back  be- 
tween his  shoulders ;  and  he  fell  prone  on  the 
floor  of  the  vault,  crying  exultantly,  "  Death ! 
Thanks  be  to  God,  death  !  "  And  then  and  there 
he  died  of  the  thrust  that  Lepardo  gave  him. 
But  Antonio  with  Bena  and  three  more — for  two 
of  Bena's  five  were  siain — drove  Lepardo  and  his 
men  back  before  them,  and  thus  won  their  way 


232     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

to  the  gate  of  the  vault,  where,  to  their  joy,  they 
found  that  Tommasino  more  than  held  his  own; 
for  he  had  scattered  Lepardo's  men,  and  the 
Syndic's  were  in  full  flight,  save  eight  or  ten  of 
the  old  soldiers  who  had  served  in  Free  Com- 
panies ;  and  these  stood  in  a  group,  their  swords 
in  their  right  hands  and  daggers  in  the  left, 
determined  to  die  dearly ;  and  the  grizzly-haired 
fellow  who  had  killed  Antonio's  horse  had  as- 
sumed command  of  them. 

"  Here  are  some  fellows  worth  fighting,  my 
lord,"  said  Bena  to  Tommasino  joyfully.  "  Let 
us  meet  them,  my  lord,  man  for  man,  an  equal 
number  of  us."  For  although  Bena  had  killed 
one  man  and  maimed  another  in  the  vault,  he 
saw  no  reason  for  staying  his  hand. 

"Aye,  Bena,"  laughed  Tommasino.  "These 
fellows  deserve  to  die  at  the  hands  of  men  like 
us." 

But  while  they  prepared  to  attack,  Antonio 
cried  suddenly,  "  Let  them  be !  There  are 
enough  men  dead  over  this  matter  of  Cesare's 
treasure."  And  he  compelled  Tommasino  and 
Bena    to   come   with   him,   although   they   were 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   HERMIT. 


233 


very  reluctant ;  and  they  seized  horses  that  had 

belonged  to  Lepardo's  men;  and,  one  of  Tom- 

masino's   men   also   being  dead,    Bena    took   his 

horse.     Then  Antonio    said   to   the   men   of   the 

Free   Companies,  "  What   is   your    quarrel  with 

me  ?     I  do  but  take  what  is  mine.     Go  in  peace. 

This  Syndic  is  no  master   of   yours."     But  the 

men  shook  their  heads  and  stood  their  ground. 

Then  Antonio  turned  and  rode  to  the  entrance 

of  the  vault  where  his  band  was  now  besieging 

Lepardo,  and  he  cried  to  Lepardo,  "  Confer  with 

me,    sir.     You    can    come    forth    safely."     And 

Lepardo  came   out   from  the  vault,  having  lost 

there  no  fewer  than  five  men,  and  having  others 

wounded ;  and  he  was   himself  wounded  in  his 

right  arm  and  could  not  hold  his  sword.     Then 

the  Count  said  to  him,  "  Sir,  it  is  no  shame  for  a 

man  to  yield  when  fortune  is  against  him.     And 

I  trust  that  I  am  one  to  whom  a  gentleman  may 

yield  without  shame.     See,  the  Syndic's  men  are 

fled,  and  yours  are  scattered,  and  these  men,  who 

stand  bravely  together,  are  not  enough  to  resist 

me." 

And    Lepardo    answered    sadly — for   he   was 
16 


234 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


very  sorry  that  he  had  failed  to  take  Antonio — 
"  Indeed,  my  lord,  we  are  worsted.  For  we  are 
not  ten  men  against  one,  as  I  think  they  should 
be  who  seek  to  overcome  my  lord  Antonio." 

To  this  Antonio  bowed  most  courteously, 
saying,  "  Nay,  it  is  rather  fortune,  sir." 

And  Lepardo  said,  "  Yet  we  can  die,  in  case 
you  put  unseemly  conditions  on  us,  my  lord." 

"  There  is  no  condition  save  that  you  fight  no 
more  against  me  to-day,"  said  Antonio. 

"  So  let  it  be,  my  lord,"  said  Lepardo ;  and  to 
this  the  men  of  the  Free  Companies  also  agreed, 
and  they  mingled  with  Antonio's  band,  and  two 
of  them  joined  themselves  to  Antonio  that  day, 
and  were  with  him  henceforward,  one  being 
afterwards  slain  on  Mount  Agnino,  and  the 
other  preserving  his  life  through  all  the  perils 
that  beset  the  Count's  company. 

Then  Antonio  went  back  to  the  house  of 
Cesare,  and  brought  forth  the  body  of  Cesare, 
and,  having  come  to  the  vault,  he  caused  those 
who  had  been  slain  to  be  carried  out,  and  set  the 
coffins  again  in  decent  order,  and  laid  Cesare, 
the    last    of    the    house,   there.     But    when    the 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE    HERMIT.         235 

corpse  of  the  hermit  was  brought  out,  all  mar- 
velled very  greatly,  and  had  much  compassion 
for  him  when  they  heard  from  the  lips  of  Count 
Antonio  his  pitiful  story  ;  and  Antonio  bestowed 
out  of  the  moneys  that  he  had  from  Cesare  a 
large  sum  that  masses  might  be  said  for  the  soul 
of  the  hermit.:.  "For  of  a  surety,"  said  the  Count, 
"it  was  Heaven's  will  that  through  his  misfor- 
"^ne  and  the  strange  madness  that  came  upon 
him  my  life  should  be  saved." 

These  things  done,  Antonio  gathered  his 
band,  and,  having  taken  farewell  of  Lepardo  and 
commended  him  for  the  valour  of  his  struggle, 
prepared  to  ride  back  to  the  hills.  And  his  face 
was  grave,  for  he  was  considering  earnestly  how 
he  should  escape  the  hundred  men  who  lay 
watching  for  him  in  the  plain.  But  while  he 
considered,  Tommasino  came  to  him  and  said, 
"  All  Baratesta  is  ours,  cousin.  Cannot  we  get  a 
change  of  coat,  and  thus  ride  with  less  notice 
from  the  Duke's  camp  ?  "  And  Antonio  laughed 
also,  and  they  sent  and  caught  twenty  men  of 
Baratesta,  grave  merchants  and  petty  traders, 
and  among  them  Bena  laid  hold  of  the  Sjmdic, 


236     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

and  brought  him  in  his  chair  to  Antonio ;  and 
the  Count  said  to  the  Syndic,  "  It  is  ill  meddling 
with  the  affairs  of  better  men,  Master  Syndic. 
Off  with  that  gown  of  yours ! " 

And  they  stripped  the  Syndic  of  his  gown, 
and  Antonio  put  on  the  gown.  Thus  the  Syn- 
dic had  need  very  speedily  of  the  new  gown 
which  he  had  contracted  to  purchase  of  the 
lame  tailor  as  the  price  of  the  tailor's  informa- 
tion. And  all  Antonio's  men  clothed  themselves 
like  merchants  and  traders,  Antonio  in  the  Syn- 
dic's gown  taking  his  place  at  their  head  ;  and 
thus  soberly  attired,  they  rode  out  soberly  from 
Baratesta,  neither  Lepardo  nor  any  of  his  men 
being  able  to  restrain  themselves  from  laughter 
to  see  them  go ;  and  most  strange  of  all  was 
Bcna,  who  wore  an  old  man's  gown  of  red  cloth 
trimmed  with  fur. 

It  was  now  noon,  and  the  band  rode  slowly, 
for  the  sun  was  very  hot,  and  several  times  they 
paused  to  take  shelter  under  clumps  of  trees,  so 
that  the  afternoon  waned  before  they  came  in 
sight  of  the  Duke's  encampment.  Soon  then 
they  were  seen  in  their  turn ;  and  a  young  officer 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE    HERMIT.         237 

of  the  Guard  with  three  men  came  pricking  to- 
wards them  to  learn  their  business ;  and  An- 
tonio hunched  the  Syndic's  gown  about  his  neck 
and  pulled  his  cap  down  over  his  eyes,  and 
thus  received  the  officer.  And  the  officer  was 
deluded  and  did  not  know  him,  but  said,  "  Is 
there  news,  Syndic  ?  " 

"  Yes,  there  is  news,"  said  Antonio.  "  The 
'Thermit  of  the  vault  of  the  Peschetti  is  dead  at 
Baratesta." 

"  I  know  naught  of  him,"  said  the  officer. 

By  this  time  Antonio's  men  had  all  crowded 
round  the  officer  and  his  companions,  hemming 
them  in  on  every  side  ;  and  those  that  watched 
from  the  Duke's  camp  saw  the  merchants  and 
traders  flocking  round  the  officer,  and  said  to 
themselves,  "They  are  offering  wares  to  him." 
But  Antonio  said,  "How,  sir?  You  have  never 
heard  of  the  hermit  of  the  vault?" 

"  I  have  not.  Syndic,"  said  the  officer. 

"  He  was  a  man,  sir,"  said  Antonio,  "  who 
dwelt  with  the  dead  in  a  vault,  and  was  so  enam- 
oured of  death,  that  he  greeted  it  as  a  man  greets 
a  dear  friend  who  has  tarried  overlong  in  coming." 


238      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  In  truth,  a  strange  mood  !  "  cried  the  officer. 
"  I  think  this  hermit  was  mad." 

"  I  also  think  so,"  said  Antonio. 

"  I  cannot  doubt  of  it,"  cried  the  officer. 

"  Then,  sir,  you  are  not  of  his  mind  ?  "  asked 
Antonio,  smiling.  "  You  would  not  sleep  this 
night  with  the  dead,  nor  hold  out  your  hands 
to  death  as  to  a  dear  friend  ? " 

"  By  St.  Frisian,  no,"  said  the  young  officer 
with  a  laugh.  "  For  this  world  is  well  enough, 
Syndic,  and  I  have  sundry  trifling  sins  that  I 
would  be  quit  of,  before  I  face  another." 

"  If  that  be  so,  sir,"  said  Antonio,  "  return  to 
him  who  sent  you,  and  say  that  the  Syndic  of 
Baratesta  rides  here  with  a  company  of  friends 
and  that  his  business  is  lawful  and  open  to  no 
suspicion."  And  even  as  Antonio  spoke,  every 
man  drew  his  dagger,  and  there  were  three 
daggers  at  the  heart  of  the  officer  and  three  at 
the  heart  of  each  of  the  men  with  him.  "  For 
by  saying  this,"  continued  the  Count,  fixing  his 
eyes  on  the  officer,  "  and  by  no  other  means  can 
you  escape  immediate  death." 

Then   the    officer   looked    to    right    and    left, 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE    HERMIT.         239 

being  very  much  bewildered ;  but  Tommasino 
touched  him  on  the  arm  and  said,  "You  have 
fallen,  sir,  into  the  hands  of  the  Count  Antonio. 
Take  an  oath  to  do  as  he  bids  you,  and  save 
your  life."  And  Antonio  took  off  the  Syndic's 
cap  and  showed  his  face  ;  and  Bena  rolled  up 
the  sleeve  of:,  his  old  man's  gown  and  showed 
the  muscles  of  his  arm. 
.*  "  The  Count  Antonio !  "  cried  the  officer  and 
his  men  in  great  dismay. 

"  Yes ;  and  we  are  four  to  one,"  said  Tom- 
masino. "  You  have  no  choice,  sir,  between  the 
oath  and  immediate  death.  And  it  seems  to  me 
that  you  are  indeed  not  of  the  mind  of  the  hermit 
of  the  vault." 

But  the  officer  cried,  "  My  honour  will  not 
suffer  this  oath,  my  lord."  And,  hearing  this, 
Bena  advanced  his  dagger. 

But  Antonio  smiled  again  and  said,  "  Then  I 
will  not  force  it  on  you,  sir.  But  this  much  I 
must  force  on  you — to  swear  to  abide  here  for 
half-an-hour,  and  during  that  time  to  send  no 
word  and  make  no  sign  to  your  camp." 

To  this  the  officer,  having  no  choice  between 


240     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

it  and  death,  agreed  ;  and  Antonio,  leaving  him, 
rode  forward  softly  ;  and,  riding  softly,  he  passed 
within  half-a-mile  of  the  Duke's  encampment. 
But  at  this  moment  the  officer,  seeing;  Antonio  far 
away,  broke  his  oath,  and  shouted  loudly,  "  It  is 
Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto ;  "  and  set  spurs  to  his 
horse.  Then  Antonio's  brow  grew  dark  and  he 
said,  "  Ride  on  swiftly,  all  of  you,  to  the  hills,  and 
leave  me  here." 

"  My  lord ! "  said  Tommasino,  beseeching 
him. 

"  Ride  on  !  "  said  Antonio  sternly.  "  Ride  at  a 
gallop.     You  will  draw  them  off  from  me." 

And  they  dared  not  disobey  him,  but  all  rode 
on.  And  now  there  was  a  stir  in  the  Duke's 
camp,  men  running  for  their  arms  and  their 
horses.  But  Antonio's  band  set  themselves  to 
a  gallop,  making  straight  for  the  hills ;  and  the 
commander  of  the  Duke's  Guard  did  not  know 
what  to  make  of  the  matter ;  for  he  had  heard 
the  officer  cry  "Antonio,"  but  did  not  understand 
what  he  meant ;  therefore  there  was  a  short  delay 
before  the  pursuit  after  the  band  was  afoot ;  and 
the  band  thus  gained  an  advantage,  and  Antonio 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   HERMIT.         241 

turned  away,  saying,  "  It  is  enough.  They  will 
come  safe  to  the  hills." 

But  he  himself  drew  his  sword  and  set  spurs 
to  his  horse,  and  he  rode  towards  where  the 
young-  officer  was.  And  at  first  the  officer  came 
boldly  to  meet  him  ;  then  he  wavered,  and  his 
cheek  went  pale ;  and  he  said  to  the  men  who 
rode  with  him,  "  We  are  four  to  one." 

"  But  one  of  them  answered,  "  Four  to  two, 


sir. 


"What  do  you  mean?"  cried  the  officer,  "I 
see  none  coming  towards  us  but  Count  Antonio 
himself." 

"  Is  not  God  also  against  oath-breakers?"  said 
the  fellow,  and  he  looked  at  his  comrades.  And 
they  nodded  their  heads  to  him  ;  for  they  were 
afraid  to  fight  by  the  side  of  a  man  who  had 
broken  his  oath.  Moreover  the  figure  of  the 
Count  was  very  terrible ;  and  the  three  turned 
aside  and  left  the  young  officer  alone. 

Now  by  this  time  the  whole  of  the  Duke's 
encampment  was  astir ;  but  they  followed  not 
after  Antonio,  but  after  Tommasino  and  the  rest 
of  the  band  ;  for  they  did  not  know  Antonio  in 


242 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


the  Syndic's  gown.  Thus  the  young  officer  was 
left  alone  to  meet  Antonio ;  and  when  he  saw  this 
his  heart  failed  him  and  his  courage  sank,  and  he 
dared  not  await  Antonio,  but  he  turned  and  set 
spurs  to  his  horse,  and  fled  away  from  Antonio 
across  the  plain.  And  Antonio  pursued  after 
him,  and  was  now  very  near  upon  him ;  so  that 
the  officer  saw  that  he  would  soon  be  overtaken, 
and  the  reins  fell  from  his  hand  and  he  sat  on  his 
horse  like  a  man  smitten  with  a  palsy,  shaking 
and  trembling :  and  his  horse,  being  unguided, 
stumbled  as  it  went,  and  the  officer  fell  off  from 
it ;  and  he  lay  very  still  on  the  ground.  Then 
Count  Antonio  came  up  where  the  officer  was, 
and  sat  on  his  horse,  holding  his  drawn  sword  in 
his  hand ;  and  in  an  instant  the  officer  began  to 
raise  himself;  and,  when  he  stood  up,  he  saw 
Antonio  with  his  sword  drawn.  And  Antonio 
said,  "Shall  men  without  honour  live?" 

Then  the  officer  gazed  into  the  eyes  of  the 
Count  Antonio ;  and  the  sweat  burst  forth  on  his 
forehead.  A  sudden  strange  choking  cry  came 
from  him  ;  he  dropped  his  sword  from  his  hand, 
and  with    both    hands   he   suddenly  clasped    his 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   HERMIT.         243 

heart,  uttering  now  a  great  cry  of  pain  and  hav- 
ing his  face  wrung  with  agony.  Thus  he  stood 
for  an  instant,  clutching  his  heart  with  both  his 
hands,  his  mouth  twisted  fearfully,  and  then  he 
dropped  on  to  the  ground  and  lay  still.  And 
the  Count  Antonio  sheathed  his  sword,  and 
bared  his  he^d,  saying,  "  It  is  not  my  sword,  but 
God's." 

And  he  turned  and  put  his  horse  to  a  gallop 
and  rode  away,  not  seeking  to  pass  the  Duke's 
encampment,  but  directing  his  way  towards  the 
village  of  Rilano ;  and  there  he  found  shelter  in 
the  house  of  a  friend  for  some  hours,  and  when 
night  fell,  made  his  way  safely  back  to  the  hills, 
and  found  that  the  Duke's  men  had  abandoned 
the  pursuit  of  his  company  and  that  all  of  them 
were  alive  and  safe. 

But  when  they  came  to  take  up  the  young 
officer  who  had  been  false  to  his  oath,  he  was 
dead ;  whether  from  fright  at  the  aspect  of 
Count  Antonio  and  the  imminent  doom  with 
which  he  was  threatened,  or  by  some  imme- 
diate judgment  of  Heaven,  I  know  not.  For 
very  various  are  the  dealings  of  God  with  man. 


244 


THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 


For  one  crime  He  will  slay  and  tarry  not,  and  so, 
perchance,  was  it  meted  out  to  that  officer;  but 
with  another  man  His  way  is  different,  and  He 
suffers  him  to  live  long  days,  mindful  of  his  sin, 
in  self-hatred  and  self-scorn,  and  will  not  send 
him  the  relief  of  death,  how  much  soever  the 
wretch  may  pray  for  it.  Thus  it  was  that  God 
dealt  with  the  hermit  of  the  vault  of  the 
Peschetti,  who  did  not  find  death  till  he  had 
sought  it  for  twenty-and-three  years.  I  doubt 
not  that  in  all  there  is  purpose ;  even  as  was 
shown  in  the  manner  wherein  the  hermit,  being 
himself  bound  and  tied  to  a  miserable  life,  was 
an  instrument  in  saving  the  life  of  Count 
Antonio. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

COUNT  ANTTONIO  AND   THE  LADY   OF  RILANO. 

From  the  lips  of  Tommasino  himself,  who  was 
cousin  to  Count  Antonio,  greatly  loved  by  him, 
and  partaker  of  all  his  enterprises  during  the 
time  of  his  sojourn  as  an  outlaw  in  the  hills, 
this,  the  story  of  the  Lady  of  Rilano,  came  to 
my  venerable  brother  in  Christ,  Niccolo ;  and 
the  same  Niccolo,  being  a  very  old  man,  told 
it  to  me,  so  that  I  know  that  the  story  is 
true  and  every  part  of  it,  and  tread  here  not 
on  the  doubtful  ground  of  legend,  but  on  the 
firm  rock  of  the  word  of  honest  men.  There 
is  indeed  one  thing  doubtful,  Tommasino  him- 
self being  unable  to  know  the  verity  of  it ;  yet 
that  one  thing  is  of  small  moment,  for  it  is 
no  more  than  whether  the  lady  came  first  to 
Duke    Valentine,    offering    her   aid,    or    whether 

245 


246     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  Duke,  who  since  the  affair  of  the  sacred 
bones  had  been  ever  active  in  laying  schemes 
against  Antonio,  cast  his  eyes  on  the  lady,  and, 
perceiving  that  she  was  very  fair  and  likely  to 
serve  his  turn,  sent  for  her,  and  persuaded  her  by 
gifts  and  by  the  promise  of  a  great  marriage  to 
take  the  task  in  hand. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  it  is  certain  that  in  the 
fourth  year  of  Count  Antonio's  outlawry,  the 
Lady  Venusta  came  from  Rilano,  where  she 
dwelt,  and  talked  alone  with  the  Duke  in  his 
cabinet ;  so  that  men  (and  women  with  greater 
urgency)  asked  what  His  Highness  did  to  take 
such  a  one  into  his  counsels ;  for  he  had  himself 
forbidden  her  to  live  in  the  city  and  constrained 
her  to  abide  in  her  house  at  Rilano,  by  reason  of 
reports  touching  her  fair  fame.  Nor  did  she 
then  stay  in  Firmola,  but,  having  had  audience  of 
the  Duke,  returned  straightway  to  Rilano,  and 
for  the  space  of  three  weeks  rested  there ;  and 
the  Duke  told  nothing  to  his  lords  of  what  had 
passed  between  him  and  the  lady,  while  the 
Count  Antonio  and  his  friends  knew  not  so  much 
as  that  the  Duke  had  held  conference  with  the 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  247 

lady ;  for  great  penalties  had  been  decreed 
against  any  man  who  sent  word  to  Antonio  of 
what  passed  in  Firmola,  and  the  pikemen  kept 
strict  guard  on  all  who  left  or  entered  the  city, 
so  that  it  was  rather  like  a  town  besieged  than 
the  chief  place  of  a  peaceful  realm. 

Now  at  this  time,  considering  that  his  hiding- 
place  was  too  well  known  to  the  Lord  Lorenzo 
*"')ind  certain  of  the  Duke's  Guard,  Count  Anto- 
nio descended  from  the  hills  by  night,  and,  hav- 
ing crossed  the  plain,  carrying  all  his  equipment 
with  him,  mounted  again  into  the  heights  of 
Mount  Agnino  and  pitched  his  camp  in  and  about 
a  certain  cave,  which  is  protected  on  two  sides 
by  high  rocks  and  on  the  third  by  the  steep 
banks  of  a  river,  and  can  be  approached  by  one 
path  only.  This  cave  was  known  to  the  Duke, 
but  he  could  not  force  it  without  great  loss,  so 
that  Antonio  was  well  nigh  as  safe  as  when  his 
hiding-place  had  been  unknown  ;  and  yet  he  was 
nearer  by  half  to  the  city,  and  but  seven  miles 
as  a  bird  flies  from  the  village  of  Rilano  where 
the  Lady  Venusta  dwelt ;  although  to  one  who 
travelled  by  the  only  path  that  a  man  could  go 


248      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

upright  on  his  feet  the  distance  was  hard  on 
eleven  miles.  But  no  other  place  was  so  near, 
and  from  Rilano  Antonio  drew  the  better  part 
of  the  provisions  and  stores  of  which  he  had 
need,  procuring  them  secretly  from  the  people, 
who  were  very  strictly  enjoined  by  the  Duke  to 
furnish  him  with  nothing  under  pain  of  forfeit- 
ure of  all  their  goods. 

Yet  one  day,  when  the  man  they  called  Bena 
and  a  dozen  more  rode  in  the  evening  through 
Rilano,  returning  towards  the  cave,  the  maid- 
servant of  Venusta  met  them,  and,  with  her, 
men  bearing  a  great  cask  of  fine  wine,  and  the 
maid-servant  said  to  Bena,  "  My  mistress  bids 
you  drink ;  for  good  men  should  not  suffer 
thirst." 

But  Bena  answered  her,  asking,  "  Do  you 
know  who  we  are  ?  " 

"  Aye,  I  know,  and  my  lady  knows,"  said  the 
girl.  "  But  my  lady  says  that  if  she  must  live 
at  Rilano,  then  she  will  do  what  she  pleases  in 
Rilano." 

Bena  and  his  men  looked  at  one  another,  for 
they  knew  of  His  Highness's  proclamation,  but 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.   249 

the  day  having  been  hot,  they  being  weary,  the 
wine  seeming  good,  and  a  woman  knowing  her 
own  business  best,  at  last  they  drank  heartily, 
and,  rendering  much  thanks,  rode  on  and  told 
Tommasino  what  had  been  done.  And  Tomma- 
sino  having  told  Antonio,  the  Count  was  angry 
with  Bena,  saying  that  his  gluttony  would  bring 
trouble  on  the  Lady  Venusta. 
•-'♦  "  She  should  not  tempt  a  man,"  said  Bena 
sullenly. 

All  these  things  happened  on  the  second  day 
of  the  week ;  and  on  the  fourth,  towards  even- 
ing, as  Antonio  and  Tommasino  sat  in  front  of 
the  cave,  they  saw  coming  towards  them  one  of 
the  band  named  Luigi,  a  big  fellow  who  had 
done  good  service  and  was  also  a  merry  jovial 
man  that  took  the  lead  in  good-fellowship.  And 
in  his  arms  Luigi  bore  the  Lady  Venusta.  Her 
ofown  was  dishevelled  and  torn,  and  the  velvet 
shoes  on  her  feet  were  cut  almost  to  shreds, 
and  she  lay  back  in  Luigi's  arms,  pale  and  ex- 
hausted. Luigi  came  and  set  her  down  gently 
before    Antonio,  saying,  "My    lord,  three    miles 

from  here,  in  the  steepest  and  roughest  part  of 
17 


250     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

the  way,  I  found  this  lady  sunk  on  the  ground 
and  half-swooning :  when  I  raised  her  and  asked 
how  she  came  where  she  was,  and  in  such  a 
plight,  she  could  answer  nothing  save,  '  Count 
Antonio !  Carry  me  to  Count  Antonio ! '  So  I 
have  brought  her  in  obedience  to  her  request." 

As  Luigi  ended,  Venusta  opened  her  eyes, 
and,  rising  to  her  knees,  held  out  her  hands  in 
supplication,  saying,  "  Protect  me,  my  lord,  pro- 
tect me.  For  the  Duke  has  sent  me  word  that 
to-morrow  night  he  will  burn  my  house  and  all 
that  it  holds,  and  will  take  me  and  lodge  me  in 
prison,  and  so  use  me  there  that  I  may  know  what 
befalls  those  who  give  aid  to  traitors.  And  all 
this  comes  upon  me,  my  lord,  because  I  gave  a 
draught  of  wine  to  your  men  when  they  were 
thirsty." 

"  I  feared  this  thing,"  said  Antonio,  "  and 
deeply  I  grieve  at  it.  But  I  am  loth  to  go  in 
open  war  against  the  Duke ;  moreover  in  the 
plain  he  would  be  too  strong  for  me.  What 
then  can  I  do  ?  For  here  is  no  place  in  which 
a  lady,  the  more  if  she  be  alone  and  unattended, 
can  be  lodged  with  seemliness." 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  25 1 

"  If  the  choice  be  between  this  and  a  pris- 
on  "  said  Venusta  with  a  faint  sorrowful  smile. 

"  Yet  it  might  be  that  I  could  convey  3'^ou 
beyond  His  Highness's  power,"  pursued  Antonio. 
"  But  I  fear  you  could  not  travel  far  to-night." 

"  Indeed  I  am  weary  even  to  death,"  moaned 
Venusta.         - 

"  There  is  nothing  for  it  but  that  to-night  at 
-least  she  rest  here,"  said  Antonio  to  Tommasino. 

Tommasino  frowned.  "  When  woman  comes 
in,"  said  he  behind  the  screen  of  his  hand, 
"  safety  flies  out." 

"  Better  fly  safety  than  courtesy  and  kindness, 
cousin,"  said  Count  Antonio,  and  Tommasino 
ceased  to  dissuade  him,  although  he  was  uneasy 
concerning  the  coming  of  Venusta. 

That  night,  therefore,  all  made  their  camp 
outside,  and  gave  the  cave  to  Venusta  for  her 
use,  having  made  a  curtain  of  green  boughs 
across  its  mouth.  But  again  the  next  day 
Venusta  was  too  sick  for  travel ;  nay,  she 
seemed  very  sick,  and  she  prayed  Luigi  to  go  to 
Rilano  and  seek  a  physician  ;  and  Luigi,  Antonio 
having   granted   him   permission,  went,   and   re- 


252      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

turned  saying  that  no  physician  dared  come  in 
face  of  His  Highness's  proclamation ;  but  the 
truth  was  that  Luigi  was  in  the  pay  of  Venusta 
and  of  the  Duke,  and  had  sought  by  his  journey 
not  a  physician,  but  means  of  informing  the  Duke 
how  Venusta  had  sped,  and  of  seeking  counsel 
from  him  as  to  what  should  next  be  done.  And 
that  day  and  for  four  days  more  Venusta  abode 
in  the  cave,  protesting  that  she  could  not  travel; 
and  Antonio  used  her  with  great  courtesy,  above 
all  when  he  heard  that  the  Duke,  having  stayed 
to  muster  all  his  force  for  fear  of  Antonio,  had 
at  length  appointed  the  next  day  for  the  burning 
of  her  house  at  Rilano  and  the  carrying  off  of 
all  her  goods.  These  tidings  he  gave  her,  and 
though  he  spoke  gently,  she  fell  at  once  into 
great  distress,  declaring  that  she  had  not  believed 
the  Duke  would  carry  out  his  purpose,  and  weep- 
ing for  her  jewels  and  prized  possessions  which 
were  in  the  house. 

Now  Count  Antonio,  though  no  true  man 
could  call  him  fool,  had  yet  a  simplicity  nobler  it 
may  be  than  the  suspicious  wisdom  of  those  who, 
reading  other  hearts  by  their  own,  count  all  men 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  253 

rogues  and  all  women  wanton :  and  when  he  saw 
the  lady  weeping  for  the  trinkets  and  her  loved 
toys  and  trifles,  he  said,  "  Nay,  though  I  cannot 
meet  the  Duke  face  to  face,  yet  I  will  ride  now 
and  come  there  before  him,  and  bring  what  you 
value  most  from  the  house." 

"  You  will,  be  taken,"  said  she,  and  she  gazed 

at  him  with  timid  admiring  eyes.     "  I  had  rather 

.'^  thousand  times  lose  the  jewels  than  that  you 

should  run  into  danger,  my  lord.     For  I  owe  to 

you  liberty,  and  perhaps  life." 

"  I  will  leave  Tommasino  to  guard  you  and 
ride  at  once,"  and  Antonio  rose  to  his  feet, 
smiling  at  her  for  her  foolish  fears. 

Then  a  thing  that  seemed  strange  happened. 
For  Antonio  gave  a  sudden  cry  of  pain.  And 
behold,  he  had  set  his  foot  on  the  point  of  a 
dagger  that  was  on  the  ground  near  to  the  Lady 
Venusta;  and  the  dagger  ran  deep  into  his  foot, 
for  it  was  resting  on  a  stone  and  the  point  sloped 
upwards,  so  that  he  trod  full  and  with  all  his 
weight  on  the  point ;  and  he  sank  back  on  the 
ground  with  the  dagger  in  his  foot.  How  came 
the  dagger  there?     How  came  it  to  rest  against 


254 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 


the  stone?  None  could  tell  then,  though  it 
seems  plain  to  him  that  considers  now.  None 
then  thought  that  the  lady  who  fled  to  Antonio 
as  though  he  were  her  lover,  and  lavished  tears 
and  sighs  on  him,  had  placed  it  there.  Nor  that 
honest  Luigi,  who  made  such  moan  of  his  care- 
lessness in  dropping  his  poniard,  had  taken  more 
pains  over  the  losing  of  his  weapon  than  most 
men  over  the  preservation  of  theirs.  Luigi 
cursed  himself,  and  the  lady  cried  out  on  fate  ; 
and  Count  Antonio  consoled  both  of  them,  say- 
ing that  the  wound  would  soon  be  well,  and  that 
it  was  too  light  a  matter  for  a  lady  to  dim  her 
bright  eyes  for  the  sake  of  it. 

Yet  light  as  the  matter  was,  it  was  enough  for 
Venusta's  purpose  and  for  the  scheme  of  Duke 
Valentine.  For  Count  Antonio  could  neither 
mount  his  horse  nor  go  afoot  to  Venusta's  house 
in  Rilano;  and,  if  the  jewels  were  to  be  saved 
and  the  lady's  tears  dried  (mightily,  she  declared 
with  pretty  self-reproach,  was  she  ashamed  to 
think  of  the  jewels  beside  Antonio's  hurt,  but  yet 
they  were  dear  to  her),  then  Tommasino  must  go 
in  his  place  to  Rilano. 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  255 

"  And  take  all  save  Bena  and  two  more,"  said 
Antonio.  "  For  the  Duke  will  not  come  here  if 
he  goes  to  Rilano." 

"  I,"  said  Bena,  "  am  neither  nurse  nor  phy- 
sician nor  woman.  Let  Martolo  stay;  he  says 
there  is  already  too  much  blood  on  his  con- 
science ;  and  let  me  go,  for  there  is  not  so  much 
as  I  could  bear  on  mine,  and  maybe  we  shall 
"Gave  a  chance  of  an  encounter  with  the  foreguard 
of  the  Duke." 

But  Venusta  said  to  Antonio,  "Let  both  of 
these  men  go,  and  let  Luigi  stay.  For  he  is  a 
clever  fellow,  and  will  aid  me  in  tending  your 
wound." 

"  So  be  it,"  said  Antonio.  "  Let  Luigi  and 
the  two  youngest  stay ;  and  do  the  rest  of  you 
go,  and  return  as  speedily  as  you  may.  And  the 
Lady  Venusta  shall,  of  her  great  goodness,  dress 
my  wound,  which  pains  me  more  than  such  a 
trifle  should." 

Thus  the  whole  band,  saving  Luigi  and  two 
youths,  rode  off  early  in  the  morning  with  Tom- 
masino,  their  intent  being  to  reach  Rilano  and 
get  clear  of  it  again  before  the  Duke  came  thither 


256     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

from  the  city :  and  Venusta  sent  no  message  to 
the  Duke,  seeing  that  all  had  fallen  out  most 
prosperously  and  as  had  been  arranged  between 
them.  For  the  Duke  was  not  in  truth  minded  to 
go  at  ail  to  Rilano ;  but  at  earliest  dawn,  before 
Tommasino  had  set  forth,  the  Lord  Lorenzo  left 
the  city  with  a  hundred  pikemen  ;  more  he  would 
not  take,  fearing  to  be  delayed  if  his  troop  were 
too  large ;  and  he  made  a  great  circuit,  avoiding 
Rilano  and  the  country  adjacent  to  it.  So  that 
by  mid-day  Tommasino  was  come  with  thirty- 
and-four  men  (the  whole  strength  of  the  band 
except  the  three  with  Antonio)  to  Rilano,  and, 
meeting  with  no  resistance,  entered  Venusta's 
house,  and  took  all  that  was  precious  in  it,  and 
loaded  their  horses  with  the  rich  tapestries  and 
the  choicest  of  the  furnishings ;  and  then,  having 
regaled  themselves  with  good  cheer,  started  in 
the  afternoon  to  ride  back  to  the  cave,  Tomma- 
sino and  Bena  grumbling  to  one  another  because 
they  had  chanced  on  no  fighting,  but  not  daring 
to  tarry  by  reason  of  Antonio's  orders. 

But  their   lamentations    were   without  need ; 
for    when    they    came    to    the    pass    of   Mount 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  257 

Agnino,  there  at  the  entrance  of  the  road  which 
led  up  to  the  cave,  by  the  side  of  the  river,  was 
encamped  a  force  of  eighty  pikemen  under  the 
Lieutenant  of  the  Guard.  Thus  skilfully  had  the 
Lord  Lorenzo  performed  his  duty,  and  cut  off 
Tommasino  and  his  company  from  all  access  to 
the  cave ;  and  now  he  himself  was  gone  with 
^ , twenty  men  up  the  mountain  path,  to  take  An- 
,  ^oio  according  to  the  scheme  of  the  Duke  and 
the  Lady  Venusta.  But  Bena  and  Tommasino 
were  sore  aghast,  and  said  to  one  another, 
"There  is  treachery.  What  are  we  to  do?" 
For  the  eighty  of  the  Duke's  men  were  posted 
strongly,  and  it  was  a  great  hazard  to  attack 
them.  Yet  this  risk  they  would  have  run,  for 
they  were  ready  rather  to  die  than  to  sit  there 
idle  while  Antonio  was  taken ;  and  in  all  likeli- 
hood they  would  have  died,  had  the  Lieutenant 
obeyed  the  orders  which  Lorenzo  had  given  him 
and  rested  where  he  was,  covered  by  the  hill 
and  the  river.  But  the  Lieutenant  was  a  young 
man,  of  hot  temper  and  impetuous,  and  to  his 
mistaken  pride  it  seemed  as  though  it  were  cow- 
ardice  for  eighty  men  to  shrink  from  attacking 


258      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

thirty-and-five,  and  for  the  Duke's  Guards  to 
play  for  advantage  in  a  contest  with  a  band  of 
robbers.  Moreover  Tommasino's  men  taunted 
his  men,  crying  to  them  to  come  down  and  fight 
like  men  in  the  open.  Therefore,  counting  on  a 
sure  victory  and  the  pardon  it  would  gain,  about 
three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  he  cried,  "  Let  us 
have  at  these  rascals  !  "  and  to  Tommasino's  great 
joy,  his  troop  remounted  their  horses  and  made 
ready  to  charge  from  their  position.  Then  Tom- 
masino  said,  "  We  are  all  ready  to  face  the  enemy 
for  my  lord  and  cousin's  sake.  But  I  have  need 
now  of  those  who  will  run  away  for  his  sake." 

Then  he  laid  his  plans  that  when  the  Lieuten- 
ant's troop  charged,  his  men  should  not  stand 
their  ground.  And  five  men  he  placed  on  one 
extremity  of  his  line,  Bena  at  their  head ;  and 
four  others  with  himself  he  posted  at  the  other 
extremity ;  also  he  spread  out  his  line  very  wide, 
so  that  it  stretched  on  either  side  beyond  the  line 
of  the  Lieutenant.  And  he  bade  the  twenty-and- 
five  in  the  centre  not  abide  the  onset,  but  turn 
and  flee  at  a  gallop,  trusting  to  the  speed  of  their 
horses  for  escape.    And  he  made  them  fling  away 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.    259 

all  that  they  had  brought  from  the  Lady 
Venusta's  house,  that  they  might  ride  the 
lighter. 

''And  I  pray  God,"  said  he,  "  that  you  will 
escape  alive ;  but  if  you  do  not,  it  is  only  what 
your  oath  to  my  lord  constrains  you  to.  But 
you  and  I,  Rena,  with  our  men,  will  ride,  not 
back  towards  the  plain,  but  on  towards  the  hills, 
"and  it  may  be  that  we  shall  thus  get  ahead  of 
the  Lieutenant ;  and  once  we  are  ahead  of  him 
in  the  hilly  ground,  he  will  not  catch  us  before 
we  come  to  the  cave." 

"  Unless,"  began  Bena,  "  there  be  another 
party " 

"  Hist ! "  said  Tommasino,  and  he  whispered 
to  Bena,  "  They  will  fear  if  they  hear  all." 

Then  the  Duke's  men  came  forth,  and  it  fell 
out  as  Tommasino  had  planned  ;  for  the  body  of 
the  Duke's  men,  when  they  saw  Tommasino's 
rank  broken  and  his  band  flying,  set  up  a  great 
shout  of  scorn  and  triumph,  and  dug  spurs  into 
their  horses  and  pursued  the  runaways.  And  the 
runaways  rode  at  their  top  speed,  and,  having 
come   nearly   to    Rilano   without    being   caught, 


26o     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

they  were  three  of  them  overtaken  and  captured 
by  the  well  at  the  entrance  to  the  village ;  but 
the  rest,  wheeling  to  the  right,  dashed  across  the 
plain,  making  for  Antonio's  old  hiding-place  ;  and, 
having  lost  two  more  of  their  number  whose 
horses  failed,  and  having  slain  four  of  the  Guard 
who  pursued  incautiously  ahead  of  the  rest,  they 
reached  the  spurs  of  the  hills,  and  there  scattered, 
every  man  by  himself,  and  found  refuge,  some 
in  the  woods,  some  in  shepherds'  huts  ;  so  they 
came  off  with  their  lives.  But  the  men  with 
Tommasino  and  Bena  had  ridden  straight  for  the 
hill-road,  and  had  passed  the  Lieutenant  before 
he  apprehended  Tommasino's  scheme.  Then 
he  cried  aloud  to  his  men,  and  eight  of  them, 
hearing  him,  checked  their  horses,  but  could 
not  understand  what  he  desired  of  them  till  he 
cried  aloud  again,  and  pointed  with  his  hand 
towards  where  the  ten,  Tommasino  leading  and 
Bena  in  the  rear,  had  gained  the  hill-road  and 
were  riding  up  it  as  swiftly  as  their  horses  could 
mount.  Then  the  Lieutenant,  cursing  his  own 
folly,  gathered  them,  and  they  rode  after  Tom- 
masino and  Bena. 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE  LADY   OF   RILANO.   26 1 

"  Be  of  good  heart,"  said  the  Lieutenant. 
"  They  are  between  us  and  the  company  of  my 
Lord  Lorenzo." 

Yet  though  he  said  this,  his  mind  was  not  at 
ease  ;  for  the  horses  of  his  men,  being  unaccus- 
tomed to  the  hills,  could  not  mount  the  road  as 
did  the  surefooted  mountain-horses  ridden  by 
Tommasino's  company,  and  the  space  widened 
^tween  them ;  and  at  last  Tommasino's  com- 
pany disappeared  from  sight,  at  the  point  where 
the  track  turned  sharp  to  the  left,  round  a  great 
jutting  rock  that  stood  across  the  way  and  left 
room  for  but  three  men  to  ride  abreast  between 
river  and  rock.  Then  the  Lieutenant  drew  rein 
and  took  counsel  with  his  men,  for  he  feared  that 
Tommasino  would  wait  for  him  behind  the  jut- 
ting rock  and  dash  out  on  his  fiank  as  he  rode 
round.  Therefore  for  a  while  he  considered,  and 
a  while  longer  he  allowed  for  the  breathing  of  the 
horses ;  and  then  with  great  caution  rode  on  to- 
wards the  jutting  rock,  which  lay  about  the  half 
of  a  mile  from  him.  And  when  he  came  near  it, 
he  and  his  men  heard  a  voice  cry,  "  Quiet,  quiet! 
They  are  close  now  !  " 


262      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  They  will  dash  at  us  as  we  go  round,"  said 
the  Lieutenant. 

"  And  we  can  go  no  more  than  three  to- 
gether," said  one  of  the  guards. 

"  Are  you  all  ready  ? "  said  the  voice  behind 
the  cliff,  in  accents  that  but  just  reached  round 
the  rock.  "  Not  a  sound,  for  your  lives !  "  Yet 
a  sound  there  was,  as  of  a  jingling  bit,  and  then 
again  an  angry,  "  Curse  you,  you  clumsy  fool, 
be  still."     And  then  all  was  still. 

"  They  are  ready  for  us  now,"  whispered  a 
guard,  with  an  uneasy  smile. 

"  I  will  go,"  said  the  Lieutenant.  "  Which 
two  of  you  will  lead  the  way  with  me?" 

But  the  men  grumbled,  saying,  "  It  is  the 
way  to  death  that  you  ask  us  to  lead,  sir." 

Then  the  Lieutenant  drew  his  men  back,  and 
as  they  retreated  they  made  a  noise  great 
hoping  to  make  Tommasino  think  they  were 
gone.  And,  having  thus  withdrawn  some  five 
hundred  paces,  they  rested  in  utter  quiet  for 
half  an  hour.  And  it  was  then  late  afternoon. 
And  the  Lieutenant  said,  "  I  will  go  first  alone, 
and   in    all    likelihood    I    shall  be    slain  ;  but   do 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE  LADY  OF   RILANO.   263 

you  follow  immediately  after  me  and  avenge 
my  death."  And  this  they,  being  ashamed  for 
their  first  refusal,  promised  to  do.  Then  the 
Lieutenant  rode  softly  forward  till  he  came 
within  twenty  yards  of  the  rock,  and  he  clapped 
spurs  to  his  horse  and  shouted,  and,  followed 
close  by  his  men  crying,  "For  God  and  our 
Duke  !  "  charged  round  the  jutting  rock. 
***  And  behold,  on  the  other  side  of  it  was  not 
a  man !  And  of  Tommasino  and  his  company 
naught  was  to  be  seen — for  they  had  used  the 
last  hour  to  put  a  great  distance  between  them 
and  their  pursuers — save  that  away,  far  up  the 
road,  in  the  waning  light  of  the  sun,  was  to  be 
dimly  perceived  the  figure  of  a  man  on  horse- 
back, who  waved  his  hat  to  them  and,  turning, 
was  in  an  instant  lost  to  view.  And  this  man 
was  Bena,  who,  by  himself  and  without  a  blow, 
had  held  the  passage  of  the  jutting  rock  for 
hard  on  an  hour,  and  thus  given  time  to  Tom- 
masino to  ride  on  and  come  upon  the  rear 
of  Lorenzo's  company  before  the  Lieutenant 
and  his  men  could  hem  them  in  on  the  other 
side. 


264     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT    ANTONIO. 

Thus  had  the  day  worn  to  evening,  and  long 
had  the  day  seemed  to  Antonio,  who  sat  before 
the  mouth  of  the  cave,  with  Venusta  by  his 
side.  All  day  they  had  sat  thus  alone,  for 
Luigi  and  the  two  youths  had  gone  to  set 
snares  in  the  wood  behind  the  cave — or  such 
was  the  pretext  Luigi  made  ;  and  Antonio  had 
let  them  go,  charging  them  to  keep  in  earshot. 
As  the  long  day  passed,  Antonio,  seeking  to 
entertain  the  lady  and  find  amusement  for  her 
through  the  hours,  began  to  recount  to  her  all 
that  he  had  done,  how  he  had  seized  the  Sacred 
Bones,  the  manner  of  his  difference  with  the 
Abbot  of  St.  Frisian,  and  much  else.  But  of 
the  killing  of  Duke  Paul  he  would  not  speak  ; 
nor  did  he  speak  of  his  love  for  Lucia  till 
Venusta  pressed  him,  making  parade  of  great 
sympathy  for  him.  But  when  he  had  set  his 
tongue  to  the  task,  he  grew  eloquent,  his  eyes 
gleamed  and  his  cheek  flushed,  and  he  spoke 
in  the  low  reverent  voice  that  a  true  lover  uses 
when  he  speaks  of  his  mistress,  as  though  his 
wonted  accents  were  too  common  and  mean  for 
her  name.      And    Venusta   sat   listening,  casting 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.   265 

now  and  again  a  look  at  him  out  of  her  deep 
eyes,  and  finding  his  eyes  never  on  hers  but 
filled  with  the  fancied  vision  of  Lucia.  And  at 
last,  growing  impatient  with  him,  she  broke 
out  petulantly,  "  Is  this  girl,  then,  different  from 
all  others,  that  you  speak  of  her  as  though  she 
were  a  goddess  ?  " 

"  I  would  not  have  spoken  of  her  but  that 
*Jt)u  pressed  me,"  laughed  Antonio.  "  Yet  in 
my  eyes  she  is  a  goddess,  as  every  maid  should 
be  to  her  lover." 

Venusta  caught  a  twig  from  the  ground  and 
broke  it  sharp  across.  "  Boys'  talk !  "  said  she, 
and  flung  the  broken  twig  away. 

Antonio  laughed  gently,  and  leant  back, 
resting  on  the  rock.  "  May  be,"  said  he. 
"  Yet  is  there  none  who  talks  boys'  talk  for 
you  ?" 

"  I  love  men,"  said  she,  "not  boys.  And  if 
I  were  a  man  I  think  I  would  love  a  woman, 
not  a  goddess." 

"  It  is    Heaven's    chance,  I    doubt    not,"  said 

Antonio,    laughing    again.      "  Had    you    and     I 

chanced  to  love,  we  should  not  have  quarrelled 
^8 


266     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

with  the  boys'  talk  nor  at  the  name  of  god- 
dess." 

She  flushed  suddenly  and  bit  her  lip,  but 
she  answered  in  raillery,  "  Indeed  had  it  been 
so,  a  marvel  of  a  lover  I  should  have  had  ! 
For  you  have  not  seen  your  mistress  for  many, 
many  months,  and  yet  you  are  faithful  to  her. 
Are  you  not,  my  lord?" 

"  Small  credit  not  to  wander  where  you  love 
to  rest,"  said  Antonio. 

"  And  yet  youth  goes  in  waiting,  and  delights 
missed  come  not  again,"  said  she,  leaning  to- 
wards him  with  a  light  in  her  eyes,  and  scan- 
ning his  fair  hair  and  bronzed  cheek,  his  broad 
shoulders  and  the  sinewy  hands  that  nursed  his 
knee. 

"  It  may  well  be  that  they  will  not  come  to 
me,"  he  said.  "  For  the  Duke  has  a  halter 
ready  for  my  throat,  if  by  force  or  guile  he 
can  take  me." 

She  started  at  these  words,  searching  his 
face  ;  but  he  was  calm  and  innocent  of  any  hid- 
den meaning.  She  forced  a  laugh  as  she  said, 
twisting    a  curl  of    her   hair    round    her   finger, 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   LADY  OF  RILANO.    267 

"  The  more   reason   to  waste  no  time,  my  Lord 
Antonio." 

Antonio  shook  his  head  and  said  lightly, 
"  But  I  think  he  cannot  take  me  by  force,  and 
I  know  of  no  man  in  all  the  Duchy  that  would 
betray  me  to  a  shameful  death." 

"And    of  jQO  woman?"  she    asked,    glancing- 
at  him  from  under  drooping  lashes. 
"^*    "  No,  for  I  have  wronged  none ;  and   women 
are  not  cruel." 

"  Yet  there  may  be  some,  my  lord,  who  call 
you  cruel  and  therefore  would  be  cruel  in  ven- 
geance. A  lover  faithful  as  you  can  have  but 
one  friend  among  women." 

"I  know  of  none  such,"  he  laughed.  "And 
surely  the  vengeance  would  be  too  great  for  the 
offence,  if  there  were  such." 

"Na}^,  I  know  not  that,"  said  Venusta,  frown- 
ing. 

"  I  would  trust  myself  to  any  woman,  even 
though  the  Duke  offered  her  great  rewards,  aye, 
as  readily  as  I  put  faith  in  Lucia  herself,  or  in 
you." 

"You  couple  me  with  her?" 


268      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  In  that  matter  most  readily,"  said  Antonio. 

"But  in  nothing  else?"  she  asked,  flushing 
again  in  anger,  for  still  his  eyes  were  distant, 
and  he  turned  them  never  on  her. 

"You  must  pardon  me,"  he  said.  "Myejxs 
are  blinded." 

For  a  moment  she  sat  silent ;  then  she  said 
in  a  low  voice,  "  But  blind  eyes  have  learned  to 
see  before  now,  my  lord." 

Then  Antonio  set  his  eyes  on  her;  and  now 
she  could  not  meet  them,  but  turned  her  burn- 
ing face  away.  For  her  soul  was  in  tumult, 
and  she  knew  not  now  whether  she  loved  or 
hated  him,  nor  whether  she  would  save  or  still 
betray  him.  And  the  trust  he  had  in  her 
gnawed  her  guilty  heart.  So  that  a  sudden 
passion  seized  her,  and  she  caught  Antonio  by 
the  arm,  crying,  "  But  if  a  woman  held  your  life 
in  her  hand  and  asked  your  love  as  its  price, 
Antonio?" 

"  Such  a  thing  could  not  be,"  said  he,  won- 
dering. 

"Nay,  but  it  might.     And  if  it  were?" 

And  Antonio,  marvelling  more   and  more  at 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  269 

her  vehemence,  answered,  "  Love  is  dear,  and 
honour  is  dear;  but  we  of  Monte  Velluto  hold 
life  of  no  great  price." 

"  Yet  it  is  a  fearful  and  shameful  thing  to 
hang  from  the  city  wall." 

"There  are  worse  things,"  said  he.  "But 
indeed  I  count  not  to  do  it ;  "  and  he  laughed 
again. 

*  Venusta  sprang  to  her  feet  and  paced  the 
space  between  the  cave  and  the  river  bank  with 
restless  steps.  Once  she  flung  her  hands  above 
her  head  and  clasped  them  ;  then,  holding  them 
clasped  in  front  of  her,  she  stood  by  Antonio 
and  bent  over  him,  till  her  hair,  falling  forward 
as  she  stooped,  brushed  his  forehead  and  min- 
gled with  his  fair  locks ;  and  she  breathed 
softly  his  name,  "  Antonio,  Antonio  !  "  At  this 
he  looked  up  with  a  great  start,  stretching  up 
his  hand  as  though  to  check  her ;  but  he  said 
nothing.  And  she,  suddenly  sobbing,  fell  on 
her  knees  by  him  ;  yet,  as  suddenly,  she  ceased 
to  sob,  and  a  smile  came  on  her  lips,  and 
she  leant  towards  him,  saying  again,  "  An- 
tonio." 


270     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  I  pray  you,  I  pray  you,"  said  he,  seeking 
to  stay  her  courteously. 

Then,  careless  of  her  secret,  she  flashed  out 
in  wrath,  "  Ah,  you  scorn  me,  my  lord !  You 
care  nothing  for  me.  I  am  dirt  to  you.  Yet  I 
hold  your  life  in  my  hand ! "  And  then  in  an 
instant  she  grew  again  softened,  beseeching, 
"  Am  1  so  hideous,  dear  lord,  that  death  is  bet- 
ter than  my  love?  For  if  you  will  love  me,  I 
will  save  you." 

"  I  know  not  how  my  life  is  in  your  hands," 
said  he,  glad  to  catch  at  that  and  leave  the  rest 
of  what  Venusta  said. 

"  Is  there  any  path  that  leads  higher  up  into 
the  mountains?"  she  asked. 

"  Yes,  there  is  one,"  said  he ;  "  but  if  need 
came  now,  I  could  not  climb  it  with  this  wounded 
foot  of  mine." 

"  Luigi  and  the  young  men  could  carry  you?" 

"  Yes  ;  but  what  need  ?  Tommasino  and  the 
band  will  return  soon." 

But  she  caught  him  by  the  hand,  crying, 
"  Rise,  rise  ;  call  the  men  and  let  them  carry  you. 
Come,  there  is  no  time  for  lingering.     And  if  I 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF    RILANO.   271 

save  you,  my  Lord  Antonio ? "  And  a  yearn- 
ing question  sounded  in  her  voice. 

"  If  you  save  me  a  thousand  times,  I  can  do 
nothing  else  than  pray  you  spare  me  what  is 
more  painful  than  death  to  me,"  said  he,  look- 
ing away  from  her  and  being  himself  in  great 
confusion.        »ji 

"  Come,  come,"  she  cried.  "  Call  them  !  Per- 
Ti^^ps  some  day !     Call  them,  Antonio." 

But  as  she  spoke,  before  Antonio  could  call, 
there  came  a  loud  cry  from  the  wood  behind  the 
cave,  the  cry  of  a  man  in  some  great  strait.  An- 
tonio's hand  flew  to  his  sword,  and  he  rose  to  his 
feet,  and  stood  leaning  on  his  sword.  Then  he 
cried  aloud  to  Luigi.  And  in  a  moment  Luigi 
and  one  of  the  youths  came  running ;  and  Luigi, 
casting  one  glance  at  Venusta,  said  breathlessly, 
"  My  lord,  Jacopo's  foot  slipped,  and  the  poor 
fellow  has  fallen  down  a  precipice  thirty  feet  deep 
on  to  the  rocks  below,  and  we  fear  that  he  is  sore 
hurt." 

Venusta  sprang  a  step  forward,  for  she  sus- 
pected (what  the  truth  was)  that  Luigi  himself 
had   aided   the   slipping   of    Jacopo's   foot   by   a 


272      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

sudden  lurch  against  him  ;  but  she  said  nothing, 
and  Antonio  bade  Luigi  go  quick  and  look  after 
Jacopo,  and  take  the  other  youth  with  him. 

"  But  we  shall  leave  you  unguarded,  my  lord," 
said  Luigi  with  a  cunning  show  of  solicitude. 

"  I  am  in  no  present  danger,  and  the  youth 
may  be  dying.     Go  speedily,"  said  Antonio. 

Luigi  turned,  and  with  the  other  youth  (Tom- 
masino  told  Niccolo  his  name,  but  Niccolo  had 
forgotten  it)  rushed  off;  and  even  as  he  went, 
Venusta  cried,  "  It  is  a  lie !  You  yourself  brought 
it  about !  "  But  Luigi  did  not  hear  her,  and  An- 
tonio, left  again  alone,  asked  her,  "  What  mean 


you 


?" 


"  Nay,  I  mean  naught,"  said  she,  affrighted, 
and,  when  faced  by  his  inquiring  eyes,  not  daring 
to  confess  her  treachery. 

"  I  hope  the  lad  is  not  killed,"  said  An- 
tonio. 

"  I  care  not  for  a  thousand  lads.  Think  of 
yourself,  my  lord  !  "  And  planning  to  rouse  An- 
tonio without  betraying  herself,  she  said,  "  I  dis- 
trust this  man  Luigi.  Is  he  faithful  ?  The  Duke 
can  offer  great  rewards." 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  273 

''  He  has  served  me  well.  I  have  no  reason  to 
mistrust  him,"  said  Antonio. 

"  Ah,  you  trust  every  one !  "  she  cried  in  pas- 
sion and  in  scorn  of  his  simplicity.  "  You  trust 
Luigi !     You  trust  me  !  " 

"  Why  not  ?  "  said  he.  "  But  indeed  now  I 
have  no  choice.  For  they  cannot  carry  both 
Jacopo  and  me  up  the  path." 

*^*    "  Jacopo  !     You  would  stay  for  Jacopo  ?  "  she 
flashed  out  fiercely. 

"  If  nothing  else,  yet  my  oath  would  bind  me 
not  to  leave  him  while  he  lives.  For  we  of  the 
band  are  all  bound  to  one  another  as  brethren  by 
an  oath,  and  it  would  look  ill  if  I,  for  whom  they 
all  have  given  much,  were  the  first  to  break  the 
oath.  So  here  I  am,  and  here  I  must  stay,"  and 
Antonio  ended  smiling,  and,  his  foot  hurting  him 
while  he  stood,  sat  down  again  and  rested  against 
the  rock. 

It  was  now  late,  and  evening  fell;  and  Venusta 
knew  that  the  Duke's  men  should  soon  be  upon 
them.  And  she  sat  down  near  Antonio  and 
buried  her  face  in  her  hands,  and  she  wept.  For 
Antonio  had  so  won  on  her  by  his  honour  and 


274     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

his  gentleness,  and  most  of  all  by  his  loyal  cling- 
ing to  the  poor  boy  Jacopo,  that  she  could  not 
think  of  her  treachery  without  loathing  and 
horror.  Yet  she  dared  not  tell  him ;  that  now 
seemed  worse  to  her  than  death.  And  while 
they  sat  thus,  Luigi  came  and  told  Antonio  that 
the  youth  was  sore  hurt  and  that  they  could  not 
lift  him. 

"  Then  stay  by  him,"  said  Antonio.  "  I  need 
nothing." 

And  Luigi  bowed,  and,  turning,  went  back  to 
the  other  youth,  and  bade  him  stay  by  Jacopo, 
while  he  went  by  Antonio's  orders  to  seek  for 
some  one  to  aid  in  carrying  him.  "  I  may 
chance,"  said  he,  "  to  find  some  shepherds."  So  he 
went,  not  to  seek  shepherds,  but  to  seek  the  Duke's 
men,  and  tell  them  that  they  might  safely  come 
upon  Antonio,  for  he  had  now  none  to  guard  him. 

Then  Antonio  said  to  Venusta,  "  Why  do  you 
sit  and  weep?" 

For  he  thought  that  she  wept  because  he  had 
scorned  the  love  in  which  her  words  declared 
her  to  hold  him,  and  he  was  sorry.  But  she 
made  no  answer. 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  275 

And  he  went  on,  "  I  pray  you,  do  not  weep. 
For  think  not  that  I  am  blind  to  your  beauty 
or  to  the  sweet  kindness  which  you  have  be- 
stowed upon  me.  And  in  all  things  that  I  may, 
I  will  truly  and  faithfully  serve  you  to  my 
death." 

Then  she  raiged  her  head  and  she  said,  "  That 
will  not  be  long-,  Antonio." 
•*-«  J  know  not,  but  for  so  long  as  it  may  be," 
said  he. 

"  It  will  not  be  long,"  she  said  again,  and  burst 
into  quick  passionate  sobs,  that  shook  her  and 
left  her  at  last  breathless  and  exhausted. 

Antonio  looked  at  her  for  a  while  and  said, 
"  There  is  something  that  you  do  not  tell  me. 
Yet  if  it  be  anything  that  causes  you  pain  or 
shame,  you  may  tell  me  as  readily  as  you  would 
any  man.  For  I  am  not  a  hard  man,  and  I 
have  many  things  on  my  own  conscience  that 
forbid  me  to  judge  harshly  of  another." 

She  raised  her  head  and  she  lifted  her  hand 
into  the  air.  The  stillness  of  evening  had 
fallen,  and  a  light  wind  blew  up  from  the 
plain.      There  seemed    no   sound   save   from  the 


2/6     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

flowing  of  the  river  and  the  gentle  rustle  of  the 
trees. 

"  Hark !  "  said  she.  "  Hark  !  hark  !  "  and  with 
every  repetition  of  the  word  her  voice  rose  till 
it  ended  in  a  cry  of  terror. 

Antonio  set  his  hand  to  his  ear  and  listened 
intently.  "  It  is  the  sound  of  men's  feet  on  the 
rocky  path,"  said  he,  smiling.  "  Tommasino  re- 
turns, and  I  doubt  not  that  he  brings  your 
jewels  with  him.  Will  you  not  give  him  a 
smiling  welcome?  Aye,  and  to  me  also  your 
smiles  would  be  welcome.  For  your  weeping 
melts  my  heart,  and  the  dimness  of  your  eyes 
is  like  a  cloud  across  the  sun." 

Venusta's  sobs  had  ceased,  and  she  looked  at 
Antonio  with  a  face  calm,  white,  and  set.  "  It 
is  not  the  Lord  Tommasino,"  she  said.  "  The 
men  you  hear  are  the  Duke's  men  ; "  and  then 
and  there  she  told  him  the  whole.  Yet  she 
spoke  as  though  neither  he  nor  any  other  were 
there,  but  as  though  she  rehearsed  for  her  own 
ear  some  lesson  that  she  had  learnt ;  so  lifeless 
and  monotonous  was  her  voice  as  it  related  the 
shameful  thing.     And  at  last   she  ended  saying, 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  277 

"  Thus  in  an  hour  jou  will  be  dead,  or  captured 
and  held  for  a  worse  death.  It  is  I  who  have 
done  it."  And  she  bent  her  head  again  to  meet 
her  hands ;  yet  she  did  not  cover  her  face,  but 
rested  her  chin  on  her  hands,  and  her  eyes  were 
fixed  immovably  on  Count  Antonio. 

For  the  space  of  a  minute  or  two  he  sat 
silent.  Then  he  said,  "  I  fear,  then,  that  Tom- 
jni^ino  and  the  rest  have  had  a  fight  against 
great  odds.  But  they  are  stout  fellows,  Tom- 
masino,  and  old  Bena,  and  the  rest.  I  hope  it 
is  well  with  them."  Then,  after  a  pause,  he  went 
on,  "  Yes,  the  sound  of  the  steps  comes  nearer. 
They  will  be  here  before  long  now.  But  I  had 
not  thought  it  of  Luigi.  The  rogue !  I  trust 
they  will  not  find  the  two  lads." 

Venusta  sat  silent,  waiting  for  him  to  re- 
proach her.  He  read  her  thought  on  her  face, 
and  he  smiled  at  her,  and  said  to  her,  "  Go  and 
meet  them  ;  or  go,  if  you  will,  away  up  the  path. 
For  you  should  not  be  here  when  the  end 
comes." 

Then  she  flung  herself  at  his  feet,  asking  for- 
giveness,  but    finding  no  word  for  her   prayer. 


278      THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"Aye,  aye,"  said  he  gently.  "But  of  God  you 
must  ask  it  in  prayers  and  good  deeds."  And  he 
dragged  himself  to  the  cave  and  set  himself  with 
his  back  against  the  rock  and  his  face  towards 
the  path  along  which  the  Duke's  men  must  come. 
And  he  called  again  to  Yenusta,  saying,  "  T  pray 
you,  do  not  stay  here."  But  she  heeded  him  not, 
but  sat  again  on  the  ground,  her  chin  resting  on 
her  hands  and  her  eyes  on  his, 

"  Hark,  they  are  near  now !  "  said  he.  And 
he  looked  round  at  sky  and  trees,  and  at  the 
rippling  swift  river,  and  at  the  long  dark  shad- 
ows of  the  hills ;  and  he  listened  to  the  faint 
sounds  of  the  birds  and  living  creatures  in  the 
wood.  And  a  great  lust  of  life  came  over  him, 
and  for  a  moment  his  lip  quivered  and  his  head 
fell ;  he  was  very  loth  to  die.  Yet  soon  he 
smiled  again  and  raised  his  head,  and  so  leant 
easily  against  the  rock. 

Now  the  Lord  Lorenzo  and  his  twenty  men, 
conceiving  that  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard 
could  without  difficulty  hold  Tommasino,  had 
come  along  leisurely,  desiring  to  be  in  good 
order  and  not  weary   when  they  met  Antonio ; 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.  279 

for  they  feared  him.  And  thus  it  was  evening 
when  they  came  near  the  cave  and  halted  a 
moment  to  make  their  plans;  and  here  Luigi 
met  them  and  told  them  how  Antonio  was  alone 
and  unguarded.  But  Lorenzo  desired,  if  it  were 
possible,  to  take  Antonio  alive  and  carry  him 
alive  to  the  Eluke,  knowing  that  thus  he  would 
win  His  Highness's  greatest  thanks.  And  while 
Th-ey  talked  of  how  this  might  best  be  effected, 
they  in  their  turn  heard  the  sound  of  men  coming 
up  the  road,  this  sound  being  made  by  Tom- 
masino,  Bena,  and  their  party,  who  had  ridden 
as  fast  as  the  weariness  of  their  horses  let  them. 
But  because  they  had  ridden  fast,  their  horses 
were  foundered,  and  they  had  dismounted,  and 
were  now  coming  on  foot ;  and  Lorenzo  heard 
them  coming  just  as  he  also  had  decided  to  go 
forward  on  foot,  and  had  caused  the  horses  to  be 
led  into  the  wood  and  tethered  there.  And  he 
asked,  "  Who  are  these  ?  " 

Then  one  of  his  men,  a  skilled  woodsman  and 
hunter,  listening,  answered,  "They  are  short  of 
a  dozen,  my  lord.  They  must  be  come  with 
tidings  from  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard.     For 


28o     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

they  would  be  more  if  the  Lieutenant  came 
himself,  or  if  by  chance  Tommasino's  band  had 
eluded  him." 

"  Come,"  said  Lorenzo.  "  The  capture  of  the 
Count  must  be  ours,  not  theirs.  Let  us  go  for- 
ward without  delay." 

Thus  Lorenzo  and  his  men  pushed  on ;  and 
but  the  half  of  a  mile  behind  came  Tommasino 
and  his  ;  and  again,  three  or  four  miles  behind 
them,  came  the  Lieutenant  and  his ;  and  all 
these  companies  were  pressing  on  towards  the 
cave  where  Antonio  and  Venusta  were.  But 
Tommasino's  men  still  marched  the  quicker,  and 
they  gained  on  Lorenzo,  while  the  Lieutenant  did 
not  gain  on  them  ;  yet  by  reason  of  the  unceasing 
windings  of  the  way,  as  it  twisted  round  rocks 
and  skirted  precipices,  they  did  not  come  in 
sight  of  Lorenzo,  nor  did  he  see  them  ;  indeed  he 
thought  now  of  nothing  but  of  coming  first  on 
Antonio,  and  of  securing  the  glory  of  taking 
him  before  the  Lieutenant  came  up.  And  Tom- 
masino, drawing  near  the  cave,  gave  his  men 
orders  to  walk  very  silently ;  for  he  hoped  to 
surprise   Lorenzo   unawares.     Thus,  as   the   sun 


COUNT  ANTONIO  AND   THE   LADY  OF   RILANO.    28 1 

sank  out  of  sight,  Lorenzo  came  to  the  cave  and 
to  the  open  space  between  it  and  the  river,  and 
beheld  Antonio  standing  with  his  back  against 
the  rock  and  his  drawn  sword  in  his  hand,  and 
Venusta  crouched  on  the  ground  some  paces 
away.  When  Venusta  saw  Lorenzo,  she  gave  a 
sharp  stifled  cry,  but  did  not  move :  Antonio 
smiled,  and  drew  himself  to  his  full  height. 
*•-  "  Your  tricks  have  served  you  well,  my  lord," 
he  said.     "  Here  I  am  alone  and  crippled." 

"  Then  yield  yourself,"  said  Lorenzo.  "  We 
are  twenty  to  one." 

"  I  will  not  yield,"  said  Antonio.  "  I  can  die 
here  as  well  as  at  Firmola,  and  a  thrust  is  better 
than  a  noose." 

Then  Lorenzo,  being  a  gentleman  of  high 
spirit  and  courage,  waved  his  men  back ;  and 
they  stood  still  ten  paces  off,  watching  intently 
as  Lorenzo  advanced  towards  Antonio,  for, 
though  Antonio  was  lamed,  yet  they  looked  to 
see  fine  fighting.  And  Lorenzo  advanced  to- 
wards Antonio,  and  said  again,  "Yield  yourself, 
my  lord." 

"  I  will  not  yield,"  said  Antonio  again. 
19 


282      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

At  this  instant  the  woodsman  who  was  with 
Lorenzo  raised  his  hand  to  his  ear  and  listened 
for  a  moment ;  but  Tommasino  came  softly, 
and  the  woodsman  was  deceived.  "  It  is  but 
leaves,"  he  said,  and  turned  again  to  watch 
Lorenzo.  And  that  lord  now  sprang  fiercely 
on  Antonio  and  the  swords  crossed.  And  as 
they  crossed,  Venusta  crawled  on  her  knees 
nearer,  and  as  the  swords  played,  nearer  still 
she  came,  none  noticing  her,  till  at  length  she 
was  within  three  3^ards  of  Lorenzo.  He  now 
was  pressing  Antonio  hard,  for  the  Count  was 
in  great  pain  from  his  foot,  and  as  often  as  he 
was  compelled  to  rest  his  weight  on  it,  it  came 
near  to  failing  him,  nor  could  he  follow  up  any 
advantage  he  might  gain  against  Lorenzo.  Thus 
passed  three  or  four  minutes  in  the  encounter. 
And  the  woodsman  cried,  "  Hark !  Here  comes 
the  Lieutenant.  Quick,  my  lord,  or  you  lose  half 
the  glory!"  Then  Lorenzo  sprang  afresh  on 
Antonio.  Yet  as  he  sprang,  another  sprang 
also  ;  and  as  that  other  sprang  there  rose  a  shout 
from  Lorenzo's  men ;  yet  they  did  not  rush  to 
aid  in  the  capture  of  Antonio,  but  turned  them- 


COUNT  ANTONIO   AND   THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.   283 

selves  round.  For  Bena,  with  Tommasino  at  his 
heels,  had  shot  among  them  like  a  stone  hurled 
from  a  catapult ;  and  this  man  Bena  was  a  great 
fi2:hter;  and  now  he  was  all  aflame  with  love  and 
fear  for  Count  Antonio.  And  he  crashed  through 
their  ranks,  and  split  the  head  of  the  woodsman 
with  the  hea\^^  sword  he  carried;  and  thus  he 
came  to  Lorenzo.  But  there  in  amazement  he 
"sjood  still.  For  Antonio  and  Lorenzo  had 
dropped  their  points  and  fought  no  more ;  but 
both  stood  with  their  eyes  on  the  slim  figure  of  a 
girl  that  lay  on  the  ground  between  them  ;  and 
blood  was  pouring  from  a  wound  in  her  breast, 
and  she  moaned  softly.  And  while  the  rest 
fought  fiercely,  these  three  stood  looking  on  the 
girl ;  and  Lorenzo  looked  also  on  his  sword, 
which  was  dyed  three  inches  up  the  blade.  For 
as  he  thrust  most  fiercely  at  Antonio,  Venusta 
had  sprung  at  him  with  the  spring  of  a  young 
tiger,  a  dagger  flashing  in  her  hand,  and  in  the 
instinct  that  sudden  danger  brings  he  had  turned 
his  blade  against  her;  and  the  point  of  it  was 
deep  in  her  breast  before  he  drew  it  back  with 
horror   and   a   cry  of  "  Heavens !    I  have  killed 


284     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

her ! "  And  she  fell  full  on  the  ground  at  the 
feet  of  Count  Antonio,  who  had  stood  motionless 
in  astonishment,  with  his  sword  in  rest. 

Now  the  stillness  and  secrecy  of  Tommasino's 
approach  had  served  him  well,  for  he  had  come 
upon  Lorenzo's  men  when  they  had  no  thought 
of  an  enemy,  but  stood  crowded  together, 
shoulder  to  shoulder ;  and  several  of  them  were 
slain  and  more  hurt  before  they  could  use  their 
swords  to  any  purpose  ;  but  Tommasino's  men 
had  fallen  on  them  wath  great  fury,  and  had 
broken  through  them  even  as  Bena  had,  and, 
getting  above  them,  were  now,  step  by  step, 
driving  them  down  the  path,  and  formed  a 
rampart  between  them  and  the  three  who  stood 
by  the  dying  lady.  And  when  Bena  perceived 
this  advantage,  wasting  little  thought  on  Venusta 
(he  was  a  hard  man,  this  Bena),  he  cried  to  An- 
tonio, "  Leave  him  to  me,  my  lord.  We  have 
him  sure!"  and  in  an  instant  he  would  have 
sprung  at  Lorenzo,  who,  finding  himself  between 
two  enemies,  knew  that  his  state  was  perilous, 
but  was  yet  minded  to  defend  himself.  But 
Antonio  suddenly  cried  in  a  loud  voice,  "  Stay !  " 


COUNT   ANTONIO   AND  THE  LADY   OF   RILANO.   285 

and  arrested  by  his  voice,  all  stood  still,  Lorenzo 
where  he  was,  Tommasino  and  his  men  at  the 
top  of  the  path,  and  the  Guards  just  below  them. 
And  Antonio,  leaning  on  his  sword,  stepped  a 
pace  forward  and  said  to  Lorenzo,  "  My  lord, 
the  dice  have  fallen  against  you.  But  I  would 
not  fight  ovejg.  this  lady's  body.  The  truth  of  all 
she  did  I  know,  yet  she  has  at  the  last  died  that  I 
"rftight  live.  See,  my  men  are  between  you  and 
your  men." 

"  It  is  the  hazard  of  war,"  said  Lorenzo. 

"  Aye,"  said  Bena.  "He  had  killed  you,  my 
Lord  Antonio,  had  we  not  come." 

But  Antonio  pointed  to  the  body  of  Venusta. 
And  she,  at  the  instant,  moaned  again,  and 
turned  on  her  back,  and  gasped,  and  died :  yet 
just  before  she  died,  her  eyes  sought  Antonio's 
eyes,  and  he  dropped  suddenly  on  his  knees 
beside  her,  and  took  her  hand  and  kissed  her 
brow.     And  they  saw  that  she  smiled  in  dying. 

Then  Lorenzo  brushed  a  hand  across  his  eyes 
and  said  to  Antonio,  "  Suffer  me  to  go  back  with 
my  men,  and  for  a  week  there  shall  be  a  truce 
between  us." 


286     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Let  it  be  so,"  said  Antonio. 

And  Bena  smiled,  for  he  knew  that  the  Lieu- 
tenant of  the  Guard  must  now  be  near  at  hand. 
But  this  he  did  not  tell  Antonio,  fearing  that 
Antonio  would  tell  Lorenzo.  Then  Lorenzo, 
with  uncovered  head,  passed  through  the  rank 
of  Tommasino's  men  ;  and  he  took  up  his  dead, 
and  with  them  went  down  the  path,  leaving 
Venusta  where  she  lay.  And  when  he  had  gone 
two  miles,  he  met  the  Lieutenant  and  his  party, 
pressing  on.  Yet  when  the  two  companies  had 
joined,  they  were  no  more  than  seventeen  whole 
and  sound  men,  so  many  of  Lorenzo's  had  Tom- 
masino's party  slain  or  hurt.  Therefore  Lorenzo 
in  his  heart  was  not  much  grieved  at  the  truce, 
for  it  had  been  hard  with  seventeen  to  force  the 
path  to  the  cave  against  ten,  all  unhurt  and 
sound.  And,  having  sorely  chidden  the  Lieu- 
tenant of  the  Guard,  he  rode  back,  and  rested 
that  night  in  Venusta's  house  at  Rilano,  and  the 
next  day  rode  on  to  Firmola,  and  told  Duke 
Valentine  how  the  expedition  had  sped. 

Then  said  Duke  Valentine,  "  Force  I  have 
tried,  and  guile    I  have   tried,  and  yet  this  man 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND  THE   LADY   OF   RILANO.   287 

is  delivered  from  my  hand.  Fortune  fights  for 
him  ; "  and  in  chagrin  and  displeasure  he  went 
into  his  cabinet,  and  spoke  to  no  man,  and 
showed  himself  nowhere  in  the  city,  for  the 
space  of  three  days.  But  the  townsmen,  though 
they  dared  make  no  display,  rejoiced  that  An- 
tonio was  safe,'-  and  the  more  because  the  Duke 
had  laid  so  cunninof  and  treacherous  a  snare  for 

0  -■  o 

.hwn. 

Now  Antonio,  Tommasino,  and  the  rest, 
when  they  were  left  alone,  stood  round  the 
corpse  of  Venusta,  and  Antonio  told  them 
briefly  all  the  story  of  her  treachery  as  she  her- 
self had  told  it  to  him. 

And  when  he  had  finished  the  tale,  Bena 
cried,  "  She  has  deserved  her  death." 

But  Tommasino  stooped  down  and  composed 
her  limbs  and  her  raiment  gently  with  his 
hand,  and  when  he  rose  up  his  eyes  were  dim, 
and  he  said,  "  Yes ;  but  at  the  last  she  gave 
her  life  for  Antonio.  And  though  she  deserved 
death,  it  grieves  me  that  she  is  gone  to  her 
account  thus,  without  confession,  pardon,  or  the 
rites  of  Holy  Church. 


288      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

Then  Antonio  said,  "  Behold,  her  death  is 
her  confession,  and  the  same  should  be  her  par- 
don.    And  for  the  rites " 

He  bent  over  her,  and  he  dipped  the  tip  of 
his  finger  in  the  lady's  blood  that  had  flowed 
from  her  wounded  breast ;  and  lightly  with  his 
finger-tip  he  signed  the  Cross  in  her  own  blood 
on  her  brow.  "  That,"  said  he,  "  shall  be  her 
Unction ;  and  I  think,  Tommasino,  it  will 
serve." 

Thus  the  Lady  Venusta  died,  and  they  car- 
ried her  body  down  to  Rilano  and  buried  it 
there.  And  in  after-days  a  tomb  was  raised 
over  her,  which  may  still  be  seen.  But  Count 
Antonio,  being  rejoined  by  such  of  his  company 
as  had  escaped  by  flight  from  the  pursuit  of  the 
Duke's  troop,  abode  still  in  the  hills,  and  albeit 
that  his  force  was  less,  yet  by  the  dread  of  his 
name  and  of  the  deeds  that  he  had  done  he 
still  defied  the  power  of  the  Duke,  and  was 
not  brought  to  submission. 

And  whether  the  poor  youth  whom  Luigi 
pushed  over  the  precipice  lived  or  died,  Niccolo 
knew  not.      But    Luigi,  having   entered  the  ser- 


COUNT   ANTONIO  AND   THE   LADY   OF  RILANO.    289 

vice  of  the  Duke,  played  false  to  him  also, 
and,  being  convicted  on  sure  evidence  of  taking 
to  himself  certain  moneys  that  the  Duke  had 
charged  him  to  distribute  to  the  poor,  was 
hanged  in  the  great  square  a  year  to  the  very 
day  after  Venusta  died  ;  whereat  let  him  grieve 
who  will ;  I  grrieve  not. 


CHAPTER   VIII. 

THE   MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN. 

In  all  that  I  have  written  concerning  Count 
Antonio,  I  have  striven  to  say  that  only  which 
is  surely  based  on  truth  and  attested  by  cred- 
ible witness,  and  have  left  on  one  side  the  more 
marvellous  tales  such  as  the  credulity  of  igno- 
rance and  the  fond  licence  of  legend  are  wont 
to  Aveave.  But  as  to  the  manner  of  his  return 
there  is  no  room  for  uncertainty,  for  the  whole 
account  of  it  was  recorded  in  the  archives  of 
the  city  by  order  of  Duke  Valentine  the  Good, 
son  and  successor  to  that  Duke  who  outlawed 
Antonio ;  to  which  archives  I,  Ambrose,  have 
had  full  access  ;  and  I  have  now  free  permission 
to  make  known  so  much  of  them  as  may  serve 
for    the    proper    understanding    of    the    matter. 

And  this  same  task  is    one    to  which    I  set  my 

290 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN. 


291 


pen  willingly,  conceiving  that  the  story  is  worthy 
of  being  known  to  every  man  in  the  Duchy ; 
for  while  many  may  censure  the  things  that 
Antonio  did  in  the  days  of  his  sojourn  in  the 
hills,  there  can,  I  think,  be  none  that  will  not 
look  with  approval  on  his  bearing  in  this  last 
hap  of  fortune.-  Indeed  he  was  a  gallant  gen- 
tleman ;  and  if,  for  that,  I  forgive  him  his  sins 
to^  readily,  in  like  manner  may  our  good  St. 
Frisian  intercede  that  my  sins  be  forgiven  me. 

Five  years  had  the  Count  dwelt  in  the  hills ; 
five  years  had  the  Lady  Lucia  mourned  in  the 
city  ;  five  years  had  Duke  Valentine  laid  plans  and 
schemes.  Then  it  fell  out  that  a  sickness  came 
upon  the  city  and  the  country  round  it ;  many 
died,  and  more  were  sore  stricken  but  by  the 
mercy  of  God  narrowly  escaped.  Among  those 
that  suffered  were  the  Duke  himself,  and  at  the 
same  time  a  certain  gentleman,  by  name  Count 
Philip  of  Garda,  a  friend  of  Antonio's,  and  yet 
an  obedient  seTrvant  to  the  Duke.  Now  when 
Antonio  heard  that  Philip  lay  sick,  he  sent  to 
him  a  rich  gift  of  choice  meats  and  fruits  by 
the  hand  of  Tommasino.     And  Tommasino  came 


292      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

with  six  of  the  band  and  delivered  the  gift, 
and  might  have  ridden  back  in  all  safety,  as 
did  the  six  who  came  with  him.  But  Philip  had 
a  fair  daughter,  and  Tommasino,  caught  by  her 
charms,  made  bold  to  linger  at  Philip's  house, 
trusting  that  his  presence  there  would  not  be 
known  to  the  Duke,  and  venturing  his  own  neck 
for  the  smiles  of  red  lips  and  the  glances  of 
bright  eyes,  as  young  men  have  since  this  old 
world  began.  But  one  of  the  Duke's  spies,  of 
whom  he  maintained  many,  brought  word  to  him 
of  Tommasino's  rashness ;  and  as  Tommasino  at 
last  rode  forth  privily  in  the  evening,  singing  a 
love-song  and  hugging  in  his  bosom  a  glove  that 
the  lady  had  suffered  him  to  carry  off,  he  came 
suddenly  into  an  ambush  of  the  Duke's  Guard, 
was  pulled  violently  from  his  horse,  and  before 
he  could  so  much  as  draw  his  sword,  behold, 
his  arms  were  seized,  and  the  Lord  Lorenzo 
stood  before  him,  with  doffed  cap  and  mocking 
smile ! 

"  My  glove  is  like  to  cost  me  dear,"  said  Tom- 
masino. 

"  Indeed,  my  lord,"  answered  Lorenzo,  **  I  fear 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN. 


293 


there  will  be  a  reckoning  for  it."  Then  he  gave 
the  word,  and  they  set  Tommasino  bound  on  his 
horse,  and  rode  without  drawing  rein  to  the 
city.  And  when  the  Duke  heard  the  next  morn- 
ing of  Tommasino's  capture,  he  raised  himself 
on  his  couch,  where  he  lay  in  the  shade  by  the 
fish-pond  unde^  the  wall  of  his  garden.  "  This  is 
sweet  medicine  for  my  sickness,"  said  he.  "  On 
{Tffe  third  day  from  now,  at  noon,  he  shall  die. 
Bid  them  raise  a  great  gibbet  in  front  of  my 
palace,  so  high  that  it  shall  be  seen  from  every 
part  of  the  city  and  from  beyond  the  walls ; 
and  on  that  gibbet  Tommasino  shall  hang,  that 
all  men  may  know  that  I,  Valentine,  am  Duke 
and  Lord  of  Firmola."  And  he  lay  back  again, 
pale  and  faint. 

But  when  word  came  to  Antonio  that  Tom- 
masino was  taken,  he  withdrew  himself  from  the 
rest  of  the  band  who  were  lamenting  the  un- 
toward chance,  and  walked  by  himself  to  and 
fro  for  a  long  while.  And  he  gazed  once  on 
the  picture  of  the  Lady  Lucia  which  was  always 
round  his  neck.  Then  he  sat  down  and  wrote 
a  letter  to  the  Duke,  saying,  "  My  gracious  lord, 


294 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


I  am  here  with  fifty  men,  stout  and  brave  fel- 
lows ;  and  if  my  cousin  dies,  there  shall  be  no 
peace  in  the  Duchy.  But  my  heart  is  heavy 
already  for  those  that  have  died  in  my  quarrel, 
and  I  may  not  endure  Tommasino's  death. 
Therefore  let  Tommasino  go,  and  grant  full 
pardon  and  oblivion  to  him  and  to  all  who  are 
here  with  me,  and  swear  to  do  this  with  a  bind- 
ing oath ;  and  then  I  will  come  and  deliver  my- 
self to  you,  and  suffer  such  doom  as  seems  good 
to  Your  Highness.  May  Almighty  God  assuage 
Your  Highness's  sickness  and  keep  you  in  all 
things. — Antonio  of  Monte  Velluto."  And  this 
letter  he  sent  to  the  Duke  Valentine,  who,  having 
received  it,  pondered  long,  but  at  last  said  to 
Lorenzo,  "  I  do  not  love  to  let  Tommasino  go, 
nor  to  pardon  these  lawless  knaves ;  yet  for  five 
years  I  have  pursued  i\.ntonio  and  have  not  taken 
him.  And  I  am  weary,  and  the  country  is 
racked  and  troubled  by  our  strife." 

"  With  Antonio  dead,  all  would  be  quiet,  my 
lord,"  said  Lorenzo. 

Then  the  Duke's  eyes  flashed  and  he  said, 
"It  shall  be  so.     And  bid    them    strengthen  the 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     295 

gibbet,    for   Antonio    is    a    large    man ;    and    he 
shall  surely  hang  on  it." 

Now  Lorenzo  was  somewhat  grieved,  for  he 
esteemed  Antonio ;  yet  he  obeyed  the  Duke's 
commands,  and  took  from  the  Duke  a  letter  for 
Antonio,  wherein  His  Highness  swore  to  all 
that  Antonio  asked,  and  bade  him  come  alone 
or  with  one  companion  only  into  the  city  on 
iTfp  day  that  had  been  before  appointed  for  the 
hanging  of  Tommasino.  And,  further,  the  Lord 
Lorenzo  gathered  together  all  the  pikemen  and 
every  man  that  served  the  Duke,  and  placed 
them  all  on  guard,  and  proclaimed  that  any 
man  besides  found  carrying  arms  in  the  city 
should  be  held  as  the  Duke's  enemy.  For  he 
feared  that  the  townsmen  who  loved  Antonio 
would  attempt  something  on  his  behalf.  But 
when  the  townsmen  saw  the  great  force  that 
Lorenzo  had  gathered,  they  dared  attempt 
nothing,  although  they  were  sore  grieved  and 
lamented  bitterly.  And  the  Lady  Lucia,  look- 
ing from  the  window  of  her  house,  beheld  those 
who  were  erecting  the  gibbet,  and  wept  for  her 
lover.     As  for  Tommasino,  when  he  heard  that 


296     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

he  was  not  to  be  hanged,  but  to  be  set  free, 
and  Antonio  to  suffer  death  in  his  stead,  he  was 
like  a  man  mad,  and  his  rage  and  grief  could 
not  be  restrained ;  for  he  declared  that  he 
would  not  live  if  Antonio  died,  and  did  not 
cease  to  reproach  himself  bitterly.  Therefore 
the  Lord  Lorenzo  held  him  confined  in  his  own 
house,  lest  he  should  do  himself  some  harm,  or 
endeavour  by  some  desperate  device  to  prevent 
Antonio  from  fulfilling  his  purpose ;  but  he 
treated  him  with  all  courtesy,  for  he  was  sorry 
for  his  plight. 

Now  Count  Antonio  feared  his  companions 
and  did  not  dare  to  tell  them  of  what  he  had 
done,  lest  their  obedience  should  fail  under  a 
strain  so  great,  and  they  should  by  force  prevent 
his  going  to  the  city.  Therefore  he  told  them 
to  rest  quiet  in  their  camp,  while  he,  with  Bena, 
went  about  certain  necessary  business ;  and  he 
bade  them  farewell,  enjoining  them  most  strictly 
to  do  nothing  against  the  Duke. 

"  For,"  said  he,  "although  I  may  not  tell  you 
fully  what  the  business  is  on  which  I  go,  yet  I 
have  good  hope  that  His  Highness  is  favourably 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN,     207 

inclined  to  you,  and  that  in  a  short  space  you 
will  receive  from  him  pardon  for  all  your  of- 
fences. And  that  pardon  I  charge  you  to  accept 
with  gratitude,  and,  having  accepted  it,  be 
thenceforward  loyal  servants  to  His  Highness." 

"  But  will  the  Duke  pardon  you  also,  my  lord, 
and  the  Lord  Temmasino?"  asked  Martolo. 

"  He  will  pardon  Tommasino  also,"  answered 
A^onio.  "  And  be  assured  that  I  shall  suffer 
nothing."  And  having  said  this,  he  shook  every 
man  by  the  hand,  thanking  them  for  the  love 
and  service  they  had  shown  him ;  and  he  and 
Bena  were  accompanied  by  all  of  them  to  the 
foot  of  Mount  Agnino ;  and  there,  in  the  early 
morning  of  the  appointed  da}',  Antonio  mounted 
his  horse  and  rode  with  Bena  into  the  plain. 
And  as  they  rode,  Bena  said  to  him,  "  My  lord, 
why  does  the  Duke  grant  this  pardon?  " 

"  Because  I  give  him  what  he  asks  as  the 
price  of  it,  Bena,"  answered  Antonio ;  and  they 
rode  on  for  a  while.  But  when  Bena  saw  that 
Antonio  turned  his  horse  not  towards  Rilano,  but 
directly  across  the  plain  towards  Firmola,  he 
said,  "  My  lord,  whither  are  we  riding?" 


298     THE  CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT  ANTONIO. 

"  We  are  riding  to  the  city,  Bena,"  answered 
Antonio.  "  There  is  no  cause  for  fear  ;  we  go 
by  leave  and  on  the  invitation  of  His  Highness." 

"  But  will  he  let  us  go  again  ?  "  asked  Bena. 

"  You  will  be  free  to  go  when  you  will,"  an- 
swered Antonio,  "  and  me  the  Duke  will  himself 
send  forth  from  the  city  when  I  am  ready  to 
go."  For  Lorenzo  had  promised  in  the  Duke's 
name  that  Antonio's  body,  after  it  had  hung 
three  days  on  the  gibbet,  should  be  carried 
from  the  city  to  the  church  of  St.  Frisian  at 
Rilano,  and  there  interred  with  fitting  ceremony. 

"  Yet  I  do  not  like  this  ride  of  ours,"  grum- 
bled Bena. 

"  Nay,  I  like  it  not  myself,"  said  Antonio, 
smiling.  "  But  for  the  good  of  my  cousin  and 
of  all  our  company,  we  must  go  forward."  And 
he  stopped  for  a  moment  and  added,  "  Swear 
to  me,  Bena,  by  St.  Frisian,  to  obey  in  all  I 
bid  you  in  the  city  to-day,  and  not  to  draw  your 
sword  unless  I  draw  mine." 

"  Do  I  not  always  obey  you,  my  lord  ?  "  asked 
Bena. 

"  But  swear  to  me." 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     299 

"  Well,  then,  I  swear,"  said  Bena,  "  though  in 
truth,  my  lord,  your  word  is  full  as  strong  to  me 
as  any  oath,  whether  by  Frisian  or  another."  For 
this  man  whom  they  called  Bena  was  a  godless 
man,  and  one  that  held  holy  things  in  light 
esteem.  But  he  was  a  fine  fighter  and  a  loyal 
servant,  and  Qod's  mercy  is  infinite.  It  may  be 
his  heart  was  turned  at  last ;  though  indeed  I 
^Kaye  found  no  record  of  it. 

"  My  lord,  will  you  see  my  Lady  Lucia  in  the 
city  ?  "  asked  Bena. 

"  I  trust  at  the  least  to  see  her  face  at  her 
window,"  answered  Antonio. 

"  Will  you  have  speech  with  her,  my  lord  ?  " 

"  If  His  Highness  will  grant  me  that  favour, 
Bena." 

"  Ah,  I  know  now  why  you  smiled,  my  lord, 
as  you  rode,  just  now.  It  will  be  a  bright  day 
for  you."     And  Bena  laughed. 

"  Indeed,"  said  Antonio,  "  I  trust  that  the  day 
may  be  bright  for  me.  Yes,  bright  as  the  light  of 
heaven." 

"  There  is  no  light  brighter  than  the  eyes  of 
the  girl  a  man  loves,"  said  Bena. 


300     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Yes,  there  is  one,"  said  Antonio.  But  Bena 
did  not  understand  his  meaning. 

Thus  they  rode  till  it  wanted  only  two  hours 
of  noon ;  and  then  they  were  within  five  miles  of 
the  city,  and  Bena,  looking,  beheld  the  great  gib- 
bet rising  above  the  walls  of  the  city  and  standing 
forth  grim  and  black  in  front  of  the  marble  face 
of  the  Cathedral. 

"  What  is  that,  my  lord,"  he  cried,  "  which 
towers  above  the  walls  of  the  city  ?  " 

"  Is  it  not  enough  to  know  when  we  come 
there?"  answered  Antonio. 

Then  Bena  sighed,  and  said  to  Antonio,  "  I 
find  it  in  my  heart,  my  lord,  to  be  half  sorry  that 
the  Duke  pardons  us ;  for  we  lived  a  fine  merry 
life  in  the  hills.  Yet  it  will  be  pleasant  to  live  at 
ease:  and  we  have  adventures  enough  to  tell  our 
sweethearts,  aye,  and  our  children  too,  when  we 
grow  old,  and  they  come  round  us  and  ask  us  for 
stories  of  our  youth.  I  hope  my  boys  will  be 
good  at  a  fight,  my  lord,  and  serve  your  sons  as  I 
have  served  you." 

"  It  may  be  God's  will  that  I  leave  no  sons  to 
bear  my  name,  Bena." 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     301 

"  I  do  not  think  that,"  said  Bena  with  a 
laugh. 

They  were  now  passing  the  hill  on  which 
stood  the  blackened  walls  of  Antonio's  house, 
which  Duke  Valentine  had  burnt. 

Bena  cried  out  at  the  sight.     "  You  will  need 
to  spend  much  in  rebuilding  it,"  said  he. 
,^   "Perhaps  His  Highness  has  provided  another 
'dwelling  for  me,"  said  Antonio. 

*'  To-night  he  will  surely  lodge  you,  my  lord, 
in  his  own  palace,  or,  may  be,  with  my  Lord 
Lorenzo." 

"  Wherever  it  may  be,  I  shall  sleep  soundly," 
said  Antonio. 

Now  they  were  come  near  to  the  city,  and 
they  saw  a  body  of  pikemen  coming  out  to  meet 
them,  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard  at  the  head. 
And  when  they  met,  the  Lieutenant  bowed  to 
Antonio,  who  greeted  him  most  courteously;  and 
the  pikemen  spread  themselves  in  front  and  be- 
hind and  on  both  sides  of  Antonio  and  Bena,  and 
thus  they  went  on  towards  the  bridge  and  the 
city  gate.  But  Bena  eyed  the  pikemen  with  no 
love,  and  moved  restlessly  in  his  saddle.    "  These 


302 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 


fellows,"  said  he  to  Antonio,  "  hem  us  in,  my 
lord.  Shall  I  make  my  horse  threaten  their 
toes  a  little,  so  that  they  may  give  us  more 
room  ?  " 

"  Let  them  be,"  said  Antonio.  "  It  is  not  for 
long,  Bena." 

At  the  entrance  of  the  gate  stood  Lorenzo, 
awaiting  the  Count,  and  there  they  dismounted, 
and  Antonio  passed  through  the  gate  with  Lo- 
renzo, Bena  being  close  to  him  on  the  other  side. 
And  when  Bena  saw  the  great  force  of  pikemen, 
and,  behind  their  ranks,  a  mighty  throng  of 
people,  and  when  he  saw  the  tall  gibbet  and  un- 
derstood what  it  was,  suddenly  his  face  went  red 
and  his  hand  flew  to  his  sword. 

But  Antonio  caught  his  arm,  saying,  "  My 
sword  is  not  drawn,  Bena." 

"My  lord,  what  does  it  mean?"  cried  Bena 
in  a  loud  voice,  so  that  Lorenzo  heard  and  stayed 
his  steps  and  looked  at  Bena.  "  Does  he  not 
know  ?  "  he  asked  of  Antonio. 

"  He  does  not  know  yet,"  said  Antonio.  And 
to  Bena  he  said,  "  I  have  need  of  your  sword, 
Bena.     Give  it  me." 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     303 

"My  sword,  my  lord?" 

"  Yes,  your  sword." 

Bena  looked  at  him  with  wondering  fright- 
ened eyes ;  but  slowly  he  unbuckled  his  sword 
from  his  belt  and  gave  it  to  Antonio.  And  An- 
tonio unbuckled  his  own  sword  also  and  gave 
them  both  to  the  Lieutenant  of  the  Guard,  say- 
^ing,  "  Sir,  I  pray  you  to  restore  Bena's  to  him 
>in;^,the  evening,  and  mine  to  me  when  I  go  forth 
to  Rilano." 

But  Bena  clutched  at  Antonio's  arm,  crying 
again,  "  What  does  it  mean,  my  lord  ?  " 

Then  Antonio  took  him  by  the  hand  and 
said,  "  Are  we  to  be  afraid  now  of  what  we 
have  often  faced  together  with  light  hearts, 
Bena?" 

"Are  we  to  die?"  asked  Bena. 

•'  You  are  to  live  and  beget  those  brave  bo3's, 
Bena.  But  it  is  otherwise  with  me,"  said  An- 
tonio. 

Then  the  Lord  Lorenzo,  who  had  looked  in 
Bena's  C3XS,  signed  to  four  pikemen  to  come 
near,  and  they  came  and  stood  near  Bena ;  for 
Lorenzo  feared  that  he  would  not   suffer    Anto- 


304     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

nio  to  die  without  seeking  to  save  him  or  to 
die  with  him. 

"Nay,  let  him  alone,"  said  Antonio.  "You 
will  obey  me  of  your  free-will,  Bena?" 

"Yes,  my  lord,"  said  Bena;  and  he  looked 
up  at  the  gibbet ;  and  then  he  caught  An- 
tonio's hand  and  kissed  it  a  score  of  times ; 
and  he  began  to  sob  as  a  child  sobs.  And 
the  Guard,  among  whom  were  some  that 
had  felt  his  arm,  marvelled  to  see  him  thus 
moved. 

"  Let  us  go  on,"  said  Antonio.  "  It  is  hard 
on  noon,  and  I  must  keep  my  tryst  with  His 
Highness." 

His  Highness  awaits  my  lord  by  the  fish- 
pond in  the  garden,"  said  Lorenzo ;  and  he  led 
Antonio  to  the  palace  and  brought  him  through 
the  great  hall  and  so  to  the  fish-pond ;  and  by 
it  the  Duke  lay  propped  on  pillows,  yet  very 
richly  arrayed ;  and  his  little  son  sat  by  him. 
Now  Lorenzo  stood  aloof,  but  Antonio  came, 
and,  kneeling,  kissed  the  Duke's  hand,  and  then 
rose  and  stood  before  the  Duke.  But  the  boy 
cried,  "  Why,  it  is  my  Lord  Antonio  !     Have  3'ou 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     305 

come  back  to   live   in   the  city,  my  Lord  Anto- 
nio ?     Ah,  I  am  glad  of  it ! " 

"  Nay,  I  have  not  come  to  live  in  the  city, 
my  little  lord,"  said  Antonio. 

"  Whither  do  you  go  then?"  asked  the  bo}^ 

"  His  Highness  sends  me  on  a  journe}',"  said 
Antonio.  ''^ 

"  Is  it  far  ? " 
.w  "  Yes,  it  is  far,"  said  Antonio  with  a  smile. 

"  I  wish  he  would  send  another  and  let  you 
stay ;    then  we    could  play   at   robbers   again   in 
the  great  hall,"  said  the   little    Duke.     "  Father, 
can  you    find   no  other  lord  to  go  in   Antonio's    . 
place?" 

The  Duke  turned  his  face,  pale  and  wasted 
with  sickness,  and  his  eyes,  that  seemed  larger 
and  deeper  than  they  had  been  before,  upon  his 
son,  "  I  can  send  none  but  Antonio,"  said  he. 
And  calling  to  Lorenzo,  he  bade  him  take  the 
boy.  But  the  boy  went  reluctantly,  telling  An- 
tonio that  he  must  return  speedily.  "  For  you 
promised,"  said  he,  "to  teach  me  how  to  use 
my  sword."  And  the  Duke  signed  with  his 
hand  to  Lorenzo,  who    lifted    the    boy  and  car- 


3o6     THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT   ANTONIO. 

ried  him  away,  leaving  Antonio  alone  with  the 
Duke. 

"  I  have  set  my  seal  to  the  pardons  as  I 
swore,"  said  the  Duke  ;  "  and  Tommasino  shall 
be  free  this  evening ;  and  all  that  he  and  the 
rest  have  done  against  me  shall  be  forgotten 
from  this  hour.  Have  you  any  cause  of  com- 
plaint against  me  ?  " 

"  None,  my  lord,"  said  Count  Antonio. 

"  Is  there  anything  that  you  ask  of  me  ?  " 

"  Nothing,  my  lord.  Yet  if  it  be  Your  High- 
ness's  pleasure  that  I  should  have  speech  with 
the  Lady  Lucia  and  with  my  cousin,  1  should 
be  well  pleased." 

"  You  will  see  them  yonder  in  the  square," 
said  the  Duke.  "  But  otherwise  you  shall  not 
see  them." 

Then  Lorenzo  returned,  and  he  led  Antonio 
to  a  chamber  and  gave  him  meat  and  wine ;  and 
while  Antonio  ate,  the  Lord  Archbishop,  having 
heard  that  he  was  come,  came  in  great  haste  ; 
and  the  venerable  man  was  very  urgent  with 
Antonio  that  he  should  make  his  peace  with 
Heaven,   so   that,  having   confessed  his  sins  and 


MANNER  OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     307 

sought  absolution,  he  might  be  relieved  of 
the  sentence  of  excommunication  under  which 
he  lay,  and  be  comforted  with  the  rites  of  the 
Church  before  he  died. 

"  For  there  are  many  wild  and  wicked  deeds 
on  your  conscience,"  said  the  Archbishop,  "  and 
above  all,  the  things  that  you  did  touching  the 
Abbot  of  St.  Frisian,  and  yet  more  impiously 
totiching  the  Sacred  Bones." 

"  Indeed  I  have  many  sins  to  confess,"  said 
Antonio;  "but,  my  Lord  Archbishop,  concerning 
the  Abbot  and  concerning  the  Sacred  Bones  I 
have  nothing  to  confess.  For  even  now,  when 
I  stand  on  the  threshold  of  death,  I  can  per- 
ceive nothing  that  I  did  save  what  I  could  not 
leave  undone." 

Then  the  Archbishop  besought  him  very 
earnestly,  and  even  with  tears ;  but  Antonio 
would  own  no  sin  in  these  matters,  and  there- 
fore the  Archbishop  could  not  relieve  him  from 
his  sentence  nor  give  him  the  holy  comforts, 
but  left  him  and  returned  to  his  own  house  in 
great  distress  of  spirit. 

The   Lord   Lorenzo  now  came   ajrain  to  An- 


3o8     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

tonio  and  said  to  him,  "  My  lord,  it  wants  but  a 
few  moments  of  noon."  Therefore  Antonio  rose 
and  went  with  him  ;  and  they  came  through  the 
great  hall,  and,  a  strong  escort  being  about  them, 
took  their  stand  at  the  foot  of  the  palace  steps. 
Then  the  Duke  was  borne  out  on  his  couch, 
high  on  the  shoulders  of  his  lackeys,  and  was 
set  down  on  the  topmost  step :  and  silence 
having  been  proclaimed,  the  Duke  spoke  to 
Antonio ;  but  so  weak  was  his  voice  that  none 
heard  save  those  who  were  very  near.  "  An- 
tonio of  Monte  Velluto,"  said  he,  "  it  may  be  that 
in  God's  purposes  I  myself  have  not  long  to  live. 
Yet  it  is  long  enough  for  me  to  uphold  and 
vindicate  that  princely  power  which  the  same 
God  has  committed  to  my  hands.  That  power 
you  have  outraged  ;  many  of  my  faithful  friends 
you  have  slain ;  against  both  me  and  the 
Church  you  have  lifted  your  hand.  Go  then  to 
your  death,  that  men  may  know  the  fate  of 
traitors  and  of  rebels." 

Antonio  bowed  low  to  His  Highness ;  but, 
not  being  invited  by  the  Duke  to  speak,  he  said 
naught,  but  suffered  Lorenzo  to  lead  him  across 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     309 

the  square ;  and  as  he  went,  he  passed  where 
four  pikemen  stood  by  Bena,  ready  to  lay  hold 
on  him  if  he  moved ;  and  Bena  fell  on  his 
knees  and  again  kissed  Antonio's  hand.  And 
Antonio,  passing  on,  saw  two  young  lords, 
followers  of  Lorenzo.  And  between  them  stood 
Tommasino ;  tbeir  arms  were  through  Tom- 
masino's  arms  and  they  held  him,  though 
loyingly,  yet  firmly ;   and  he  had  no  sword. 

"May  I  speak  with  Tommasino?"  asked 
Antonio. 

"  His  Highness  has  forbidden  it,"  said  Lo- 
renzo ;  but  Antonio  paused  for  a  moment  before 
Tommasino ;  and  Tommasino,  greatly  moved, 
cried  piteously  to  him  that  he  might  die  with 
him.  And  Antonio  kissed  him,  and,  with  a  shake 
of  his  head,  passed  on.  Thus  then  he  came  to 
the  gibbet,  and  mounted  with  Lorenzo  on  to  the 
scaffold  that  was  underneath  the  gibbet.  And 
when  he  was  seen  there,  a  great  groan  went  up 
from  the  people,  and  the  apprenticed  lads,  who 
were  all  gathered  together  on  the  left  side  of 
the  gibbet,  murmured  so  fiercely  and  stirred  so 
restlessly  that  the  pikemen  faced  round,  turning 


310     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

their  backs  towards  the  scaffold,  and  laid  their 
pikes  in  rest. 

Then  the  hour  of  noon  struck  from  the  clock 
in  the  tower  of  the  Cathedral ;  and  the  Master 
of  the  Duke's  Household,  who  stood  by  the 
couch  of  his  master,  turned  his  eyes  to  the 
Duke's  face,  seeking  the  signal  for  Antonio's 
death ;  which  when  he  received,  he  would  sign 
to  the  executioner  to  set  the  rope  round  the 
Count's  neck ;  for  the  man  stood  by  Antonio 
with  the  rope  in  his  hand,  and  Antonio  was 
already  in  his  shirt.  But  when  the  Master  of 
the  Household  looked  at  the  Duke,  the  Duke 
made  him  no  signal ;  yet  the  Duke  had  not 
fainted  from  his  sickness,  for  he  was  propped 
on  his  elbow,  his  face  was  eager,  and  his  gaze 
was  set  intently  across  the  square ;  and  his 
physician,  who  was  near,  spoke  to  him  softly, 
saying,  "  My  lord,  they  await  the  signal." 

But  the  Duke  waved  him  aside  impatiently, 
and  gazed  still  across  the  square.  And,  seeing 
His  Highness  thus  gazing  intently,  the  Master 
of  the  Household  and  the  physician  and  all  the 
rest  who  were  about  the  Duke's  person  looked 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     311 

also ;  and  they  saw  the  Lady  Lucia  coming  forth 
from  her  house,  clad  all  in  white.  Antonio  also 
saw  her  from  where  he  stood  on  the  scaffold,  for 
the  people  made  a  way  for  her,  and  the  pikemen 
let  her  pass  through  their  ranks ;  so  that  she 
walked  alone  across  the  middle  of  the  great 
square  ;  and  the  eyes  of  all,  leaving  Antonio, 
were  fixed  upon  her.  Her  face  was  very  pale, 
anU  her  hair  fell  on  her  shoulders ;  but  she 
walked  firmly  and  swiftly,  and  she  turned  neither 
to  right  nor  left,  but  made  straight  for  the  spot 
where  the  Duke  lay.  And  he,  seeing  her  com- 
ing, moaned  once,  and  passed  his  hand  thrice 
across  his  eyes,  and  raised  himself  yet  higher  on 
his  arm,  leaning  towards  her  over  the  side  of  the 
couch.  Again  he  passed  his  hand  across  his 
brow  ;  and  the  physician  regarded  him  very  in- 
tently, yet  dared  not  again  seek  to  rouse  his  at- 
tention, and  imposed  silence  on  the  Master  of  the 
Household,  who  had  asked  in  low  tones,  ''  What 
ails  His  Highness?"  Then  the  Lady  Lucia,  hav- 
ing reached  the  foot  of  the  steps,  stood  still  there, 
her  eyes  on  the  Duke.  Very  fair  was  she,  and 
sad,  and  she  seemed  rather  some   beautiful  un- 


312      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

substantial  vision  than  a  living  maiden ;  and 
though  she  strove  to  form  words  with  her  lips, 
yet  no  words  came ;  therefore  it  was  by  her 
muteness  that  she  besought  pity  for  herself  and 
pardon  for  her  lover.  But  the  Duke,  leaning 
yet  further  towards  her,  had  fallen,  but  that 
the  physician,  kneeling,  passed  his  arm  round 
his  body  and  held  him  up ;  and  he  said  in  low 
hoarse  tones  and  like  a  man  that  is  amazed  and 
full  of  awe,  and  yet  moved  with  a  gladness  so 
great  that  he  cannot  believe  in  it,  "  Who  is  it  ? 
Who  is  it?" 

And  the  Lady  Lucia  still  could  not  answer 
him.  And  he,  craning  towards  her,  spoke  to  her 
in  entreaty,  "  Margherita,  Margherita!" 

Then  indeed  all  marvelled ;  for  the  name 
that  the  Duke  spoke  was  the  name  by  which 
that  Princess  who  had  been  his  wife  and  was 
dead  had  been  called  ;  and  they  perceived  that 
His  Highness,  overcome  by  his  sickness,  had 
lost  discernment,  and  conceived  the  Lady  Lucia 
to  be  not  herself  but  the  spirit  of  his  dead  love 
come  to  him  from  heaven,  to  which  delusion  her 
white  robes  and  her  death-like  pallor  might  well 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN. 


313 


incline  him.  And  now  the  wonder  and  fear  left 
his  face,  and  there  came  in  place  of  them  a  great 
joy  and  rapture,  so  that  his  sunk  eyes  gleamed, 
his  lips  quivered,  and  he  beckoned  with  his 
hand,  murmuring,  "  I  am  ready,  I  am  ready, 
Margherita  !  "  And  while  this  passed,  all  who 
were  too  distant  to  hear  the  Duke's  words 
wondered  that  the  signal  came  not,  but  supposed 
j;hat.the  Lady  Lucia  had  interceded  for  Count 
Antonio,  and  that  Llis  Highness  was  now  an- 
swering her  prayer:  and  they  hoped  that  he 
would  grant  it.  And  Antonio  stood  on  the 
scaffold  between  the  Lord  Lorenzo  and  the 
executioner  ;  and  his  eyes  were  set  on  Lucia. 

Then  the  Duke  spoke  again  to  the  Lady 
Lucia,  saying,  "  I  have  been  lonely,  very  lonel3^ 
How  pale  your  face  is,  my  sweet !  Come  to  me. 
I  cannot  come  to  you,  for  I  am  very  sick."  And 
he  held  out  his  hand  towards  her  again. 

But  she  was  now  sore  bewildered,  for  she 
could  not  understand  the  words  which  His 
Highness  used  to  her,  and  she  looked  round, 
seeking  some  one  who  might  tell  her  what  they 
meant,  but  none  moved  from  his  place  or  came 


314 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


near  to  her  ;  and  at  last  she  found  voice  enough 
to  say  in  soft  tones,  "  Antonio,  my  lord,  the 
Count  Antonio !  " 

"  Aye,  I  know  that  you  loved  him,"  said  the 
Duke.  "  But  since  then  he  has  done  great 
crimes,  and  he  must  die.  Yet  speak  not  of  him 
now,  but  come  here  to  me,  Margherita." 

Then,  with  wavering  tread,  she  came  towards 
him,  mounting  the  first  of  the  steps,  and  she  said, 
"  I  know  not  what  you  would,  my  lord,  nor  why 
you  call  me  by  the  name  of  Margherita.  I  am 
Lucia,  and  I  come  to  ask  Antonio's  life." 

"  Lucia,  Lucia  ?  "  said  he,  and  his  face  grew 
doubtful.  "  Nay,  but  you  are  my  Margherita," 
he  said. 

"  No,  my  lord,"  she  answered,  as  with  trem- 
bling uncertain  feet  she  mounted,  till  she  stood 
but  one  step  below  where  his  couch  was  placed  ; 
and  then  she  fell  on  her  knees  on  the  highest  step 
and  clasped  her  hands,  crying,  "  Have  mercy,  my 
lord,  have  mercy  !  Think,  my  dear  lord,  how  I 
love  him  ;  for  if  he  dies,  I  must  die  also,  my  lord. 
Ah,  my  lord,  you  have  known  love.  You  loved 
our  sweet  Lady  Margherita ;  was  not  her  name 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     315 

now  on  your  lips  ?  So  I  love  Antonio,  so  he 
loves  me.  Ah,  my  lord,  Christ  Jesus  teaches 
pity  !  "  And  she  buried  her  face  in  her  hands 
and  sobbed. 

Then  the  Duke,  his  physician  and  now  the 
Master  of  the  Household  also  supporting  him, 
stretched  himself  over  the  edge  of  his  couch, 
and,  putting  out  his  hand  with  feverish  strength, 
plicjced  the  Lady  Lucia's  hands  away  from  her 
face  and  gazed  at  her  face.  And  when  he  had 
gazed  a  moment,  he  gave  a  great  cry,  "Ah, 
God ! "  and  flung  his  arms  up  above  his  head 
and  fell  back  into  the  arms  of  his  physician,  who 
laid  him  down  on  his  couch,  where  he  lay  mo- 
tionless, his  eyes  shut  and  his  chin  resting  on  his 
breast.  And  all  looked  at  the  physician,  but  he 
answered,  "  Nay,  he  is  not  dead  yet." 

"Why  tarries  the  signal?"  asked  Antonio  of 
Lorenzo  on  the  scaffold. 

"  It  must  be  that  the  Lad}-  Lucia  beseeches 
him  for  your  life,  my  lord,"  answered  Lorenzo. 
"  Indeed  heartily  do  I  wish  the  Duke  would 
hearken  to  her  prayer." 

"  He  will  not  turn  for  her,"  said  Antonio. 


3i6      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

But  presently  the  report  of  what  had  passed 
spread  from  those  round  the  Duke  to  the  pike- 
men,  and  they,  loving  a  marvel  as  most  men  do, 
must  needs  tell  it  to  the  people,  and  a  murmur 
of  wonder  arose,  and  the  report  reached  the 
guards  at  the  scaffold,  who  came  and  told 
Lorenzo,  in  the  hearing  of  Antonio,  of  the 
strange  delusion  that  had  come  upon  the  Duke. 

"  He  must  be  sick  to  death,"  said  Lorenzo. 

"  I  pray  not,"  said  Count  Antonio.  "  For 
though  he  is  a  stern  man,  yet  he  is  an  able  and 
just  prince,  and  this  fancy  of  his  is  very  pitiful." 

"  Do  you  spare  pity  for  him  ? "  asked  Lorenzo. 

"  Shall  I  not  pity  all  who  have  lost  their 
loves  ?  "  answered  Antonio  with  a  smile,  and  his 
eye  rested  on  the  form  of  the  Lady  Lucia  kneel- 
ing by  the  Duke's  couch. 

For  hard  on  half  an  hour  the  Duke  lay  as  he 
had  fallen,  but  at  last,  his  physician  having  used 
all  his  skill  to  rouse  him,  he  opened  his  eyes  ; 
and  he  clutched  his  physician's  hand  and  pointed 
to  Lucia,  asking,  "  Who  is  she  ?  " 

"  It  is  the  Lady  Lucia,  my  lord,"  answered 
the  ph3'sician. 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     317 

"  And  there  was  none  else  ? "  asked  the  Duke 
in  a  low  tremulous  whisper. 

"  I  saw  no  other,  my  lord." 

"  But  I  saw  her,"  said  the  Duke.  "  I  saw  her 
even  as  I  saw  her  last,  when  she  lay  on  her  bed 
and  they  took  the  child  out  of  her  dead  arms." 

"  It  was  tht5  weakness  of  your  malady,  my 
Jord,  that  made  the  vision  before  your  eyes." 
,  V'Alas,  was  it  no  more?"  moaned  the  Duke. 
"  Indeed,  I  am  very  weak ;  there  is  a  blur  before 
my  eyes.  I  cannot  see  who  this  lady  is  that 
kneels  before  me.  Who  is  she,  and  what  ails 
her?"  And  having  said  this  in  fretful  weary 
tones,  he  lay  back  on  his  pillow  gasping. 

Then  the  Master  of  the  Household  came  for- 
ward and  said  to  him,  "  My  lord,  this  is  the  Lady 
Lucia,  and  she  kneels  before  your  Highness 
praying  for  the  life  of  Count  Antonio,  because 
she  loves  him." 

Now  the  name  of  Count  Antonio,  when 
spoken  to  him,  moved  the  Duke  more  than  all 
the  ministrations  of  his  physician;  he  roused 
himself  once  again,  crying,  "Antonio!  I  had 
forgotten  Antonio.     Does  he  still  live?" 


31 8     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  Your  Highness  has  not  given  the  signal  for 
his  death." 

"Have  I  not?     Then  here " 

He  moved  his  hand,  but  with  a  great  cry  the 
Lady  Lucia  sprang  forward  and  seized  his  hand 
before  he  could  raise  it,  kneeling  to  him  and  cry- 
ing, "No,  no,  my  lord,  no,  no,  no!"  And  the 
Duke  had  no  strength  to  fling  her  off,  but  he 
gasped,  "  Free  me  from  her !  "  And  the  Master 
of  the  Household,  terrified  lest  in  her  passion 
she  should  do  violence  to  His  Highness,  roughly 
tore  her  hands  from  the  Duke's  hand,  and  the 
Duke,  released,  sat  up  on  his  couch,  and  he  said, 
in  a  strange  hard  voice  that  was  heard  of  all, 
even    to   the   scaffold,  and   yet   seemed   not  the 

voice  that  they  knew  as  his,  "  Let  Antonio " 

But  then  he  stopped  ;  he  choked  in  his  throat, 
and,  catching  at  his  shirt,  tore  it  loose  from  him. 
"  Let  Antonio  !  " he  cried  again.  "  Let  An- 
tonio !  " And  he   sat  there  for  an  instant; 

and  his  eyes  grew  dim,  the  intelligence  depart- 
ing from  them  ;  once  again  he  opened  his  lips, 
but  nothing  came  from  them  save  a  gasp ;  and 
with  a   thud    he   fell   back    on  his    pillows,  and, 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     31Q 

having  rolled  once  on  his  side,  turned  again  on 
his  back  and  lay  still.  And  a  great  hush  fell  on 
every  man  in  the  square,  and  they  looked  in  one 
another's  faces,  but  found  no  answer. 

For  Valentine,  Duke  and  Lord  of  Firmola, 
was  dead  of  his  sickness  at  the  moment  when 
he  had  sought  to  send  Antonio  to  death.     Thus 

^  marvellously  did    Heaven  in   its   high   purposes 

,  c^al  with  him. 

"  His  Highness  is  dead,"  said  the  physician. 
And  the  Master  of  the  Household,  as  his  duty 
was,  came  to  the  front  of  the  Duke's  couch,  and, 
standing  there  before  all  the  people,  broke  the 
wand  of  his  office,  and  let  the  broken  fragments 
fall  upon  the  marble  steps;  and  he  cried  aloud, 
"  Hear  all  of  you !  It  hath  pleased  Almighty 
God  to  take  unto  Himself  the  soul  of  the  noble 
and  illustrious  Prince,  Valentine,  Duke  and  Lord 
of  Firmola.     May  his  soul  find  peace  !  " 

But  there  came  from  the  people  no  answering 
cry  of  "  Amen,"  as,  according  to  the  custom  of 
the  Duchy,  should  have  come.  For  they  were 
amazed  at  the  manner  of  this  death  ;  and  many 
crossed  themselves  in  fear,  and  women  sobbed. 


320     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

And  Lorenzo,  standing  on  the  scaffold  by  An- 
tonio, was  struck  with  wonder  and  fear,  and 
clutched  Antonio's  arm,  crying,  "  Can  it  be 
that  the  Duke  is  dead  ? "  And  Antonio  bowed 
his  head,  answering,  "  May  Christ  receive  his 
soul ! " 

Then  the  Master  of  the  Household  came  for- 
ward again  and  cried,  "  Hear  all  of  you !  Ac- 
cording to  the  high  pleasure  and  appointment  of 
Almighty  God,  the  noble  and  illustrious  Prince, 
Valentine,  Second  of  that  Name,  is  from  this 
hour  Duke  and  Lord  of  Firmola ;  whom  obe}'-, 
serve,  and  honour,  all  of  you.  May  his  rule  be 
prosperous ! " 

And  this  time  there  came  a  low  murmur  of 
"  Amen "  from  the  people.  But  before  more 
could  pass,  there  was  a  sudden  commotion  in  the 
square  before  the  scaffold.  For  Bena,  seeing 
what  was  done,  and  knowing  that  the  Duke  was 
dead,  had  glanced  at  the  pikemen  who  stood 
near ;  and  when  he  saw  that  they  looked  not  at 
him  but  towards  where  the  Master  of  the  House- 
hold stood,  he  sprang  forward  and  ran  like  a  deer 
to  the  scaffold  ;  and  he  leapt  up  to  the  scaffold 


MANNER  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     321 

before  any  could  hinder  him,  and  he  cried  in  a 
mighty  loud  voice,  saying,  "  By  what  warrant  do 
you  hold  my  lord  a  prisoner?" 

Then  the  apprentices  raised  a  great  cheer  and 
with  one  accord  pressed  upon  the  pikemen,  who, 
mazed  by  all  that  had  passed,  gave  way  before 
them ;  and  the  apprentices  broke  their  bounds 
^and  surged  like  a  billow  of  the  sea  up  to  the 
Aogt.  of  the  scaffold,  shouting  Antonio's  name ; 
and  the  young  lords  who  held  Tommasino  came 
with  him  and  broke  through  and  reached  the 
scaffold  ;  for  they  feared  for  Lorenzo,  and  yet 
would  not  let  Tommasino  go:  and  Lorenzo  was 
sore  at  a  loss,  but  he  drew  his  sword  and  cried 
that  he  would  slay  any  man  that  touched  An- 
tonio, until  the  right  of  the  matter  should  be 
known. 

"  Indeed,  if  you  will  give  me  a  sword,  I  will 
slay  him  myself,"  said  Antonio.  "  For  I  stand 
here  by  my  own  will,  and  according  to  the 
promise  I  gave  to  the  Duke ;  and  if  there  be 
lawful  authority  to  hang  me,  hang  me ;  but  if 
not,  dispose  of  me  as  the  laws  of  the  Duchy 
bid." 


322      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

"  I  have  no  authority,"  said  Lorenzo,  "  save 
what  the  Duke  gave ;  and  now  he  is  dead." 

Then  the  Count  Antonio  fastened  his  shirt 
again  about  his  neck  and  put  on  his  doublet ; 
and  he  signed  to  Bena  to  stand  on  one  side  of 
him,  and  he  bade  the  young  lords  loose  Tom- 
masino.  And  he  said  to  Lorenzo,  "  Let  us  go  to- 
gether to  the  palace."  And  now  he  was  smiling. 
Then  they  came  down  from  the  scaffold  and 
passed  across  the  square,  a  great  multitude  fol- 
lowing them.  And  when  they  came  to  the  steps 
of  the  palace,  the  Duke's  body  was  covered  with 
a  rich  brocaded  cloth  that  some  hand  had  brought 
from  his  cabinet ;  and  the  little  Duke  stood  there 
with  his  hand  in  the  Master  of  the  Household's 
hand ;  and  the  child  was  weeping  bitterly,  for  he 
was  very  frightened ;  and  over  against  him  stood 
the  Lady  Lucia,  motionless  as  though  she  had 
been  turned  to  stone ;  for  the  strange  thing  that 
had  come  about  through  her  approaching  of  the 
Duke  had  bewildered  her  brain.  But  when  the 
boy  saw  Antonio  he  let  go  the  hand  he  held  and 
ran  to  Antonio  and  leapt  into  his  arms.  Then 
Antonio    lifted    him    and    showed    him    to    the 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     323 

people,  who  hailed  him  for  Duke ;  and  Antonio 
set  him  down  and  knelt  before  him  and  kissed  his 
hand.  And  the  child  cried,  "  Now  that  my  father 
is  dead,  Antonio,  you  must  not  go  on  your  jour- 
ney, but  you  must  stay  with  me.  For  if  I  am 
Duke,  I  must  learn  to  use  my  sword  without  de- 
lay, and  no  man  but  you  shall  teach  me." 
,^.  "Shall  I  not  go  on  my  journey,  my  lord?" 
■  a^ed  Antonio. 

"  No,  you  shall  not  go,"  said  the  little  Duke. 

Then  Antonio  turned  to  the  lords  who  stood 
round  and  said,  "  Behold,  my  lords.  His  High- 
ness pardons  me." 

But  the  lords  doubted ;  and  they  said  to  An- 
tonio, "  Nay,  but  he  does  not  know  what  he  does 
in  pardoning  you." 

"  He  understands  as  well,  I  think,"  said  An- 
tonio, "  as  his  father  understood  when  he  sent  me 
to  death.  Indeed,  my  lords,  it  is  not  children 
only  who  know  not  what  they  do."  And  at  this 
speech  Tommasino  smiled  and  Bena  laughed 
gruffly.  But  the  lords,  bidding  Antonio  rest 
where  he  was  till  they  returned,  retired  with  the 
little  Duke  into  the  palace,  and  sent  word  hastily 


324     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

to  the  Archbishop  that  he  should  join  them  there 
and  deliberate  with  them  as  to  what  it  might  be 
best  to  do.  And  when  they  were  thus  gone  in, 
Antonio  said,  "  I  may  not  move,  but  the  Lady 
Lucia  is  free  to  move." 

Then  Tommasino  went  to  the  lady  and  spoke 
to  her  softly,  telling  her  that  Antonio  desired  to 
speak  with  her;  and  she  gave  Tommasino  her 
hand,  and  he  led  her  to  Antonio,  who  stood 
within  the  portico,  screened  from  the  sight  of 
the  people.     And  there  they  were  left  alone. 

But  meanwhile  the  whole  body  of  the  towns- 
men and  the  apprentices  had  gathered  before  the 
palace,  and  their  one  cry  was  for  Antonio.  For 
the  fear  of  the  Duke  being  no  longer  upon  them, 
and  the  pikemen  not  knowing  whom  to  obey 
and  being  therefore  disordered,  the  people  be- 
came very  bold,  and  they  had  stormed  the  palace, 
had  not  one  come  to  Antonio  and  implored  him 
so  show  himself,  that  the  people  might  know 
that  he  was  safe.  Therefore  he  came  forward 
with  the  Lady  Lucia,  who  was  now  no  more 
bewildered,  nor  petrified  with  fear  or  astonish- 
ment, but  was  weeping  with  her  eyes  and  smiling 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     325 

•with  her  lips  and  clinging  to  Antonio's  arm. 
And  when  the  people  saw  them  thus,  they  set 
up  a  great  shout,  that  was  heard  far  beyond  the 
city  walls ;  and  the  apprenticed  lads  turned  and 
ran  in  a  body  across  the  square,  and  swarmed 
on  to  the  scaffold.  And  then  and  there  they 
plucked  down  the  gibbet  and  worked  so  fiercely 

^that  in  the  space  of  half  an  hour  there  was  none 

Ztit  left. 

And  now  the  Archbishop  with  the  lords  came 
forth  from  the  council  chamber,  and  the  little 
Duke  with  them.  And  they  caused  the  servants 
to  remove  the  body  of  the  dead  Duke,  and  they 
set  his  son  on  a  high  seat,  and  put  a  sceptre  in 
his  hand.  And  the  Archbishop  offered  up  a 
prayer  before  the  people  ;  and,  having  done  this, 
he  turned  to  Antonio  and  said,  "  My  Lord  An- 
tonio, most  anxiously  have  His  Highness  and  we 
of  his  Council  considered  of  this  matter ;  and  it 
has  seemed  to  us  all — my  own  in  truth  was  the 
sole  reluctant  voice,  and  now  I  also  am  brought 
to  the  same  mind — that  whereas  the  virtuous 
purposes  of  princes  are  meet  to  be  remembered 
and  made   perpetual  by  faithful  fulfilment  after 


326     THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

their  death,  yet  the  errors  of  which  they,  being 
mortal,  are  guilty  should  not  overlive  them  nor 
be  suffered  to  endure  when  they  have  passed 
away.  And  though  we  are  not  blind  to  your 
offences,  yet  we  judge  that  in  the  beginning  the 
fault  was  not  yours.  Therefore  His  Highness 
decrees  your  pardon  for  all  offences  against  his 
civil  state  and  power.  And  I  myself,  who  hold 
authority  higher  than  any  earthly  might,  seeing 
in  what  this  day  has  witnessed  the  finger  of  God 
Himself,  do  not  fight  against  it,  but  will  pray 
you,  so  soon  as  you  may  fit  yourself  thereunto 
by  prayer  and  meditation,  to  come  in  a  huni- 
ble  mind  and  seek  again  the  blessing  of  the 
Church.  For  in  what  you  did  right  and  in 
what  you  outstepped  right,  God  Himself  must 
one  day  judge,  and  I  will  seek  to  judge  of  it  no 
more." 

"  My  lord,"  said  Antonio,  "  I  have  done 
much  wrong.  Yet  I  will  own  no  wrong  in  the 
matter  of  the  Abbot  nor  in  that  of  the  Sacred 
Bones." 

But  the  lord  Archbishop  smiled  at  Antonio, 
and  Antonio  bent  and    kissed  the  ring  that  was 


MANNER   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     327 

on  his  finger ;  and  the  old  man  laid  his  hand  for 
a  moment  on  Antonio's  head,  saying,  "  It  may  be 
that  God  works  sometimes  in  ways  that  I  may 
not  see." 

Thus  then  it  was  that  the  Count  Antonio  was 
restored  to  his  place,  and  came  again  to  Firmola ; 
and,    having    been    relieved    of   the    sentence    of 
excommunication  that  had    been  laid  upon  him, 
h&  \vas  wedded    in    the   Cathedral   to  the  Lady 
Lucia  as  soon  as  the  days  of   mourning  for  the 
Duke  had  passed.     And  great  was  the  joy  in  the 
city  at  their  wedding ;  for  every  maid  and  every 
man  saw  in  the  triumph  of  Antonio's  love  a  sign 
of  the  favour  of  Heaven  to  those  who  love  with 
a  pure  and  abiding  passion.     So  they  made  great 
feasts,  and  were  marvellously  merry ;  and  Bena 
let  not  the  day  go  by  without  plighting  his  troth 
to  a  comely  damsel,  saying  with  a  twinkle  in  his 
eye  that  the  Count  Antonio  would  have  need  of 
his   sons,    whose    services   he    had    promised    to 
him    as    they  rode  together   across  the  plain  on 
the  morning  when  Antonio    had    supposed    that 
he  was  to  die.     Nor  would  Bena  give  any  other 
reason  whatsoever  for  the  marriage.     Nevcrthe- 


328      THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 

less  it  is  likely  that  there  were  others.  But 
whether  Bena  fulfilled  his  promise  I  know  not ; 
for,  as  I  have  said,  so  little  is  known  concerning 
him  that  his  true  name  does  not  survive,  and 
it  has  proved  an  impossible  thing  to  discover 
whether  any  of  his  descendants  yet  live  in  Fir- 
mola.  If  it  chance  that  they  do,  I  trust  that 
they  fight  as  well,  and  serve  as  loyally,  and  pray 
better  than  he.  But  Martolo  has  left  those  that 
bear  his  name,  and  a  great-grandson  of  his  is  at 
this  very  time  huntsman  to  the  Monastery  of 
St.  Frisian,  where  I  have  seen  and  talked  with 
him  many  times. 

The  task  which  I  laid  upon  myself  thus  finds 
its  end.  For  there  is  no  need  for  me  to  tell  of 
the  after-deeds  of  Count  Antonio  of  Monte 
Velluto,  nor  how,  in  the  space  of  a  few  months, 
he  was  chosen  by  all  the  lords  to  be  Ruler  and 
Protector  of  the  State  during  the  infancy  of  the 
Duke  ;  in  which  high  office  he  did  many  notable 
deeds,  both  of  war  and  peace,  and  raised  the 
Duchy  to  a  great  height  of  power,  and  conferred 
many  favours  on  the  townsmen  of  Firmola, 
whom  he  loved  and  cherished  because  they  had 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN.     329 

not  forsaken  him  nor  ceased  to  love  him  during 
all  the  years  that  he  dwelt  an  outlaw  in  the 
hills.  And  he  built  again  his  house  on  the  hill 
which  Duke  Valentine  had  burnt,  and  dwelt 
there  with  Lucia,  and  with  Tommasino  also, 
until  Tommasino  took  to  wife  that  same  lady 
for  whose  sake' he  had  lingered  and  thus  fallen 
jnto  the  hands  of  the  lord  Lorenzo,  and  went 
and  'dwelt  at  Rilano,  where  those  of  his  house 
still  dwell.  But  when  the  young  Duke  came  of 
an  age  to  reign,  the  Count  Antonio  delivered  his 
charge  into  his  hand,  yet  continued  to  counsel 
him,  and  was  very  high  in  authority.  And  neigh- 
bouring princes  also  sought  his  aid  and  his 
counsel,  and  he  was  greatly  honoured  of  all  men. 
Thus  if  there  were  aught  in  his  youth  that 
merits  censure,  it  may  be  held  that  he  blotted 
out  the  shame  of  it  by  his  after-life,  for  his 
later  days  were  filled  with  honourable  service 
to  his  Prince  and  to  his  country. 

Yet  the  heart  of  man  is  a  vain  thing ;  for  when 
I,  who  am  known  to  have  learnt  all  that  can  be 
recovered  from  the  mists  of  past  times  con- 
cerning Count  Antonio,  am  asked — and  whether 


330 


THE   CHRONICLES   OF   COUNT   ANTONIO. 


it  be  by  men  or  women,  by  boys  or  girls,  aye,  or 
by  toddling  infants — to  tell  them  a  tale  of  the 
great  Count  Antonio,  it  is  not  of  the  prudent 
ruler,  nor  of  the  wise  counsellor,  nay,  nor  even 
of  the  leader  of  the  Duke's  army,  that  they 
would  hear,  but  always  of  Antonio  when  he  was 
an  outlaw,  banned  by  his  Prince  and  by  the 
Church,  living  by  the  light  of  his  own  heart  and 
by  the  strength  of  his  own  hand,  secured  only 
by  the  love  and  duty  of  the  lawless  men  who 
followed  him,  and  risking  his  life  every  day  and 
every  hour  for  the  sake  of  the  bright  eyes  of 
that  lady  who  waited  for  him  in  the  city.  And 
when  I,  thinking  to  check  this  perversity,  bid 
them  look  rather  on  his  more  worthy  and  sober 
days,  they  answer  with  a  laugh,  "  But  why, 
father,  do  you  not  write  the  story  of  those  more 
worthy  and  sober  days?"  Nor  will  they  believe 
when  I  say  that  it  is  but  because  the  deeds  of 
those  days  are  elsewhere  recorded.  In  good 
truth,  I  believe  that  in  our  hearts  we  love  a 
lawless  man !  Here,  then,  ye  perverse  children, 
are  the  stories ;  they  are  all  that  you  shall  have 
from  me.     Read  them  ;   may  they  teach  you  to 


MANNER   OF   COUNT  ANTONIO'S   RETURN. 


331 


be  true  comrades,  faithful  lovers  of  one  maid, 
and,  since  strife  must  needs  come  until  God's 
pleasure  bring-  peace  to  reign  on  earth,  able, 
when  occasion  calls,  to  give  and  take  good 
blows.  Aye,  never  laugh.  I  have  said  it.  A 
Churchman  is  a  man. 


THE   END. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

NOVELS   BY   HALL   CAINE. 
'J^UjE  MANXMAN.     121110.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"A  story  of  man-elous  dramatic  intensity,  and  in  its  ethical  meaning  has  a  force 
comparable  only  to  Hawthorne's  '  .Scarlet  Letter.'  " — Boston  Beacon. 

"A  work  of  pov.-er  which  is  another  stone  added  to  the  foundation  of  enduring  fame 
to  which  Mr.  Caine  is  yearly  adding." — Public  Opinion. 

"A  wonderfully  strong  study  of  character;  a  powerful  aralj-sis  of  those  elements 
which  go  to  make  up  the  strengt'i  and  weakness  of  a  man,  which  are  at  fierce  warfare 
wiihin  the  same  breast;  contending  against  each  otlier,  as  it  were,  the  one  to  raise  him 
to  fame  and  power,  the  other  to  drag  him  down  lo  degradation  and  shame.  Never  in 
the  whole  range  of  literature  have  we  seen  the  struggle  between  these  forces  for 
supremacy  over  the  man  more  powerfully,  more  realistically  delineated  than  IVIr.  Caine 
pictures  it."^ — Boston  Hfime  yotirnal. 

J^BE    DEEMSTER.      A     Roma7ice   of  the   Isle    of 

'.^  Man.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

..f  "^Hall  Caine  has  already  given  us  some  very  strong  and  fine  work,  and  'The 
Dfeemster'  is  a  story  of  unusual  power.  .  .  .  Certain  passages  and  chapters  have  an 
intensely  dramatic  grasp,  and  hold  the  fascinated  reader  with  a  force  rarely  excited 
nowadays  in  literature.  " — The  Cy'itic. 

"  One  of  the  strongest  novels  which  has  appeared  in  many  a  day." — San  Fran- 
cisco Chro7iicle. 

"  Fascinates  the  mind  like  the  gathering  and  bursting  of  a  storm." — Illustrated 
London  News. 

"Deserves  to  be  ranked  among  the  remarkable  novels  of  the  day." — Chicago 
Times. 

HE  BONDMAN.     New  edition.     121110.     Cloth, 
$1.50. 

"The  welcome  given  to  this  story  has  cheered  and  touched  m.e,  but  I  am  con- 
scious that,  to  win  a  reception  so  warm,  such  a  book  must  have  had  readers  who 
brought  to  it  as  much  as  they  took  away.  ...  I  have  called  my  storj-  a  saga,  merely 
because  it  follows  the  epic  method,  and  I  must  not  claim  for  it  at  any  point  tlie  weighty 
responsibility  of  history,  or  serious  obligations  to  the  world  of  fact.  But  it  matters  not 
to  me  what  Icelanders  may  call  '  The  Fordman,'  if  they  will  honor  me  by  reading  it  in 
the  open  hearted  spirit  and  with  the  free  mind  with  which  they  are  content  to  read  of 
Grettir  and  of  his  fights  with  the  Troll." — From  the  .'iiithor's  Pre/ace. 


c 


'APT'N    DAVY'S    HONEYMOON.      A    Manx 
Yarn.     i2mo.     Paper,  50  cents;  cloth,  $1.00. 

"A  new  departure  by  this  author.  Unlike  his  previous  works,  this  little  tale  is 
almost  wholly  humorous,  with,  however,  a  current  of  pathos  underneath.  It  is  not 
ilways  that  an  author  can  succeed  equally  well  in  trapedy  and  in  comedy,  but  it  looks 
as  though  Mr.  Hall  Caine  would  be  one  of  the  exceptions." — London  Literary 
World. 

"  It  Is  pleasant  to  meet  the  author  of  '  The  Deemster'  in  a  brightly  humorous  little 
story  like  this.  ...  It  shows  the  same  observation  of  Manx  character,  and  much  of 
the  same  artistic  skill." — Philadelphia  Times. 


New  York :   D.  ArPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.  APPLETON  &   CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


By  a.  CONAN   DOYLE. 

^HE    STARK   MUNRO    LETTERS.      Being  a 
-*        Series  of  Twelve  Letters  written  by  J.  Stark  Munro,  M.  B., 
to  his  friend  and  former  fellow-student,  Llerbert  Swanborough, 
of  Lowell,  Massachusetts,  during  the  years  1S81-1884.     Illus- 
trated.    l2mo.     Buckram,  $1.50. 

This  original  and  dramatic  story  presents  fresh  types,  extraordinary  sit- 
uations, and  novel  suggestions  with  a  freshness  and  vigor  which  show  that 
the  romancer's  heart  was  in  his  work.  How  far  certain  incidents  of  the 
story  are  based  upon  personal  experiences  it  is  impossible  to  say,  but  the 
unflagging  interest  and  unexpected  pliases  of  the  romance  are  no  less  in 
evidence  than  the  close  personal  relations  established  between  author  and 
reader.  In  the  "Stark  Munro  Letters"  the  author  has  achieved  another 
success  which  will  add  to  the  number  of  his  American  friends  and  readers. 

"  Any  one  who  has  read  any  of  the  fascinating  stories  in  which  the  shrewd  detect- 
ive, Sherlock  Holmes,  figures  as  the  very  personification  of  detective  logic  applied  to 
the  detection  of  crime,  knows  that  Conan  Doyle  is  a  storj'-teller  of  the  very  first  order 
of  merit.  Like  his  own  character,  Sherlock  Holmes,  he  possesses  the  power  of  getting 
out  of  everything  all  there  is  in  it." — Philadelphia  Item. 

"  Dr.  Doyle's  stories  are  so  well  known  for  their  strong  dramatic  style,  for  the  ele- 
gance of  expression,  that  anything  new  from  his  pen  is  sure  to  be  warmly  welcomed. 
His  readers  are  sure  of  getting  a  literary  treat  from  anything  he  writes.  He  is  broad- 
minded  and  liberal,  and  the  man  who  could  write  two  such  books  as  'The  White  Com- 
pany' and  'The  Refugees'  has  a  future  which  the  shades  of  Scott  and  Dickens  might 
envy." — All/any  Times-Union. 

Seventh  Edition. 
OUND  THE  RED  LAMP.     12 mo.    Cloth,  $1.50. 

The  "  Red  Lamp,"  the  trade-mark,  as  it  were,  of  the  English  country 
practitioner's  office,  is  the  central  p'  int  of  these  dramatic  stories  of  profes- 
sional life.  There  are  no  secrets  for  the  surgeon,  and,  a  surgeon  him.self  as 
well  as  a  novelist,  the  author  has  made  a  most  artistic  use  of  the  motives 
and  springs  of  action  revealed  to  him  in  a  field  of  which  he  is  the  master. 

"  Too  much  can  not  be  said  in  praise  of  these  strong  productions,  that,  to  read, 
keep  one's  heart  le.iping  to  the  throat  and  the  mind  in  a  tumult  of  anticipation  to  the 
end.  .  .  .  No  series  of  short  stories  in  modern  literature  can  approach  them." — Hart- 
ford Times. 

"  If  Mr.  A.  Conan  Doyle  had  not  already  placed  himself  in  the  front  rank  of  living 
English  writers  by  'The  Kefafrees,'  and  other  of  his  larger  stories,  he  would  surely  do 
so  by  these  fifteen  short  tales." — New  }'o>-k  i\l ail  and  Express. 

"  The  reading  of  these  choice  stories  will  prove  an  exciting  pleasure  to  all  who  may 
linger  on  the  pages  that  present  them." — Bpstnn  Courier. 

"A  strikingly  realistic  and  decidedly  original  contribution  to  modern  literature." — 
Boston  Saturday  Evening  Gazette. 

"  Every  page  reveals  the  literary  artist,  the  keen  observer,  the  trained  delineator  of 
human  nature,  its  weal  and  its  woe.  .  .  .  Dr.  Doyle  has  a  rich  note-book  or,  we  should 
say,  a  golden  memory." — London  Freeman's  Journal. 


New  York  :  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 
S.  R.  CROCKETT'S   LATEST   BOOKS. 

UNIFORM    EDITION.      EACH,    I2MO.      CLOTH,    $1.50. 

OG-MYRTLE  AND  PEAT. 

"  Here  are  idyls,  epics,  dr.^mas  of  human  life,  written  in  words  that  thrill  snd 
bam.  .  .  .  Each  is  a  poem  that  has  an  immortal  flavor.  They  are  fragments  of  tlie 
author's  early  dreams,  too  bright,  too  gorgeous,  too  full  of  the  blood  of  rubies  and  the 
life  of  diamonds  to  be  caught  and  helJ  palpitating  in  expression's  grasp."— Besion 
Courier. 

"Contains  some  of  the  most  dramatic  pieces  Mr.  Crockett  has  yet  written,  and  in 
these  picturesque  skswties  he  is  altogether  delightlul.  .  .  .  The  volume  is  well  worth 
reading — all  ol'it."  —Phiia.ielphia  Press. 

"  Hardly  a  sketch  among  them  all  that  will  not  r.fford  pTeasure  'o  the  reader  for  its 
enial  humor,  artistic  local  coloring,  and  admirable  portrajai  of  character." — Bosicn 
"oine  yonrttal. 


"f 


■  ''One  dips  into  the  book  anywhere  and  reads  on  and  on,  fascinated  by  the  writer's 
charm  of  manner." — Minneapoiis  Tribune. 

"These  stories  are  lively  and  vigorous,  and  have  many  touches  of  human  nature 
in  them— such  touches  as  we  are  used  to  from  having  read  '  The  Stickit  Minister'  and 
'  The  Lilac  Sunbonnet.'  " — New  Haven  Register. 

"  '  Bog-Myrtle  and  Peat '  contains  stories  which  could  only  have  been  written  by  a 
man  of  genius." — London  Chronicle. 


'J^HE  LILAC  SUNBONNET.     A  Loz^e  Story. 

"  A  love  story  pure  and  simple,  one  of  the  old-fashioned,  wholesome,  sunshiny 
kind,  with  a  pure-minded,  sound-hearted  hero,  and  a  heroine  who  is  merely  a  good  and 
beautiful  woman ;  and  if  any  other  love  story  half  so  sweet  has  been  written  tliis  year, 
it  has  escaped  our  notice." — New  York  Times. 

"  A  solid  novel  with  an  old-time  flavor,  as  refreshing  when  compared  to  the  average 
modem  story  as  is  a  whiff  of  air  from  the  hills  to  one  just  come  from  a  hothouse." — 
Boston  Beacon. 

"The  general  conception  of  the  story,  the  motive  of  which  is  the  growth  of  love  be. 
tween  the  young  chief  and  heroine,  ii  delineated  with  a  sweetness  and  a  freshness,  a 
naturalness  and  a  certainty,  which  places  'The  Lilac  Sunbonnet'  among  the  best 
stories  of  the  time." — New  York  Mail  and  Exfress. 

"  In  its  own  line  this  little  love  story  can  hardly  be  excelled.  It  is  a  pastoral,  an 
idyl — the  story  of  love  and  courtship  and  mariiasre  of  a  fine  young  man  and  a  lovely 
girl — no  more.  But  it  is  told  in  so  thoroughly  delightful  a  manner,  with  such  playful 
humor,  such  delicate  fancy,  such  true  and  syaipathetic  feeling,  that  nothing  more 
could  be  desired." — Boston  Traveller. 

"  A  charming  love  story,  redolent  of  the  banks  and  braes  and  lochs  and  pines, 
healthy  to  the  core,  the  love  that  God  made  for  man  and  woman's  first  glimpse  of  para- 
dise, and  a  constant  reminder  of  it." — San  Francisco  Call. 


New  York :   D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

rHE  RED  BADGE  OF  COURAGE.     A  Tale  of 
the  Civil  V/ar.     By  Stephen  Crane.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $i.oo. 

For  an  equally  searching  and  graphic  analysis  of  the  volunteer  in  battle, 
one  is  tempted  to  turn  to  certain  pages  of  Tolstoy.  Mr.  Crane  puts  before 
us  the  reality  of  war  as  it  appeared  to  the  soldier,  and  the  interest  of  his 
picture  is  intense  and  absorbing. 

STREET  IN  SUBURBIA.     By  Edwin  Pugh. 
i2mo.     Cloth,  $i.oo. 

"  Simplicity  of  style,  strength,  and  delicacy  of  character  study  will  mark  this  book 
as  one  of  the  most  significant  of  the  year.'' — New  York  Press. 

"  Thoroughly  entertaining,  and  more — it  shows  traces  of  a  creative  genius  some- 
thing akin  to  Dickens." — Boston  Traveller. 

"  In  many  respects  the  best  of  all  the  books  of  lighter  literature  brought  out  this 
season." — Providence  News. 

Jl/TAJESTY.    A  Novel.    By  Louis  Couperus.    Trans- 
■^^  lated  by  A.   Teixeira   de    Mattos  and   Ernest  Dowson. 
i2mo.     Cloth,  $i.oo. 

"No  novelist  whom  we  can  call  to  mind  has  ever  given  the  world  such  a  master- 
piece of  royal  portraiture  as  Louis  Couperus's  striking  romance  entitled  '  Majesty.'  "— 
Philadelphia  Record. 

"There  is  not  an  uninteresting  page  in  the  book,  and  it  ought  to  be  read  by  all 
who  desire  to  keep  in  line  with  the  best  tliat  is  published  in  modem  fiction.  —BuJ/alo 
Com77iercial. 

'T^HE    NEW  MOON.     By  C.  E.  Raimond,  author 
J-        of  "  George  Mandeville's  Husband,"  etc.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $i.oo. 

"Adcl'c-'te  pathos  makes  itself  felt  as  the  narrative  progresses,  whose  cadences 
fall  on  the'spirifs  consciousness  with  a  sweet  and  soothing  mfluence  not  to  be  meas- 
ured in  words.  "—.S.-'j/c/;  Courier. 

"One  of  the  most  impressive  of  recent  works  of  fiction,  both  for  its  matter  and 
especially  f.r  its  presentation."— i1iV/if«'.'/t^f  Journal. 

'T^HE   WISH.    A  Novel.    By  Hermann  Sudermann. 
J^        With  a  Biographical  Introduction  by  Elizabeth  Lee.     i2mo. 
Cloth,  $i.oo. 

"Contains  some  superb  specimens  of  original  thought."-.V^«;  York  World. 
"  The  style  is  direct  and  incisive,  and  holds  the  unflagging  attention  of  the  reader. 
— Boston  Journal. 

"  A  powerful  story,  very  simple,  very  iix^c.^" -Chicago  Evening  Post. 

New  York :   D.  APPLETON   &   CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


^TONEPASTURES.    By  Eleanor  Stuart.    i6mo. 

^      Cloth,  75  cents. 

This  graphic  picture  of  quaint  characters  belongs  to  the  class  of  special- 
ized American  fiction  which  has  been  headed  by  the  work  of  Miss  Wilkins, 
Mr.  Cable,  Colonel  Johnston,  Mr.  Garland,  and  others.  The  author  has 
studied  the  peculiar  and  almost  unknown  life  of  the  laborers  in  a  Pennsyl- 
vania mining  and  manufacturing  town  with  a  keenness  of  observation  and 
an  abundant  sense  of  humor  which  will  give  her  book  a  permanent  place 
among  the  gettre  studies  of  American  life. 


T 


'HE    WATTER'S   MOU\      By   Bram    Stoker. 

i6mo.     Cloth,  75  cents. 

"Told  with  directness  and  power,  and  is  an  exceptionally  strong  piece  of  work." — 
Boston  yojirnal. 
»        "The  characters  are  strongly  drawn,  the  descriptions  are  intensely  dramatic,  and 
'(fic  situations  are  portrayed  with  rare  vividness  of  language.     It  is  a  thrilling  story, 
.  toW  flcish  great  power." — Boston  Advertiser. 

liyT ASTER  AND  MAN.     By  Count  Leo  Tolstoy. 
1 VX    With  an  Introduction  by  W.  D.  Howells.     i6mo.     Cloth,  75 
cents. 

"  Crowded  with  these  characteristic  touches  which  mark  his  literary  work." — Public 
Opinion. 

"  From  the  very  start  the  reader  feels  that  it  is  from  a  master's  pen." — Boston 
Times. 

"  Reveals  a  wonderful  knowledge  of  the  workings  of  the  human  mind,  and  it  tells  i 
tale  that  not  only  stirs  the  emotions,  but  gives  us  a  better  insight  into  our  own  hearts." 
— San  Francisco  A  rgonant. 


T 


HE   ZEIT-GEIST.      By  L.  Dougall,  author  of 
"  The  Mermaid,"  "  Beggars  All,"  etc.     i6mo.     Cloth,  75  cents. 

"  It  is  impossible  for  one  to  read  it  without  feeling  better  for  having  done  so — with- 
out having  a  desire  to  aid  his  fellow-men." — Nciv  York  Times. 

"  One  of  the  best  of  the  short  stones  of  the  day." — Boston  yoiirnal. 

"  One   of  the   most  remarkable  novels   of  the   year." — New   York   Commercial 
A  dvertiser. 

"Powerful  in  conception,  treatment,  and  influence." — Boston  Globe. 


T 


HE  GREEN  CARNATION.      i2mo.      Buckram, 

75  cents. 

"  Here  are  wit  and  bndina^je  that  cut  like  two-ed^ed  rapiers;  here  is  the  true  Gallic 
salt  well  rubbed  into  the  r.iw  places  on  the  sleek  body  of  the  Philistine ;  here  is  the 
mirror  he'd  up  to  a  faUe  respectability ;  and  all  the  while  the  epigrams  tread  close  upon 
one  another's  heels  in  bev/ildering  brilliancy." — Philadelphia  Evening  Bttlletin. 


New  York:   D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.   APPLETON  &   CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


CORRUPTION.     By  Percy  White,  author  of  "Mr. 
Bailey-Martin,"  etc.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.25. 

The  promise  sho^vn  in  "  Mr.  Bailey-Martin  "  reaches  fuiriUmcnt  in  this  acute  study 
of  poliiical  and  social  adventures  in  London.  The  story  illustrates  phases  of  hfe  which 
are  of  especial  interest,  and  it  is  told  with  rare  felicity  of  expression  by  an  author  inti- 
mately acquainted  with  the  subjects  of  which  he  treats. 


A 


HARD  WOMAN.    A  Story  in  Scenes,    By  Violet 
Hunt.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.25. 

This  brilliant  picture  of  certain  types  and  phases  of  modern  London  life  will  be  read 
and  talked  about  for  its  originality  and  power.  The  author  has  varied  the  usual  form 
of  fictiun,  and  her  study  of  artistic  and  fashionable  society  will  be  found  intensely 
modem  in  spirit,  bright  and  entertaining  throughout. 

'N    IMAGINATIVE    MAN.       By    Robert     S. 
HiCHENS,  author  of  "The  Green  Carnation."     i2mo.     Cloth, 

$1.25. 

"  One  of  the  brightest  books  of  the  year." — Boston  Budget. 

"Altogether  delightful,  fascinating,  un\xs\i?i\."— Cleveland  Amusement  Gazette. 

"  A  study  in  character.  .  .  .  Just  as  entertaining  as  though  it  were  the  conven- 
tional story  of  love  and  marriage.  The  clever  hand  of  the  author  of  '  The  Green 
Carnation'  is  easily  detected  in  the  caustic  wit  and  pointed  episram." ~yea>inette  L. 
Gilder,  in  the  New  York  IVorld. 

IN  THE  FIRE   OF    THE  FORGE.     A  Romance 

-^        of  Old  Nuremberg.     By  Georg  Ebers,  author  of  "  Cleopatra," 

"  An  Egyptian   Princess,"  etc.      In  2  vols.      i6mo.      Paper,  80 

cents  ;  cloth,  $1.50. 

"  The  tale  is  vividly  told  in  language  whose  vigorous  style  is  beautified  by  genuine 

poetic  grace.      Whatever  Dr.  Ebers  writes  is  bound  to  interest  and  instruct— rea  on 

siifScieiit  why  his  books  should  be  chosen  in  place  of  the  emotional  trash  that  tco  often 

appeals  to  the  average  mind." — Boston  Budget. 

rHE  LAND  OF  THE  SUN.      Vv.tas  Mexicanas. 
By  Christian  Reid,  author  of  "  The  Land  of  the  .Sky,"  "  A 
Comedy  of  Elopement,"  etc.    Illustrated.     i2nio.    Cloth,  $1.75. 
"Perhaps  no  book  of  recent  date  gives  a  simpler  and  at  the  same  time  more  eflfect- 
ive  picture  of  this  truly  beautiful  '  land  of  the  sun '  than  is  to  be  found  in  this  striking 
volu.Tie." — St.  Louis  Republic. 

"  One  of  the  most  charming  books  of  travel  that  we  have  read  for  a  long  time.  .  .  . 
Certiinly  no  one  should  ever  think  of  visiting  Mexico  without  taking  this  book  of 
splendid  description  and  delightful  romance  with  him." — Boston  Home  Journal 

"  He  wlio  would  see  the  grandeurs  of  Mexico  through  the  eyes  of  another  should 
give  careful  perusal  to  Christian  Reid's  portrayal  of  'The  Land  of  the  Sun,'  which  in 
every  detail  is  a  fitting  tribute  to  the  past,  present,  and  future  conditions  of  the  new 
Spain." — Chicago  Evening  Post. 

New  York  :  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

NOVELS  BY  MAARTEN  MAARTENS. 

'J^HE  GREATER  GLORY.     A  Story  of  High  Life. 
■*■       By  Maarten  Maartens,    author  of  "  God's   Fool,"   "  Joost 
Avelingh,"  etc.     l2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"Until  the  Appletons  discovered  the  merits  of  Maarten  Maartens,  the  foremost  of"" 
Dutch  novelists,  it  is  doubtiul  if  many  American  readers  knew  that  there  were  Duu-h 
novelists.     His  '  God's  Fool '  and  'Joost  Avelingh  '  made  for  hira  an  American  reputa- 
toon.     To  our  mind  this  just  published  work  of  his  is  his  best.  .  .  .  He  is  a  master  of 
epigram,  an  artist  in  description,  a  prophet  in  insight." — Boston  Advertiser. 

"  It  would  take  several  columns  to  give  any  adequate  idea  of  the  superb  way  in 
which  the  Dutch  novelist  has  developed  his  theme  and  wrought  out  one  of  tlie  m.<st 
impressive  stories  of  the  period.  ...  It  belongs  to  the  small  class  of  novels  which 
one  can  not  afford  to  neglect." — San  Francisco  Chronicle. 

"  Maarten  Maartens  stands  head  and  shoulders  above  the  average  novelist  of  the 
day  in  intellectual  subdety  and  imaginative  pov/er." — Boston  Beacon. 

»  *■ 

"^f^OnS   FOOL.     By  Maarten    Maartens.      i2mo. 
'  ^'    Cloth,  $1.50. 

"  Throughout  there  is  an  epigrammatic  force  which  would  make  palatable  a  less 
interesting  story  of  human  lives  or  one  less  deftly  told." — London  Saturday  Review. 

"  Perfectly  easy,  graceful,  humorous.  .  .  .  The  author's  skill  in  character-drawing 
b  undeniable." — London  Chronicle. 

"  A  remarkable  work." — New  York  Times. 

"Maarten  Maartens  has  secured  a  firm  footing  in  the  eddies  of  current  literature. 
.  .  .  Pathos  deepens  into  tragedy  in  the  thrilling  story  of  '  God's  Fool.'  "—Philadel- 
phia Ledger. 

"  Its  preface  alone  stamps  the  author  as  one  of  the  leading  English  novelists  of 
to-day." — Boston  Daily  Advertiser. 

"The  story  is  wonderfully  brilliant.  .  .  .  The  interest  never  lags;  the  stj'le  is 
realistic  and  intense;  and  there  is  a  constantly  underlying  current  of  subtle  humor. 
...  It  is,  in  short,  a  book  which  no  student  of  modern  literature  should  fail  to  read." 
— Boston  Times. 

"A  story  of  remarkable  interest  and  point." — New  York  Observer. 

CYOOST  AVELINGH.      By  Maarten    Maartens. 

7^     l2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"So  unmistakably  good  as  to  induce  th?  hone  that  an  acquaintance  with  the  Dutch 
literature  of  fiction  may  soon  become  more  general  among  us." — London  iVarning 
Post. 

"  In  scarcely  any  of  the  sensational  novels  of  the  day  will  the  reader  find  more, 
nature  or  more  human  nature." — London  Standard. 

"A  novel  ofa  very  high  type.  At  once  strongly  realistic  and  powerfully  ideal- 
istic."— London  Literary  World. 

"  Full  of  local  color  and  rich  in  quaint  phraseology  and  suggestion." — London 
Telegrafih. 

"  Maarten  Maartens  is  a  capital  story-teller." — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

"Our  English  writers  of  fiction  will  have  to  look  to  their  laurels." — Birmingham 
Daily  Pest. 

New  York :  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  AvcnuG. 


M 


D,  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

ANY  INVENTIONS.  By  Rudyard  Kiplinc*. 
Containing  fourteen  stories,  several  of  which  are  iv>\v  pub- 
lished for  the  first  time,  and  two  poems.  i2mo,  427  pages. 
Cloth,  $1.50. 

"The  reader  turns  from  its  pages  with  the  conviction  that  the  author  has  no  siipei 
ior  to-day  in  animated  narrative  and  virility  of  style.  He  remains  master  of  a  powsi 
n  which  none  of  his  contemporaries  approach  him — the  ability  to  select  out  of  countless 
details  the  few  vital  ones  which  create  the  finished  picture.  He  knows  how,  with  a 
phrase  or  a  word,  to  make  you  see  his  characters  as  he  sees  them,  to  make  you  feel 
the  full  meaning  of  a  dramatic  situation." — New  York  Tribune. 

'"Many  Inventions'  will  confirm  Mr.  Kipling's  reputation.  .  .  .  We  would  cite 
with  pleasure  sentences  from  almost  every  page,  and  extract  incidents  from  almost 
every  story.  But  to  Vv-hat  end?  Here  is  the  completcst  book  that  Mr.  Kipling  has  yet 
t;iven  us  in  workmanship,  the  weightiest  and  most  humane  in  breadth  of  view." — 
Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

"  Mr.  Kipling's  powers  as  a  story-teller  are  evidently  not  diminishing.  We  advise 
everybody  to  buy  '  Many  Inventions,'  and  to  profit  by  some  of  the  best  entertainment 
that  modern  fiction  has  to  offer." — New  York  Sun. 

"  '  Many  Inventions  '  will  be  welcomed  wherever  the  English  language  is  spoken. 
.  .  .  Every  one  of  the  stories  bears  the  imprint  of  a  master  who  conjures  up  incident 
as  if  by  magic,  and  who  portrays  character,  scenery,  and  feeling  with  an  ease  which  is 
only  exceeded  by  the  boldness  of  force." — Boston  Globe. 

"The  book  will  get  and  hold  the  closest  attention  of  the  reader." — American 
Bookseller. 

"  Mr.  Rudyard  Kipling's  place  in  the  world  of  letters  is  unique.  He  sits  quite  aloof 
and  alone,  the  incomparable  and  inimitable  master  of  the  exquisitely  fine  art  of  short- 
story  writing.  Mr.  Robert  Louis  Stevenson  has  perhaps  written  several  tales  which 
match  the  run  of  Mr.  Kipling's  work,  but  the  best  of  Mr.  Kipling's  tales  are  matchler-s, 
and  his  latest  collection,  'Many  Inventions,'  contains  several  such." — Philadelpliia 
Press. 

"Of  late  essays  in  fiction  the  work  of  Kipling  can  be  compared  toonly  three— 
Blackmore's  '  Lorr.a  Doone,'  Stevenson's  niarvcloiis  sketch  of  Villon  in  the  'Nev/ 
Ar.Tbian  Nights,' and  Thomas  Hardy's  '  Toss  of  the  IJ'Urbervilles.'  .  .  ,  It  is  probably 
ownig  to  this  extreme  care  that  '  Many  Inventions  '  is  undoubtedly  Mr.  Kipling's  best 
book." — Chicago  Post. 

"  Mr.  Kipling's  stjde  is  too  well  known  to  American  readers  to  require  introduction, 
but  it  can  scarcely  be  amiss  to  say  tliere  is  not  a  story  in  this  collection  that  does  not 
more  than  repay  a  perusal  i.f  them  all." — Baltimore  Atnerican. 

"  As  a  writer  of  short  stories  Rudyard  Kipling  is  a  genius.  He  has  had  imitators, 
but  they  have  not  been  successful  in  dimming  the  luster  of  his  achievements  by  con- 
trast.  .  .  .  'Many  Inventions'  is  the  title.  And  they  are  inventions— entirely  origi- 
nal in  incident,  ingenious  in  plot,  and  startling  by  their  boldness  and  force." — Rochester 
Herald. 

"How  clever  he  is!  This  must  always  be  the  first  thought  on  reading  such  a 
collection  of  Kipling's  stories.  Kere  is  art — art  of  the  most  consummate  sort.  Com- 
pared with  this,  the  stories  of  our  brightest  young  writers  become  commonplace."— 
New  York  Evangelist. 

"  Taking  the  group  as  a  whole,  it  may  be  said  that  the  execution  is  up  to  his  best 
m  the  past,  while  two  or  three  sketches  surpass  in  rounaed  strength  and  vividness  ol 
imagination  anything  else  he  has  done." — Hartford  Courant. 

"Fifteen  more  extraordinary  .sketches,  without  a  tinge  of  sensationalism,  it  would 
')e  hard  to  find.  .  .  .  Every  one  has  an  individuality  of  its  own  which  fascinates  tl;'i 
leader." — Boston  Times. 


D.  APPLETON    &   CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York. 


D.   APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


GILBERT  PARKER'S  BEST   BOOKS. 


"  Mr.  Parker  has  been  named  more  than  once,  and  in  quarters  of 
repute,  '  the  coming  man.' " — London  Literary  World. 


The  Trail  of  the  Sword. 

Paper,  50  cents  ;  cloth,  $1.00. 

Philadelphia  Bulletin. 

"Mr.  Parker  here  adds  to  a  reputation  already  wide,  and  anew 
demonstrates  hTs  power  of  pictorial  portrayal  and  of  strong  dramatic 
situation  and  climax." 

9  'pittsburg  Times. 

■*  "  The  tale  holds  the  reader's  interest  from  first  to  last,  for  it  is  full 

'   "i   <  of  fire  and  spirit,  abounding  in  incident,  and  marked  by  good  charac- 
ter drawing." 

The  Trespasser. 

Paper,  50  cents  ;  cloth,  $1.00. 
''T^he  Critic. 

,  "Interest,  pith,  force,  and  charm — Mr.  Parker's  new  story  pos- 

sesses all  these  qualities.  .  .  .  Almost  bare  of  synthetical  decoration, 
his  parag^raphs  are  stirring  because  they  are  real.  We  read  at  times — 
as  we  have  read  the  great  masters  of  romance — breathlessly." 

Tiosion  Advertiser. 

"  Gilbert  Parker  writes  a  strong  novel,  but  thus  far  this  is  his  mas- 
terpiece. ...  It  is  one  of  the  great  novels  of  the  year." 

The  Translation  of  a  Savage, 

Flexible  cloth,  75  cents. 
'J^he  Nation. 

"  A  book  which  no  one  will  be  satisfied  to  put  down  until  the  end 
has  been  matter  of  certainty  and  assurance." 

T^oston  Home  yournal. 

"A  story  of  remarkable  interest,  originality,  and  ingenuity  of  con- 
struction." 

J  ondon  Daily  News. 

"The  perusal  of  this  romance  will  repay  those  who  care  for  new 
and  original  types  of  character,  and  who  are  susceptible  to  the  fascina- 
tion of  a  fresh  and  vigorous  style." 

New  York  :  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


D.   APPLETON  &   CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

BOOKS  BY  WILLIAM  O.  STODDARD. 

f^HRIS,  THE  MODEL-MAKER.  A  Story  of  New 
^  York.  With  6  full-page  Illustrations  by  B.  West  Clinedinst. 
i2nio.  Cloth,  $1.50. 
A  St  jry  like  this  comes  home  to  most  American  youth,  for  it  tells  how  a  boy  made 
hi-<  o.vn  way.  It  points  out  a  path,  but  Mr.  Stoddard  is  too  skilled  a  story-teller  ever 
to  pose  as  a  moralist,  and  the  action  of  his  tale  moves  on  constantly  while  the  interest 
of  his  pictures  and  incidents  of  New  York  life  is  unceasing. 

)N    THE   OLD    FRONTIER.     With   10  full-page 

Illustrations.     l2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"  A  capital  story  of  life  in  the  middle  of  the  last  century.  .  .  .  The  characters  intro- 
duced really  live  and  talk,  and  the  story  recommends  itself  not  only  to  boys  and  girls 
but  to  their  parents." — New  \  'ork  Times. 

"  An  exciting  narrative  This  tale,  which  relates  to  the  last  raids  of  the  Iroquois, 
is  as  stirring  as  the  ber.t  of  those  which  have  come  from  the  author's  pen." — Fhiladel- 
phia  Evening  Bulletin. 

"PHE  BATTLE  OF  NEW  YORK.     With  11  full- 
-*        page  Illustrations    and    colored    Frontispiece.      i2mo.      Cloth, 

$1.50. 
"Young  people  who  are  interested  in  the  ever- thrilling  story  of  the  great  rebellion 
will  find  in  this  romance  a  wonderfully  graphic  picture  of  New  York  in  war  time." — 
Bjstoti  Traz'eiler. 

"The  description  of  these  terrible  days  and  more  awful  nights  is  very  animated." — 
New  York  Evening  Post. 

T  ITTLE  SMOICE.     A    story  of  the    Sioux  Indians. 
-^"-^    With  12  full-page  Illustrations  by  F.  S.  Dellenbaugh,  por- 
traits of  Sitting  Bull,  Red  Cloud,  and  other  chiefs,  and  72  head 
and  tail  pieces  representing  the  various  implements  and  sur- 
roundings of  Indian  life.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 
"  It  is  not  only  a  story  of  adventure,  but  the  volume  abounds  in  information  con- 
cerning this  most  powerful  of  remaining  Indian  tribes.     The  work  of  the  author  has 
been  well  supplemented  by  the  artist." — Boston  Traveller. 

"More  elaborately  illustrated  than  any  juvenile  work  dealing  with  Indian  life  ever 
published." —  Churchman. 

f^ROWDED  OUT  C  CRO  FIELD.     The  story  of  a 

^      country  boy  who  fought  his  way  to  success  in  the  great  metrop- 
olis.    With    23    Illustrations  by  C.   T.  Hill.      i2mo.     Cloth. 
Si  50. 
"  There  are  few  \vriters  who  know  how  to  meet  the  tastes  and  needs  of  boys  better 
than   does  William  O.  Stoddard.     This  excellent  storj'  teaches  boys  to  be  men,  not 
prigs  or  Indian  hunters.     If  our  boys  v^'ould  read  more  such  books,  and  less  of  the 
blood-and-thunder  order,  it  would  be  rare  good  ionwne."  —Detroit  Free  Press. 


New  York  :  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


T 


I 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


BOOKS  BY  HEZEKIAH  BUTTERWORTH. 

HE  PATRIOT  SCHOOLMASTER.     A   Tale  of 

the  Minute  Men  and  the   Sons  of  Liberty.     \Yith  6  full-pa^^e 

Illustrations  by  H.  Winthrop  Peirce.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

In  this  stirring  historical  romance  the  stately  figure  of  Samuel  Adams 
succeeds  Lincoln  and  \Vashinj;ton  in  pievious  books  as  the  central  figures, 
and  we  live  through  the  dramas  of  Boston's  occupancy  by  the  British,  and 
Bunker  Hill  and  Lexington.  It  is  a  story  infused  with  noble  patriotism,  and 
most  vividly  told. 

TV  THE  BO  YHOOD  OF  LINCOLN.     A  Story  of 

the  Black  H&jvk  War  and  the  Ttmker  Schoolmaster.  With 
12  Illustrations  and  colored  Frontispiece.  l2mo.  Cloth, 
$1.50. 

"^'  There  is  j^cat  fascination  in  these  glimpses  of  Lincoln'?  early  life,  and  the  artist's 
"  atCempanying  pictures  are  very  clever  and  welcome." — Dicokiyti  1  itr.es. 

"The  author  presents  facts  in  a  most  attractive  framewoik  of  fiction,  and  imbues 
the  whole  with  his  peculiar  humor.  Ihe  illustrations  are  numerous  and  of  more  than 
usual  excellence." — Ne'M  Haven  Palladium. 

"  One  of  the  best  stories  for  youthful  readers  that  has  ever  been  written." — Boston 
Budget. 

"  A  work  which  should  be  put  into  the  hands  of  every  American  boy." — Philadel- 
phia Item. 

HE  BO  YS  OF  GREEN  WA  V  CO  UR  T.  A  Story 
of  the  Early  Years  of  Washington.  With  lo  full-page  Illus- 
trations.    i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"Mr.  Butterworth  has  written  an  excellent  book,  and  one  that  young  people  will 
find  delightful  reading." — Boston  Beacon. 

"  Skillfully  combining  fact  and  fiction,  he  has  given  us  a  story  historically  instruc- 
tive and  at  the  same  time  entertaining." — Bos/on  Tra7iscriJ>t. 

"  The  book  is  replete  with  picturesque  incidents  and  legends  of  hunting  exploits 
and  adventures,  and  the  fi.c^ure  of  young  Washington  is  shown  in  a  light  which  will  be 
sure  to  enlist  the  interest  of  young  readers."—  Chicago  Herald. 

"  Mr.  Butterworth  has  made  his  storj'  both  absorbing  in  interest  and  valuable  as  a 
teacher  of  history." — San  Francisco  Argonaut. 

fHE    LOG    SCHOOL-HOUSE    ON    THE    CO- 

■^       LUMBIA.     With    13    full-page    Illustrations   by  J.    Carter 

Beard,  E.  J.  Austen,  and  others.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"  This  book  will  charm  all  who  turn  its  ra:;es.  There  are  few  books  of  popular 
information  concerning  the  pioneers  of  the  great  Northwest,  and  this  one  is  worthy  of 
sincere  praise."- — Seattle  Post-Intelligencer. 

"  Mr.  Butterworth  always  interests  his  young  readers,  and  holds  their  attention 
from  first  to  last." — Ne^u  i'ork  Inde/endent. 


T 


New  York  :    D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


A 


D.   APPLETON  cSi   CO.'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

JOURNEY  IN  OTHER    WORLDS.      A   Ro^ 

Tiiance  of  the  Future.     By  John  Jacob  Astor.     With  9  full- 
page  Illustrations  by  Dan  Beard.     i2mo.     Cloth,  $1.50. 

"An  interesting  and  cleverly  devised   book.  .  .  .  No  lack   of  imagination.  .  . 
Shows  a  skillful  and  wide  acquaintance  with  scientific  iz.cis."^Ncw  York  Herald. 

"The  author  speculates  cleverly  and  daringly  on  the  scientific  advance  of  the  earth, 
and  he  revels  in  the  physical  luxuriance  of  Jupiter;  but  he  also  lets  his  imagination 
travel  through  spiritual  realms,  and  evidently  delights  in  mystic  speculation  quite  as 
much  as  in  scientific  investigation.  If  he  is  a  follower  of  Jules  Verne,  he  has  not  forgot- 
ten also  to  study  the  philosophers." — New  York  Tribune. 

"  A  beautiful  example  of  typographical  art  and  the  bookmaker's  skill.  .  .  .  To 
appreciate  the  story  one  must  read  it."— Nt-w  York  Commercial  Advertiser. 

"The  date  of  the  events  narrated  in  this  book  is  supposed  to  be  2000  A.  D.  The 
inhabitants  of  North  America  have  increased  mightily  in  numbers  and  power  and 
knowledge.  It  is  an  age  of  marvelous  scientific  attainments.  Flying  machines  have 
long  been  in  common  use,  and  finally  a  new  power  is  discovered  called  '  apergy,' 
the  reverse  of  gravitation,  by  which  people  are  able  to  fiy  off  into  space  in  any  direc- 
tion, and  at  v/hat  speed  they  please." — New  York  Sun. 

"  The  scientific  romance  by  John  Jacob  Astor  is  more  than  likely  to  secure  a  dis- 
tinct popular  success,  and  achieve  widespread  vogue  both  as  an  amusing  and  interest- 
esting  story,  and  a  thoughtful  endeavor  to  prophesy  some  of  the  triumphs  which  science 
is  destined  to  win  by  the  year  2000.  The  book  has  been  written  with  a  purpose,  and 
that  a  higher  one  than  the  mere  spinning  of  a  highly  imaginative  yam.  Mr.  Astor  has 
been  engaged  upon  the  book  forever  tft-o  years,  and  has  brought  to  bear  upon  it  a 
great  deal  of  hard  work  in  the  way  of  scientific  research,  of  which  he  has  been  vciy  fend 
ever  since  he  entered  Harvard.  It  is  admirably  illustrated  by  Dan  Beard."— i1/a//  and 
Express. 

"  Mr.  Astor  has  himself  almost  all  the  qualities  imaginable  for  making  the  science  of 
astronomy  popular.  He  knows  the  learned  maps  of  the  astrologers.  He  knows  the 
work  of  Copernicus.  He  has  made  calculations  and  observations.  He  is  enthusiastic, 
and  the  spectacular  does  not  frighten  him." — New  York  Titnes. 

"The  work  will  remind  the  reader  very  much  of  Jules  Verne  in  its  general  plan  of 
using  scientific  facts  and  speculation  as  a  skeleton  on  which  to  hang  the  romantic 
adventures  of  the  central  figures,  who  have  all  the  daring  ingenuity  and  luck  of  Mr. 
Verne's  heroes.  Mr.  Astor  uses  history  to  point  out  what  in  his  opinion  science  may 
be  expected  to  accomplish.     It  is  a  romance  with  a  purpose." — Chicago  Inter-Occan. 

"  The  romance  contains  many  new  and  striking  developments  of  the  possibilities 
of  science  hereafter  to  be  explored,  but  the  volume  is  intensely  interesting,  both  as  a 
product  of  imagination  and  an  illustration  of  the  ingenious  and  original  applicatien  of 
science." — Rochester  Herald. 


New  York:  D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  72  Fifth  Avenue. 


*«. 


\ 


.-«; 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last.d^te  stamped  below. 


JUL  8      1966 
fiEC'D-LDjUDn 

•APR  18 1871 


^i2Q<i 


'orm  L9-42m-8,'49(B5573)444 


rjNivER<?rnr  op  cauvwnia 


AA    000  386  438    6  ■     3 


jJ58  01106  1024 


